Home

"user manual"

1. Unit error flag Master error flag Error log contains new errors Parameter transfer in progress Local parameter storage error Local parameter load error File read error Error log storage error Note n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Description Correction Unit error flag If this bit is set one of the other error flags in the Unit Status Word is set Refer to these bits for error determination Master error flag If this bit is set one of the error flags in the Master Status 2 Word is set Refer to these bits for error determination Error Log contains new There are new errors available in the Error Log since the last time the error log was errors read Reading the error log using the ERROR LOG READ FINS command will clear this bit flag Parameter transfer in A Parameter transfer is in progress either from the configurator to the Unit or progress between the Unit and the Memory Card Local parameter storage An error has occurred when writing the configuration to the non volatile memory error To correct this e Restart the Unit e Re download the configuration e Ifthe problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Local parameter load error An error has occurred when loading the configuration from the non volatile mem ory to the volatile memory at start up Most likely causes e A failure or interrup
2. 0 0000 Maintenance eeno tailed ee eee eet ee a Ee he ee Tel SCleanine sss vss koe tees bk OT eE ESE S O I 22 IDSPCCUON sees tag Gh R bee Aes ee Rien R placing the Unit eesriie eai eraa diel ea gs eels eb ep tens 7 8 1 Replacement Precautions 0000 5 7 8 2 Setting the Unit after Replacement 7 8 3 Addition Replacement of Units on the PROFIBUS Network 176 177 177 177 179 180 181 183 183 184 186 186 187 192 196 196 197 198 199 199 199 200 200 200 200 175 Overview Section 7 1 7 1 Overview Troubleshooting on the Master Unit Troubleshooting the Configuration Software Troubleshooting the network 176 Note The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and the Configuration software package provides extensive means for troubleshooting which can be used to quickly determine errors in the Unit in the configuration in the net work and or in remote slave devices allocated to the Unit For troubleshooting purposes the following error indicators can be used e LED indicators on the front of the Unit Three red error LED indicators and four status LED indicators show Unit and network status and errors e ClO Words Unit Status CIO Word n 4 containing status and error flags of the Unit and Master Status 2 CIO Word n 6 containing error information about the PROFIBUS network and the PROFIBUS functions of the Unit e The Error Log collec
3. 0 0 00 00 000005 3 2 7 Exporting to HTML 0 00 0 eee 3 2 8 Error Logging and FDT Monitoring 3 2 9 Access Control and User Management CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM 3 3 1 Configuration User Interface 0 0 00 00 00008 3 3 2 Diagnostics User Interface 0 eee ee eee 3 3 3 Connecting to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 0 004 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM 00 0 3 4 1 Configuration User Interface 00 0 0 00 00 0008 3 4 2 Diagnostics User Interface 0 0 00 cee eee eee 3 4 3 Connecting to the C200HW PRM21 00008 Generic Slave Device DTM puai errena tena E Eaa e S T eee 3 5 1 Configuration User Interface 00 00 0004 3 5 2 Diagnostics User Interface 0 0 40 40 40 48 49 49 50 53 55 55 56 56 57 59 61 61 70 76 79 79 84 87 89 89 97 39 Installation Section 3 1 3 1 Installation 3 1 1 Installation Requirements CX Profibus Configuration software is required to configure the PROFIBUS DP Master before operating the network Without a valid configuration the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will not be able to achieve data communication with the slave devices on the network The following are the minimum requirements for a PC to install the CX Profi bus configurator software e PC Pent
4. Expansion Backplane 10 Units max End cover P S eee PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit IC I O Control Unit Il 1 O Interface Unit Note The CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units maximum current consump tion is 400 mA Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 30 Initial Setup Procedure Section 2 3 Mount the CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to the PLC using the following procedure 1 Carefully align the connectors to mount the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Mounting Procedure Connector PA205R rower u AC100 240y INPUT Ln a e e e BUS RUN o 9 OUTPUT amp 6 62 SEN t a a OP E afa A 2 a PORT _ Move the yellow sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit until they click 2 into positi
5. Unit requests Unit requests Unit requests cyclic refresh cyclic refresh cyclic refresh Unit requests Unit requests cyclic refresh cyclic refresh PLC Cycle Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction y Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution CIO Refresh Output data refresh O O 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 Input data refresh 1 2 PROFIBUS Cycle Cycle n Cycle n 1 Cycle n 2 End of PROFIBUS DP cycle End of PROFIBUS DP cycle End of PROFIBUS DP cycle 153 I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 PROFIBUS DP I O data exchange cycle gt PLC cyclic refresh results in the following I O transfer characteristics e Not all output data is guaranteed to be transmitted over the PROFIBUS network referring to the figure above Output data marked with O is overwritten by O 1 and therefore lost e Input data is always sent to the PLC CPU Note 1 PLC cyclic refresh times may vary depending on the execution of the user program If variation is too large this may result in I O data being lost 2 To prevent output data not being transmitted over the PROFIBUS network the PROFIBUS DP cycle time must made at least two times the PLC cyclic refresh time This can be accomplished by changing the Target Token Ro tation time in the Master DTM Configuration User Interface see section 6 4 2 Setting the Bus Parameters PROFIBUS DP Cycle lt The figure below shows the effects of the cyclic refresh rule
6. Segment 4 Max 31 stations Segment 5 Max 30 stations ws Master or slave station R Repeater o Termination Segment 6 Max 31 stations Max total number of stations 126 34 Setting up a Network Section 2 4 Cable Type The PROFIBUS standard EN 50170 specifies Type A shielded twisted pair cable as the recommended cable type for use in an RS 485 based PROFI BUS network This cable type has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Impedance 135 165 ohms Capacitance per unit length lt 30 pF m Loop resistance 110 ohms km Core diameter 0 64 mm Core cross section 0 34 mm Note The PROFIBUS standard EN 50170 also specifies a Type B cable with differ ent cable characteristics Use of Type B cable is no longer recommended Maximum PROFIBUS The transmission speed defines the maximum advised cable distance or Cable Length cable segment in metres before the use of a repeater is recommended The cable lengths specified in the following table are based on PROFIBUS type A cable Baud rate Distance segment Baud rate Distance segment kbit s m kbit s m Note If network extension beyond the range of the advised cable length is required the use of fibre optic cable to cross the larger distance should be considered Stub Lines Passive Stub lines branches from the main line should be avoided for data transmission speeds of m
7. Slave I O data refresh jj gt ct gt le Tw Tpp cye Trrecye Tour t Ty gt a M proc pa proc Tuni Trica a gt A 1 0 y ON ON Tin Slave device Input ON OFF delay Tpp cye PROFIBUS I O data exchange cycle time See Appendix A Bus Parameters Tu Proc_ lO Processing time in the Master Unit TM Rri Master request cyclic refresh until actual start of cyclic refresh Tpic cye PLC cycle time See section 6 5 5 PLC Cycle Time Performance Tpic pt PLC cyclic refresh cycle time See section 6 5 5 Tout Slave device Output ON OFF delay The total I O response time is the sum of all components Tio Tin TpB cyc 2 T Proc TuRrt TPLC Cyc Tpio rt Tout 157 I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 6 5 7 System Startup Time Startup Time Definition 158 The system startup time is the delay from the time the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is turned ON or reset until I O data exchange with all slave devices has been established For this the following is assumed e The Master Unit has been configured to go to OPERATE mode if the PLC mode is set to RUN MONITOR mode e All slave devices are powered up and initialized before the Master Unit is turned ON e All slave devices are assumed to go to I O data exchange without delays The total system startup time is the sum of the following components e Master Unit startup checking e Initialization of communication with PLC CP
8. 105 Allocated CIO Area Words s s lt s sSsSsSsSSSSS tion 4 2 Bit Name Status Controlled Unit operation by Transmit Global Upon setting this switch the Unit will transmit one Global Control mes Control message sage over the network The contents of the message is defined in ClO Word n 2 see 4 2 2 Global Control Message Word n 2 See Note 3 The bit will be turned OFF by the Unit if the Global Control message has been transmitted Reserved by sys These bits are ignored in the Unit If set they will be immediately tem returned to OFF Clear new diagnos Upon setting this switch the Unit will clear all new diagnostics bit flags in tics bits CIO Word n 17 to n 24 These bits indicate reception of new slave diagnostics data Clearing the bit flags provides a clear indication for new messages to arrive If the bit flags have been cleared the Unit will reset this bit to OFF Reserved by sys These bits are ignored in the Unit If set they will immediately be set to tem OFF by the Unit Note 1 When switching the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit from one mode to anoth er it will internally implement the mode transition via the intermediate modes e g from OFF LINE to OPERATE will be performed as OFF LINE STOP CLEAR OPERATE See also section 1 1 7 Network Op eration Modes 2 If two or more mode switches i e Bit 00 to 03 have been set at the same time or the
9. Local parameter load error The Local parameter load error flag will be turned ON if an error occurred during an attempt to transfer the Configuration and setup data from non volatile to volatile memory The flag will be turned OFF if a successful load attempt is made Reserved by sys tem This bit will be set to OFF by the Unit File read error The File read error flag will be turned ON if an error occurred during an attempt to transfer the Configuration and setup data from a flash card in the PLC CPU to the Unit s non volatile memory The error can be caused by an error in the File or an error during transfer The flag will be turned OFF if a successful load from flash card is made Reserved by sys tem These bits will be set to OFF by the Unit Error log storage error The Error log storage error flag will be turned ON if an error occurred during an attempt to write the Error log to internal non volatile memory If the error occurred the Error log data in the non volatile memory may be corrupted Upon a restart the Unit will attempt to repair the Error log When set to OFF this bit indicates that the Error log has been trans ferred to the non volatile memory successfully Reserved by sys tem These bits will be set to OFF by the Unit 4 2 4 Master Status 1 Word n 5 The Master Status 1 word collects all status information related to the PROFI BUS DP Master fu
10. Station type This LED indicator only indicates the device type i e slave device and does not indicate a problem Watchdog On This LED indicator only indicates that the Watchdog has been enabled at the slave device and does not indicate a problem Freeze mode This LED indicator only indicates the slave device has received a Global Control Freeze com mand and does not indicate a problem Sync mode This LED indicator only indicates the slave device has received a Global Control Sync com mand and does not indicate a problem Slave deactivated This LED indicator indicates the slave device has been disabled in the Master Unit and does not indicate a problem Extended diagnostics overflow The slave device has more diagnostics to report than it can hold in its buffer This is usually an indication for problems e Check the slave device s extended diagnostics information Open the associated Slave DTM to check on the contents of the extended diagnostics if this has been returned Check the slave device and make sure that it is working properly Check any loose modules in case the slave device is a modular device Check the wiring of the I O at the slave device Slaves can often detect short circuits on their physical 1 0 Consult the operation manual of the slave device Check if additional action must be taken to initiate I O data exchange e g reset the device after a malfunction 191 Tro
11. The Bus Parameters are a number of settings which define the communica tion behaviour and timing on the PROFIBUS network The Bus Parameters depend on the selected baud rate certain slave communication parameters as well as the number of I O data bytes exchanged between the Master Unit and each of the slave devices 65 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 The required combination of Bus Parameters is calculated by the program based on the dependencies mentioned above However the user can change selected Bus Parameter manually if the application requires this Z Caution Changing the calculated Bus Parameters manually is not recommended and should only be performed if this is really necessary Changing the Bus Param eters to an invalid combination may result in Unit malfunctioning and unex pected behaviour Note When making changes to Bus Parameters selecting the Optimize buttons allows toggling between the optimized values and the changed values Selecting an other baud rate after changing parameters will reset the Bus Parameters to default values for the new baud rate The table below lists the parameters shown in the Bus Parameter tab Description Editable by User Baud rate Defines the transmission rate on the PROFIBUS DP Network The following baud Yes rate values are defined by the PROFIBUS DP standard e 9 6 kBits s e 19 2 kBits s e 45 45 kBits s e 93 75 kBits s e 187 5 kBits s e 5
12. 21 Finally after completing the CX Server installation CX Profibus installa tion is complete The window shown below is displayed to notify the user Click the Finish Button to finalize installation and view the readme txt file 47 Installation Section 3 1 for CX Profibus containing last minute information on the installed pro gram components CxX Profibus InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing C Profibus on your computer Back Cancel 22 In order to be ensured of OMRON support for the program as well as in formation on updates please fill out the registration card supplied with the software package and return it to the OMRON regional sales office or to your local OMRON representative 3 1 3 Installing the C200HW PRM21 DTM The first version of CX Profibus i e CX Profibus 1 0 did not include the C200HW PRM21 Instead this component could be downloaded from the OMRON Internet website To install the C200HW PRM21 separately from CX Profibus perform the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Select from the task bar the Start Run option and browse for the down loaded setup file named OMRON C200HW PRM21 DTM setup exe 2 Press the OK button to run the setup and follow the instructions as present ed during the installation 48 CX Profibus Section 3 2 3 2 CX Profibus 3 2 1 Starting CX Profibus Starting CX Profibus Login Window Default Password Z Caution
13. Pi Insert Append Configured Modules Slot Module Name Module Configuration Identifier 1 1 word In Out OxFO 2 2 words In Out OxF1 3 4 words In Out OxF3 4 8 words In Out ORF Remove 0K Cancel Apply Help 134 Configuring the Slave Devices Section 6 3 Removing I O Modules To remove I O modules from the Configured Modules list perform one of the following procedures e Select the I O module that needs to be removed from the Configured Modules list and double click it with the left mouse button If more than one module must be added repeat this step for the other modules e Select the I O module that needs to be removed from the Configured Modules list and press either the Remove button This method allows selection of more than one module by pressing either the Shift or the Ctrl key on the keyboard while selecting the modules Watchdog Settings Apart from the I O module selection the Configuration tab also contains the settings for two other parameters 1 Enable Watchdog Control This parameter will enable disable the monitoring of the Master Slave communication in the slave device If enabled the slave will stop I O data exchange with the Master if the Master has not send any request mes sage to the slave within the configured Watchdog time Furthermore the slave will switch its outputs to a known state e signal its change of state in a diagnostics message the n
14. UNIT mm CJ1W PRM21 65 lo0000 UNIT mm 13 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Section 1 3 1 3 3 Comparison with Previous Model The following table provides a comparison between the CS1W PRM21 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units and their predecessor the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master used in a CS series PLC Unit classification C200HW PRM21 C200H Special I O Unit CS1 CJ1W PRM21 CPU Bus Unit Mounting position e CPU Rack e C200H I O Expansion Rack e CS series Expansion Rack e Can not be mounted on a CS1D PLC e CPU Rack e CS CJ series Expansion Rack e CS1W PRM21 can be mounted on CS1D Applicable Unit numbers 0 to F Hex 0 to F Hex Maximum number of Units per PLC 16 16 Allocated CIO Area words 2 000 to 2 004 10 x unit number Up to 4 CIO words contain e Command settings e Unit Status and error flags e Error reporting from the PROFIBUS inter face 1 500 to 1 524 25 x unit number Up to 25 CIO words contain e Command settings e Unit Status and error flags e PROFIBUS status and error flags e Slave status flags Allocated DM Area words D20000 to D20017 100 x unit number The area contains user defined memory mapping of I O data At start up this area is transferred to the Unit D30000 to D30099 100 x unit number Not used
15. PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is configured After switch ing the Master Unit to OPERATE the Unit itself or other Units on the PLC CPU showed unexpected behaviour The I O data mapping of the Master Unit may overwrite either its won or other Unit ClO DM Areas settings Master Unit operational mode changes unexpectedly Global Control commands are transmitted unexpectedly Other Special I O Units or Special Bus Units change behaviour unexpectedly Verify the I O Mapping of the Master Unit e Ensure that the I O data of the Master Unit does not overwrite its own CIO words Ensure that the I O data of the Master Unit does not overwrite ClO words or DM words of other Special I O or Special CPU Units e g Ethernet Units The bus parameter used on the network are wrong e O data exchange between the Master Unit and the PLC stops Verify that the correct bus parameters have been used e If necessary Restart the Unit and force it to OFFLINE immediately or Disconnect the network cable first and restart the Unit Download the correct Bus parameters PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is configured All slaves were in data exchange but all outputs are now set to zeros Inputs can still be read 194 The Master Unit is in CLEAR mode The BST LED indicator is Flashing The CLEAR switch has been set in the Switch word 1 CIO Word n bit 02 see Note The Unit has been configured for Auto CLEAR and an error
16. Function not supported Freeze mode Invalid slave response Syne mode Parameter fault Master lock Station deactivated Extended diagnostics overflow The LED indicators in the upper half of the Slave Status tab shown in the fig ure above indicates the status of the slave devices by using different colours see section 6 7 1 Monitoring the Master Unit and the Network Slave Status Overview In case an LED indicator is either Red or Orange additional information can be obtained from the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit by using the mouse pointer to click on the coloured LED indicator The basic diagnostics information for the selected slave device is retrieved from the Master Unit and displayed in the lower half of the Slave Status tab The table below lists the LED indica tors which are of interest for troubleshooting LED Indicator Description Correction Station non existent The slave device does not respond to any of the request messages sent by the Master Unit e Make sure that the slave device is powered correctly e Check the wiring and make sure that the slave device and the Master Unit are connected Station not ready The slave is communicating but not ready for data transfer e Check the slave device and make sure that it is working properly e Check any loose modules in case the slave device is a modular device e Consult the operation manual of the slave device Check if addit
17. 237 C200HW PRM21 Notes Appendix G CIO Bit Name Value Description Word DM setting error out put area mapping No error There is an error in the output area mapping The mapping contains an incorrect value for either e the start address in the output buffer in the Master e the start address of the output area s in the PLC e or the size of the output area s or the specified size exceed the boundaries of available buffer DM LR CIO or HR areas DM setting error input area mapping No error There is an error in the input area mapping The DM settings contain an incorrect value for either e the start address in the input buffer in the Master e the start address of the input area s in the PLC e or the size of the input area s or the specified size exceed the boundaries of available buffer DM LR CIO or HR areas Control command not processed The output mailbox was able to receive and process the previously issued control command message The issued control command could not be processed because the out put mailbox was full see section 5 2 or the RUN bit was not set or the bus communication was inhibited Output mailbox full The output mailbox is able to receive and process a message This message can be a control command issued via ClO n or any PROFI BUS command by using the IOWR instruction The output mailbox is full and cannot receive new messages Reply i
18. 44 Installation ction 3 1 stallation will now be performed the files will be copied to the destination folder and the necessary registry entries will be made CxX Profibus Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders Accessories Existing Folders Administrative Tools Adobe Belastingdienst 2002 Classic PhoneT ools Dell Modem On Hold Digital Line Detect Girotel xl InstallShield tel 14 A window is displayed showing the progress of the installation I x Setup Status CX Profibus Setup is performing the requested operations C Program Files Omron Cx Profibus help CxProfibus_de chm InstallShield 15 After completing the CX Profibus installation the setup program will launch the CX Server installation The window shown below will be dis played Select the Yes button to continue OO hl OMRON CX Server is required in order for CX Profibus to work Install CX Server now Cancel 16 The CX Server installation program will detect whether CX Server has been installed or not on the PC If a newer version of CX Server has been installed by another CX Suite application program the installation of CX Server for CX Profibus will be skipped If an olde
19. Example Selecting the I O Area Start Address Note Compressing an Input Output area has no effect on the start address of the area 1 2 3 Note The figure below shows the effects on the previous example after pressing the Compress button in both Output areas BEE Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK Output Allocation Input Allocation Bence Module i Addr He 2 1 CJ1W PRT21 1 words output 1 Word CI03200 2 2 words output 2 Word CI03400 3 4 words output 4 Word CI03201 3 1 CPM14 PRT21 2 bytes output No consis 2 Byte C103205 El r Output Area 1 Output Area 2 3200 2 1 words output 3400 2 2 words output 3201 2 4 words output 3401 2 words output 3202 4 words output 3402 3203 4 words output 3403 3204 4 words output 3404 3205 3 2 bytes output No consiste 3405 3206 3406 3207 3407 3208 3408 3209 xl 3409 zi Area clo v Occupied 0006 Words Area cio v Occupied 0002 Words Start Address 3200 Start Address 3400 Length 100 Compress Length 100 Compress After finalizing the mapping of the I O modules on to the various I O areas the addresses to which the areas will be mapped in the PLC memory need to be defined To define the area mapping perform the following settings 1 2 For each area which contains I O modules select the PLC memory area For that area set the address to which the first location of the Input Output area
20. If the slave device is already in the Sync mode a new Sync command will force the slave to update its outputs only once with the most recent output data received from the Master The bit set to OFF indicates that the Sync command will not be trans ferred to the slave devices Reserved by sys These bits are reserved by the system and will ignored by the Unit tem Freeze Mode The user can set the Freeze and Unfreeze bits at the same time and both will be transmitted to the targeted slave devices at the same time but the resulting action at the slave device is defined in the PROFIBUS standards Resulting action at slave No change in function Slave device will be in Freeze mode Slave device will be in Unfreeze mode Slave device will be in Unfreeze mode Sync Mode The user can set the Sync and Unsync bits at the same time and both will be transmitted to the targeted slave devices at the same time but the resulting action at the slave device is defined in the PROFIBUS standards Resulting action at slave No change in function Slave device will be in Sync mode Slave device will be in Unsync mode Slave device will be in Unsync mode 108 Allocated CIO Area Words s s s s s sSsSsSsSsSSSsSS ction 4 2 4 2 3 Unit Status Word n 4 The Unit status word contains all the status and error flags concerning the Unit itself as well as error flags whic
21. Inductors 110 mH B Line A Line 7 110 mH intermittent data transfer errors particularly if the bus segment is operated close to the specified limits for maximum numbers of devices maximum bus segment length and maximum data transfer rate In addition to the bus termination additional precautions must be taken to ensure proper operation at high baud rates i e baud rates of 500 kbit s and higher Due to the capacitive load of the device and the resulting cable reflec tions bus connectors must be provided with built in series inductors of 110 MH each as shown in the figure on the left Installing the inductors applies to all devices on the network and not only to the devices at both ends of the bus cable 2 4 3 PROFIBUS Cable Connector Bus Cable Connector 36 From previous station termination station The plug connector to be used on the CS CJ series PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is a 9 pin male sub D type preferably encased in metal and having a facility to connect the shield of the cable to the case or to pin 1 The cable should be connected to the receive transmit lines pin 3 B line and pin 8 A line The use of special PROFIBUS DP cable connectors which are available from several manufacturers is highly recommended Various models are widely available with or without the bus termination and inductors built in If provided in the connector the Bus termination can often be enabled or disabled throu
22. N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the PROFIBUS DP Master Units Programmable Controllers and related devices The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable operation of the PROFIBUS DP Master Units You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and PLC system 1 Intended Audience aes secs ancy Wade etna at ie bas eS ES Wakes SON Re ba xii 2 General Precautions 0 0 eee cee E a xii 3 Safety Precautions 0 0 uuunua ernu rrer rnare xii 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee xiii 5 Application Precautions 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee xiv 6 Conformance to EC Directives 1 0 2 cece tees xvi 6 1 Applicable Directives 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee XVi 6 2 Concepts sie 82 ots Sag ois E a cepted EE datas sed olen a tealely xvi 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives u 0 e eee eee xvi xi Intended Audience 1 2 3 xii Intended Audience This manual is intended for the fo
23. Tile Horizontally Tiles all open DTM User Interfaces horizontally Tile Vertically Tiles all open DTM User Interfaces vertically Close All Closes all open DTM User Interfaces Contents Opens the Help dialog and lists the Help file contents Index Opens the Help dialog and lists the Help Index About CX Profibus Opens the About dialog window for CX Profibus Tool Bar The tool bar provides quick access buttons to the user for frequently used menu commands The table below lists the toolbar buttons Icon Description Equivalent menu command Creates a new project File New Opens an existing project file File Open Saves the displayed project to a file File Save Connects the configurator to the selected devices Device Go Online Downloads the parameters to the device Device Download Parameters Uploads the parameters from the device Device Upload Parameters ol 5 A oes ES Opens the Device Catalogue View Device Catalogue Status Bar The status bar displays the current user role i e the login level In case the Error Log window has been closed the status bar will additionally display a ix symbol to indicate that new errors are available in the Error Log window Double clicking the symbol will open the Error Log window 52 CX Profibus Section 3 2 3 2 3 Device Catalogue Device Catalogue Main Comp
24. made Cannot clear the Error Log The Error Remove the error cause and Re send the cause still exists ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS command 198 Maintenance Section 7 7 7 7 Maintenance 7 7 1 Cleaning Z Caution 7 7 2 Inspection Inspection Equipment Inspection Procedure This section describes the routine cleaning and inspection recommended as regular maintenance Clean the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit regularly as described below in order to keep it in an optimum operating condition e Regularly wipe the Unit with a dry soft cloth e If a spot cannot be removed with a dry cloth dampen the cloth with a neu tral cleaner wring out the cloth and wipe the Unit Never use volatile solvents such as paint thinner benzine or chemical wipes These substances could damage the surface of the Unit Be sure to inspect the system periodically to keep it in optimum operating con dition In general inspect the system once or twice a year but more fre quently if the system is used in high temperature or high humidity environments or dirty dusty conditions Prepare the following equipment before inspecting the system Required Equipment Philips type screwdriver multimeter alcohol and a clean cloth Optional Test Equipment Depending on system conditions a synchroscope oscilloscope thermometer or hygrometer to measure humidity might be needed Check the items in the following table and correct any
25. Generating the Device Catalogue Select Program OMRON and CX Profibus from the Start Menu if the default program folder name is used At startup the CX Profibus splash screen will appear on top of which a login window as shown below will be displayed CX Profibus Login x User Administrator hd Password ti isisSssSY Help Cancel The Login window provides the selection of the access level as well as the entry of the password belonging to the access level selected The default password at the first start up of CX Profibus is password and is applicable to all access levels Type in password without the quotes at the password entry line and select OK If access limitation to CX Profibus is required by the application the password should be changed as soon as possible Changing passwords is only possible on the Administrator level Refer to Changing the Passwords for an explana tion on how to change passwords After entering the correct password CX Profibus will start up and open The first time CX Profibus is started the Device Catalogue will still be empty Therefore the following window will be displayed on top of the CX Profibus application window Question CX Profibus x J Would you like to update the Device Catalogue __ Select Yes to generate the Device Catalogue for the first time This action may take several minutes depending on the number of installed DTMs After
26. I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 Example Removing Gaps from the I O Mapping Compressing the I O Mapping 150 1 2 3 The figure below illustrates the effects of re allocating I O modules when Auto Addressing has been disabled t 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Configuration i 5 x Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK Output Allocation Input Allocation Cancel Addr Index Device Module Size Type Aa e 2 1 CJ1W PRT21 1 words output 1 Word CI03200 2 2 words output 2 Word CI03201 3 4 words output 4 Word CI03203 3 1 CPM14 PRT21 2 bytes output No consis 2 Byte CI03207 a a e ee aena peaa r Output Area A Output Area 2 Module Name cio Module Name 3200 2 1 words output 3400 3201 2 2 words output 3401 3202 2 words output 3402 3203 2 4 words output 3403 3204 4 words output 3404 3205 4 words output 3405 3206 4 words output 3406 3207 3 2 bytes output No consiste 3407 3208 3408 3209 zl 3409 xl Initial 1 O Configuration BEE Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK Output Allocation Input Allocation Cancel Ador Index Device Module Sre Type Adn 2 1 CJ1W PRT21 1 words output 1 Word C103200 Se ea 2 words output 3 4 words output 4 Word CI03203 3 i CPM14 PRT21 2 bytes output No consis 2 Byte CI03207 E Output Area 1 gt p Out
27. Max length of input output data 360 Byte Length of input output data 60 Byte Max length of input data 200 Byte Length of input data 30 Byte Max length of output data 200 Byte Length of output data 30 Byte Max number of modules 32 Number of modules 4 Available Modules Module Name Module Configuration Identifier a 1 word In Out OxFO 2 words In Out OxF1 4 words In Out OxF3 8 words In Out OxF7 16 morde I O it xi Insert Append Configured Modules Slot Module Name Module Configuration Identifier 1 1 word In Out OxFO 2 2 words In Out OxF1 3 4 words In Out OFS 4 8 words In Out OF Remove 89 Generic Slave Device DTM Section 3 5 Configuration Tab Device Settings Module Configuration 90 Note Note Note Note In general the Configuration User Interface for the Generic Slave Device DTM contains three tabbed windows Above these windows the Device the Manufacturer the GSD file and the Unit s PROFIBUS ID number are dis played The three tabbed windows allow the user to set the slave parameters and configure the I O for a standard PROFIBUS DP slave device For slave devices which support the extension PROFIBUS DPV1 to additional tabs will be displayed These tabs are discussed later The Configuration tab contains the Device settings and the I O module config uration The Device Settings contain the device address i e the Units PROFIBUS address and the Watc
28. T Group 3 I Group 7 i I Group 8 After making the group assignment press the OK button to save the changes and close the DTM Configuration User Interface 6 4 Configuring the Master Opening the Master DTM After configuring all the slave DTMs the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Configuration Interface must be configured In order to open the Master DTM Configuration Interface do either one of the following e Select the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM in the Network Window and double click the left mouse button e Select the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM in the Network Window and right click the mouse From the context menu select Configuration 137 Configuring the Master S o Section6 4 The DTM Configuration User Interface is shown below RPE Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area ok omRon Cancel m Communication e A r Settings Station Address m Unit Number fo Device Information OMRON Corporation Description Firmware Version l Master Address In the first tab the device address and the unit number must be set The device address can be set in the range from 0 to 125 Unit Number The setting of the unit number is required to setup communication with the Unit through CX Server The setting in the user interface must match the set ting made with the rotary switch on the front of the Unit Note The device address is normally assigned automatically Only in the case wh
29. Word n 6 The Master Status 2 Word CIO Word n 6 contains error indications on the PROFIBUS interface and network The figure below shows the Master Status 2 Word layout The corresponding bit flag will turn ON if an error event has occurred 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 140 Disturbed bus error PROFIBUS protocol error Double Master address error Hardware error Mode command error Parameter error Note n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Disturbed bus Error Description Correction An error has occurred in the PROFIBUS interface with distorted messages received by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Most likely causes e No or invalid termination or no inductors used at high baud rates e Faulty wiring To correct this e Check the termination on the appropriate devices e Restart the PLC Unit to re download the configuration e Ifthe problem persists use CX Profibus to re download the configuration e lf the problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Troubleshooting Using Error Status Section 7 3 01 PROFIBUS protocol error An error has occurred in the PROFIBUS interface with distorted messages received by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Most likely causes e Lost token messages the token is not returned To correct this e Check the master devices on the network and make sure they are all workin
30. 111 Allocated CIO Area Wors o Sectiong 2 4 2 5 Master Status 2 Word n 6 The Master Status 2 word collects all error information on the Unit master function The status information is collected in the Master Status 1 word The contents of the Master Status 2 word Word n 6 are 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 Word n 6 Disturbed bus error PROFIBUS protocol error Double Master address error Hardware error Mode command error Parameter error Word n 6 n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number Status Controlled Unit operation by Disturbed Bus error When turned ON the Disturbed Bus error indicates that distorted mes sages have been received by the Unit This may occur if the network is not properly terminated or a cable is used which is too long for the selected baud rate Indicates that no Disturbed Bus error has occurred PROFIBUS proto The PROFIBUS Protocol error flag will be turned ON if an error has col error occurred in the protocol handling e g a transmitted token frame could not be read back Note In case this error occurs the Unit will automatically switch to OFF LINE mode Indicates that no PROFIBUS protocol error has occurred Double Master The Double Master Address error flag will be turned ON if there is address error another master on the bus with the same with the same device address as the CS1 C
31. 3 From the context menu select the Diagnosis option The DTM s Diagnos tics User Interface will be displayed 4 Select the Monitor tab for status monitoring The information displayed in the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis Monitor User Interface can be updated either Automatically or Manually e Automatic update Select the Automatic checkbox in the upper right corner of the Monitor tab window The refresh cycle will be approximately 0 5 to 1 second depend ing on the PC System The Manual button will be disabled e Manual update Press the Manual button in the upper right corner of the Monitor tab win dow to force a refresh of the window contents The Master status sub tab displays the status of the Master Unit itself The LED indicators are directly related to the four ClO status words of the Unit see sections 4 2 3 to 4 2 6 They can be used to e Obtain the status of the Master Unit and the network e Determine errors in the unit or the network e Troubleshoot the Master Unit and the network 167 Monitoring the Network Section 6 7 The Master Status 1 box indicates the Master Unit s status The Master Sta tus 2 box and the Unit Status box all indicate errors These LED indicators are discussed in section 7 4 2 Troubleshooting the Network using CX Profibus The Slave Status box indicates the overall status of the allocated slave devices Master Status 1 Main indicators in this box are the LED indicators for o
32. 5 6 7 Unit Components DM Area Allocations Unit No Allocated words decimal a D30000 to D30099 Unit No decimal Section 2 1 Allocated words D30800 to D30899 D30100 to D30199 i lt D30900 to D30999 D30200 to D30299 N D31000 to D31099 o ar D30300 to D30399 D31100 to D31199 ay lt D30400 to D30499 D31200 to D31299 o D30500 to D30599 D31300 to D31399 O D30600 to D30699 D31400 to D31499 NN OQ oO AJO N oO Xj D30700 to D30799 2 1 4 PROFIBUS Connector The PROFIBUS connector on the font of the Unit is a 9 pin female sub D con nector as recommended by the PROFIBUS standard EN 50170 D31500 to D31599 Description Shield Shield protective ground RxD TxD P_ Receive Transmit data plus B wire RTS Control signal for repeaters direction control TTL DGND Data ground reference potential for VP Supply voltage of the terminator resistance 5 Vdc Receive Transmit data minus A wire olo NI OD oO AJ Ow Pp The signal RTS TTL signal is for the direction control of repeaters which do not have a self controlling capability The signals DGND and VP are used to power the bus terminator located in the cable connector Note The orientation of the sub D connector allows the use of PROFIBUS connec tors with a 90 angle cable outlet e
33. Added line on C200HW PRM21 to About section Page 8 Added C200HW PRM21 DTM to bullet list Page 11 Added Vibration Shock and Dielectric strength data to table Page 16 Added C200HW PRM21 DTM to bullet list Page 16 Added description of C200HW PRM21 DTM Page 17 Added C200HW PRM21 DTM downloading description Page 17 Updated figure Page 18 Added C200HW PRM21 connection method to table Page 19 Added C200HW PRM21 DTM to table Page 20 Improved Basic Operations flow chart Page 28 Renamed section 2 2 Page 40 Added C200HW PRM21 DTM to bullet list Page 48 Added section 3 1 3 Page 61 Renamed section 3 3 Page 76 Renamed section 3 3 3 Page 79 Renumbered section 3 4 to section 3 5 Page 79 Added new section 3 4 Page 92 Added note on C200HW PRM21 word allocations Page 108 Added note on C200HW PRM21 and FINS Page 118 Added note on operation of the C200HW PRM21 Page 223 Added Appendix G 247 Revision History 248
34. Configuration Parameters are being transferred to or from the Unit Slave 72 Slave Diagnostics Received When turned ON it indicates that new slave diagnostics have been received All Slaves in Data Exchange When turned ON it indicates that all slaves are in Data exchange with the Mas ter Unit CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Slave Status Tab The Slave Status tab displays a comprehensive overview of the status of the allocated slaves An example of the Slave Status tab is shown below afl 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Diagnosis o x Monitor Online Operations Close Master Status Slave Status Error History Help r Refresh m r Slave Status Flags I Automatic 3456789 un OO OOCOOCO 1730 119309000000000 8 O 22 OOOOOCO000 4048 QOOOOOOOOO nons 8068 OOOO Slave Diagnostic Data Selected Slave 2 oO New Diagnostics Received Station non existent Parameter request used Station not ready Static diagnostics Configuration fault Station type Extended diagnostics received Watchdog On Function not supported Freeze mode Invalid slave response Syne mode Parameter fault Station deactivated O Master lock Extended diagnostics overflow LED Indicator Colours The LED indicators in the Slave Status Flags box indicate per slave its status using colours Four colours are associated with
35. Controlled by Unit operation If the bit corresponding to a slave device address is ON it indicates that this slave device e is allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and e is exchanging I O Data with PROFIBUS DP Master Unit In this case the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit must be in the CLEAR mode or the OPERATE mode If the bit corresponding to a slave device address is OFF it indicates that the slave is not in Data_Exchange with this PROFIBUS DP Master Unit due to the fact that e the slave device is not allocated to this PROFIBUS DP Master Unit or the slave device has been allocated to this PROFIBUS DP Master Unit but is forced out of Data_Exchange mode due to a communica tion error or the slave device has been allocated to this PROFIBUS DP Master Unit but is not responding the slave device has been allocated to this PROFIBUS DP Master Unit but is it has temporarily been disabled the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is not in CLEAR or OPERATE mode 115 Allocated CIO Area Wors CS ection 4 2 4 2 9 Slave New Diagnostics Flags Word n 17 to Word n 24 The Slave New Diagnostics flags indicate for each slave device if it sent a new diagnostics message to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit since the last time it was read or cleared by the CS CJ series PLC The flags are allocated to a block of eight ClO words and each bit in the block corresponds to a device address 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 5 14 13 12 11
36. Date lt Date gt lt Information Type gt lt message gt The message may include the name of the DTM involved in the communica tion The figure below shows an example of an FDT Monitoring message sequence This example sequence is generated when opening a CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit DTM ErorLog FDT Monitor Time 23 09 Date 04 Nov 03 FDT Information a CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Call DtmActivexControl Init function Time 23 09 Date 04 Nov 03 FDT Information s CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master IDtmE vents OnFunctionChanged call received Time 23 09 Date 04 Nov 03 FDT Information s CJ1 W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Call IDtm GetFunctions function Time 23 09 Date 04 Nov 03 Information s CJ1 W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM function ID 1 execution finished Time 23 09 Date 04 Nov 03 Information aj DTM Proxy for ConfD TMCOM ConfD TMCOM CJ1 W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master disposed User Administrator A By right clicking the mouse cursor in the FDT Monitoring window a context menu is displayed This context menu provides the options listed below FDT Monitoring Window Context Menu Menu item Clear all entries Clears the entire FDT Monitoring window Description Equivalent menu command Copy to clipboard Copies the entire contents of the FDT Monitoring window to the clip board Hide Hides the FDT Monitoring window View FDT Monitoring 58 CX Profilus Section 3 2 3 2 9 Ac
37. The table below lists the Error messages related to the System on which the DTM is installed Number Message Connected device can not be con figured with this DTM Description Incorrect firmware type Appendix D Correction Make sure the unit connected is a CS1W PRM21 or CJ1W PRM21 Make sure the Unit number in the Device set up corresponds to the physical unit Incorrect version of CX Server Incorrect version of CX Server Make sure the correct CX Server version is installed Version must be 1 7 and up Name of the function called with improper parameters Container called a function with NULL pointer There must be problem in the con tainer Reinstall CX PROFIBUS if problem persists contact supplier Received XML Document does not fit it s XML schema Container called a function with an improper XML document There must be a problem in con tainer program Reinstall CX PROFI BUS if problem persists contact supplier Ole Register Drop Target Failed An internal error has occurred Reinstall CX PROFIBUS if problem persists contact supplier Undefined control type An internal error has occurred Reinstall CX PROFIBUS if problem persists contact supplier Communication failure with the DTM An internal error has occurred Reinstall CX PROFIBUS if problem persists contact supplier GUI could not be closed An internal error has occurred
38. Verify that any repeaters used are func tioning correctly Check the cable length versus the selected baud rate Verify that any stubs used are not too long Verify that termination resistors and inductors are properly set and used Troubleshooting the Network Section 7 4 Problem PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is configured Some but not all slaves exchange data Probable cause Network cabling is not correct e BF LED indicator is ON or Flashing e Master Status 2 error flag may provide more information CIO Word n 6 bit 00 03 see Note CIO Words n 9 to n 16 show which slaves have problems Correction Verify that the network installation is correct e Verify that all slaves are powered up and functioning correctly Verify that all slave devices are correctly connected to the network Verify that any repeaters used are func tioning correctly Check the cable length versus the selected baud rate Verify that any stubs used are not too long Verify that termination resistors and inductors are properly set and used Configuration is not correct e BF LED indicator is Flashing e CIO Words n 9 to n 16 show which slaves have problems Use CX Profibus and DTMs to determine slave diagnostics Verify that the configuration is correct e Verify that address of targeted slave device matches the configured address Verify that the slave parameter and config uration settings are correct Verify that t
39. default setting attempts to re parameterize the slave device Support Box Bus Parameters Tab The Auto Addressing in the Support Box defines the I O Mapping process when adding removing I O modules or when editing an existing I O Mapping Refer to section 6 5 2 Mapping I O Data for more details on I O mapping Control Description Auto Addressing enabled I O data mapping will be done by the Master DTM by allo cating the I O data in ascending order of slave device address and selected I O modules No memory allocation gaps are left behind New I O modules are appended to the existing mapping Changed I O modules will be re allocated to the end of the list Memory allocation gaps can be left behind Auto Addressing disabled The Bus Parameters tab contains the parameters for the communication on the PROFIBUS network The Bus Parameters tab is shown below o x Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK Baud Rate 1500 kBits s 7 Cancel m Optimize Help C by standard byusel Slot time 300 tBit Min Slave Interval 5694 tBit Min Station Delay of Responders 11 tBit Min Slave Interval 3 7960 ms Max Station Delay of Responders 150 tBit Target Rotation Time 5888 tBit Quiet Time 0 tBit Max Retry Limit fi Setup Time 1 tBit Highest Station Address fa GAP Update Factor 1 Poll Timeout 10 ms Data Control Time 140 ms Watchdog Control 20 ms Save
40. download process may start up the network Therefore if this is not de sired care must be taken to select the right setting In case of a failure in the download process refer to section 7 4 1 Trouble shooting Parameter Download to establish the cause and the remedy After successfully downloading the configuration to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit the user can make a backup of the configuration on a memory card which can be inserted in the PLC CPU This backup can facilitate configuration of a replacement Unit without the need of a PC Refer to Appendix E Memory Card Backup Functions for the backup restore procedure I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 6 5 I O Communication Characteristics 6 5 1 I O Data Configuration I O Data Configuration O Data Range Supported Each slave device defines its I O data size sequence and format by means of I O modules each of which consists of one or more bytes containing a PROFIBUS defined coding scheme The I O modules can define input data or output data or both input and output data The I O modules are used to configure the I O data exchange process in the Master Unit and also to verify the amount of I O data to be exchanged with the slave device For modular slave devices the I O modules are selected by the user from a list of available modules The modules usually have to be consistent with the physical I O of the slave device For non modular slave devic
41. over the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit when it is on line and communicat ing over the PROFIBUS network It provides its own user interface to read out Master status flags and Error log as well as Slave status flags and the Slave diagnostics messages received by the Unit It also allows the user to send Global Control messages over the network and to change the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit s mode on the PROFIBUS network The communication DTM which provides the interface between the two DTMs mentioned above and CX Server CX Server provided with the CX Profibus package is the driver for communication between the PC and the PLC CPU C200HW PRM21 DTM The C200HW PRM21 DTM allows configuration of the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit This predecessor of the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 can be used on existing C200H PLC CPU Systems as well as CS1 PLC Systems except for the CS1D The C200HW PRM21 DTM consist of three parts e The Settings DTM which handles the settings for the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit including the bus parameters settings and the I O data mappings 16 CX Profibus Configurator Section 1 4 e The Monitoring DTM to handle the Unit s status monitoring The DTM s user interface displays the Master status and Slave status e The communication DTM providing the interface between the two DTMs mentioned above and the serial communication driver to the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Note This Operation Manual does
42. slave device Configuration connection method 14 Serial connection RS232 directly to con nector on the front of the Unit Serial connection directly via PLC CPU or via other I O Units No separate connector on the front of the Unit PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Section 1 3 Item PROFIBUS Media type C200HW PRM21 RS 485 galvanically isolated from the PLC CS1 CJ1W PRM21 RS 485 galvanically isolated from the PLC PROFIBUS Connector 9 pin sub D female connector 4 40 UNC thread Termination provided through a switch on the unit according to EN50170 9 pin sub D female connector 4 40 UNC thread Termination must be provided by the cable connector according to EN50170 Unit device address range O 125 set through the configurator O 125 set through the configurator Number of slave devices supported on the network 125 max address range 0 125 125 max address range 0 125 baud rates supported Selectable through the configurator e 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 93 75 kbit s 187 kbit s 500 kbit s 1 5 Mbit s 3 Mbit s 6 Mbit s 12 Mbit s Selectable through the configurator e 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 45 45 kbit s 93 75 kbit s 187 kbit s 500 kbit s 1 5 Mbit s 3 Mbit s 6 Mbit s 12 Mbit s Bus timing definitions Calculated by the configurator Calculated by the configurator Master Class 1 Slave cyclic services e Set_Prm Chk_Cfg Data_Exch
43. within range and match the physical configuration of the slave device e Consult the operation manual of the slave device Check if additional parameters must be selected e g parameters associated with selected I O modules Master lock The slave device is parameterized and locked by another Master Unit on the network The Parameter request used LED indicator will also be ON e Remove the slave device from either one of the two Master Units on the network e Switch off the other Master Unit Parameter request used The slave device is not in I O data exchange with the Master Unit and has requested new parameters e Check the parameters and the I O configuration for the slave device and make sure they are correct Check the Parameter fault Configuration fault and Master Lock LED indicators Static diagnostics The slave device is sending static diagnostics and is not exchanging I O data This usually indi cates a problem at the slave device which prevents it from reading its inputs or setting its out puts e Check the slave device and make sure that it is working properly e Check any loose modules in case the slave device is a modular device e Check the wiring of the I O at the slave device Slaves can often detect short circuits on their physical 1 0 Consult the operation manual of the slave device Check if additional action must be taken to initiate I O data exchange e g reset the device after a malfunction
44. 00 cee eee eee 106 4 2 3 Unit Status Word n 4 0 0 0 cee 109 4 2 4 Master Status 1 Word n 5 0 0 0 ccc eee 110 4 2 5 Master Status 2 Word n 6 0 0 0 0 0 cece ene 112 4 2 6 Slave Status Word n 7 0 0 0 0 ccc tenes 113 4 2 7 Actual Bus Cycle Time Word n 8 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 114 4 2 8 Slave Data_Exchange Active Flags Word n 9 to Word n 16 114 4 2 9 Slave New Diagnostics Flags Word n 17 to Word n 24 116 101 Overview of Word Allocations Section 4 1 4 1 102 Overview of Word Allocations The words shown in the following diagram are allocated according to the unit number setting For each CPU Bus Unit there are 25 words allocated in the CIO Area and 100 words allocated in the DM Area First word allocated in the CIO Area n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number First word allocated in the DM Area m D30 000 100 x unit number PLC CPU Unit PROFIBUS DP Master unit Unit 0 Unit 1 I I I it I I l Unit 15 Unit 1 i I I I I I Unit 15 Note Unit Number 0 CPU Bus Unit CIO Area Local memory Elo 10 Software switches e l i 25 words l I CIO 1524 I O refresh status ClO 525 a ep e Le CIO 1526 25 words Local memory D30000 D30001 fo fd I l 100 words Norexcha ge 1 100 words i Reserved for future use l as 100 words l p i 100 wo
45. 1 Hook the claw on the top of the Unit onto the Backplane Backplane 2 Insert the Unit into Backplane connectors and securely tighten the screw at the bottom of the Unit Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 4 Nem 3 When removing the Unit first loosen the screw at the bottom of the Unit Fixing screws Note When mounting the Unit provide the clearance shown below to facilitate easy mounting or dismounting Philips screwdriver 29 Installing the CS1 CJIW PRM21 Units Section 2 2 2 2 3 Mounting the CJ1W PRM21 The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit can be mounted to any slot in either a CJ series CPU Rack or a CJ series Expansion CPU Rack The CJ series PLC supports up to 4 Expansion CPU Racks in addition to the CPU rack The number of slots to which PROFIBUS DP Master Unit can be mounted in any of the positions shown below using the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit Up to 16 PROFIBUS DP Master Units can be mounted to a single PLC If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units e g Ethernet Units the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 16 PLC CPU rack 10 Units max End cover P S CUO O Expansion Backplane 10 Units max End cover P S eee Up to 16 PROFIBUS DP M Units can be mounted Expansion Backplane 10 Units max End cover P S ie
46. 10 9 8 7 6 51 44 31 2 441 0 Slave station 00 15 Word n 17 Word n 18 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Slave station 16 31 Word n 19 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 Slave station 32 47 Word n 20 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 Slave station 48 63 Word n 21 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 Slave station 64 79 Word n 22 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 Slave station 80 95 Word n 23 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 Slave station 96 111 Word n 24 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 Slave station 112 125 Word n 17 to n 24 n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number Controlled Unit operation by Slave New Diag If the bit corresponding to a slave device address is ON it indicates that nostics flags this slave device e is allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and e has sent new diagnostics message to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit In this case the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit must be in CLEAR mode or OPERATE mode If the bit corresponding to a slave device address is OFF it indicates that e the slave device has not sent a
47. 3 Using the Error Log 02 0 0 ee eee 128 128 130 132 133 133 136 137 137 138 140 141 142 144 145 145 145 152 153 155 155 158 159 159 160 162 166 167 167 171 172 127 Introduction Section 6 1 6 1 Introduction This section discusses the operational aspects of using the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and the configuration software The section has been setup to follow the general process flow of setting up and configuring a network down loading the configuration and operating the PROFIBUS network Note 1 In case Error messages are displayed while using CX Profibus refer to Appendix D Configurator Error and Warning Messages for more informa tion on errors 2 This section does not discuss how to operate the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit For more information on how to operate this type of unit refer to the C200H series PROFIBUS DP Master Units Oper ation Manual W349 E2 L Example To illustrate the explanations examples are marked with the word Example in the side line 6 2 Setting up a network Starting CX Profibus Setting up a network involves setting up a configuration in CX Profibus and downloading it to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit To start CX profibus select Program OMRON and CX Profibus from the Start Menu if the default pro gram folder name is used The Login Window will be displayed Login as either Administrator or Plan ning Engineer Note The default pa
48. 6 Network structure 33 Linear bus topology 33 Repeaters 34 Tree topology 34 O P OMRON Copyright notice vi Operation modes SeeNetwork Operation modes 6 OSI reference model 2 ISO 7498 2 Layer 1 Physical Layer 2 244 Layer 2 Data Link Layer 2 Layer 7 Application Layer 2 Password Default 49 PLC cycle time performance 155 Polling procedure 4 Precautions Application xiv General xii Operating Environment xiii Safety xii PROFIBUS Device profile 4 Master Class 1 Master DPM1 4 Class 2 Master DPM2 4 Network Changing mode 160 Indirect mode changes 161 Mode changes 160 Monitoring 167 Operational modes 6 User access 159 PROFIBUS DP Decentralized Periphery 2 PROFIBUS FMS Fieldbus Message Specification 2 PROFIBUS PA Process Automation 2 Protocol Specification 13 R RS 485 Cable length 3 Cable Type 35 Transmission medium 3 Transmission speed 3 See also Wiring S Safety Precautions xii Setting up a network 128 shock resistance 11 Slave devices 4 Slave diagnostics Data 209 Extended data 212 Channel related 214 Device related 212 Example 217 Module related 213 Reading MEMORY AREA READ 209 Standard data 210 startup times 158 Sync See Global Control system startup times 158 System startup time 158 T Target rotation time See also Bus parameters Token passing 4 Trademarks vi Transmission medium 3 RS 485 3 Transmission spee
49. 6 e 19 2 45 45 e 93 75 e 187 5 e 500 e 1500 default value e 3000 e 6000 e 12000 kBits s Editable by User Optimize The Optimize setting defines whether or not selected parameters can be changed by the user e By Standard Forces the user to use the default optimized settings e By User Makes selected fields editable Note 1 If the By User option is selected and changes have been made it is still possible to switch between Optimize settings without the changes being lost If the By User option is selected and the baud rate is changed the parameters will be opti mized to the new baud rate Slot Time The maximum time a Master Unit must wait for a response to a request message Min Station Delay of Responders The minimum allowed time for a slave device before it will generate a response to a request message Max Station Delay of Responders The maximum allowed time for a slave device to generate a response to a request message Quiet Time The time a transmitting device must wait after the end of a message frame before enabling its receiver Setup Time The time between an event and the necessary reaction Min Slave Interval The Minimum Slave Interval defines the poll cycle i e the minimum time between two consecutive Data_Exchange Cycles to the same slave device The Minimum Slave Interval must be smaller than the Target Rotation Time Calculated Min
50. Address field at the top of the Configuration tab see fig ure below and change the value to 10 3 Select the OK or Apply button at the bottom of the window The OK button will close the DTM Configuration User Interface a ix Device F150 PRT GSD File OC_O5E4 gsd Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number Ox05E4 Configuration Parameter Group Device Settings a Station Address fio IV Enable watchdog control Watchdog Interval 200 ms Module Configuration Max length of input output data 74 Byte Length of input output data 8 Byte Max length of input data 64 Byte Length of input data 6 Byte Max length of output data 10 Byte Length of output data 2 Byte Max number of modules 1 Number of modules 1 If when pressing the Apply or OK button no I O modules have been selected as yet a warning message will be displayed The I O modules can be selected later Pressing the OK button with the warning will apply the changed device address After changing the address in the slave DTM Configuration User Interface the updated address will be shown in the Network View next to the device name Configuring the Slave Devices Section 6 3 6 3 Configuring the Slave Devices After adding each of the slave DTMs to the network configurations have to be selected for each of them Setting up a configuration involves e Selecting the proper I O modules which define the I O data to be exchanged when operational e Settin
51. C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Unit to allow the PLC CPU program to deter mine the status of the Unit as well as the PROFIBUS network In general the following features are provided e Change the state of the Unit with respect to transfer of I O data e Clear the mailbox e Transmit a Global_ Control command over the PROFIBUS network with specified settings Send The table below lists the two control words and their description of individual bits Description Input data transferred No input data has been transferred to the mapped PLC data area s during the last I O refresh Input data has been transferred to the mapped PLC data area s during the last I O refresh Not Used Auto Clear Not in Auto_clear mode The master branched into Auto_clear mode because of a remote node error No data All remote nodes are in data exchange mode This bit is also cleared during a database download or when a P DP H W failure is detected CIO n 2 06 is set At least one remote node is not in the data exchange mode or reports a fatal error Not Used P DP H W failure No error Malfunctioning of the PROFIBUS DP hardware Wrong CPU unit No error The Unit is mounted to a PLC type which does not support the C200HW PRM21 DM setting error No error exceeding max The input output area mapping defined by the Unit s DM settings words exceeds the maximum allowed number of words 300 words
52. CX Server Configuring CX Server 1 2 3 142 dure 1 Open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Setup tab Master DTM Configuration Interface Device 2 Make sure that the Unit Number has been set to the unit number set on the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit through the rotary switch on the front 3 Select the Configure button to start CX Server Up on pressing the Configure button CX Server is launched and displays the CX Server User Interface as shown below Change PLC x Device Name PLC m Device Type EM x Settings Network Tes Toolbus Settings Cancel In order to configure CX Server for communication with the Unit perform the following procedure 1 Select the type of PLC to which the Unit is attached from the Device Type drop down selection box 2 Press the Settings button next to the PLC type selected The PLC settings window see figure below is displayed Device Type Settings CJ1M x General m CPU Type is Total Program Area Size fior Step z I Read Only Expansion Memory None 7 F Read Ony File Memory None Timer Clock I Installed E I Read Only Make Default Cancel Help 3 In this window make the proper adjustments if necessary The selections made must match the physical configuration of the PLC system When done press the OK button Configuring the Ma
53. Caution Note Example Note Re allocating I O Modules 1 2 3 add that module to the default area between the already selected modules of that particular slave device When an I O module is added to or deleted from a configuration at a later point in time Auto Addressing will cause a change in the addresses of subse quent I O modules in an Input Output area This will cause I O data of a part of the slave devices to be re mapped to different locations in the PLC mem ory In order to avoid unexpected results the PLC user program may have to be adapted as well 1 Auto Addressing will not change the allocation of I O modules to a certain area i e a module allocated to Input Output area 2 will not be re allocated to area 1 if Auto Addressing is enabled 2 Auto Addressing will not change the start address of the areas 3 Auto Addressing is by default enabled when starting a new project It is however disabled for existing projects to avoid unwanted re mapping The figure below shows an example of the effects of Auto Addressing on re allocation of I O modules In the original I O configuration on the left the first slave an OMRON CJ1W PRT21 consisted of two I O modules In new configuration one I O module was inserted and subsequent modules were re allocated in the process atl 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Configuratio atl 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Configuratio Device Setup Master
54. Characteristics Section 6 5 3 After setting up the initial I O configuration all I O modules will be shown in the overall list in the upper half of the Slave Area tab This is a pick list from which modules can be selected The allocated I O modules are listed in area 1 the column on the left of the lower half of the window Note The I O modules in the pick list all remain there The allocated I O modules are copies of the modules selected from the pick list 4 In order to move an I O module from one area to another select the mod ule in the pick list 5 Hold the left mouse button and drag the I O module to the Input Output area of choice Release the left mouse button to drop the module in place Note The area to place the module in must be empty The area to put the modules in does not need to be selected first Auto Addressing and Re Auto Addressing re allocates I O modules in all Input Output areas If after allocating I O Modules setting up the initial I O configuration two or more I O modules are moved from one area to another Auto Addressing maintains the same sequence i e the slave device with the lowest address and its I O modules in the selected sequence are allocated before a slave device with a higher address Example In the figure below two output modules from the initial I O configuration top window have been re allocated to Output area 2 bottom window att 1 C31 W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Configur
55. DP Master Unit Each mapping Area in the Allocation tab is equipped with four controls and an information field located below the Area The controls and information field are listed and explained in the table below CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Control Description Area box Selects the PLC memory area to which the associated I O Area will be mapped Possible options are Not Used List must be empty CIO DM Work HR EM Bank 0 to 12 Decimal See Note 1 Start Address box In this field the user can enter the start address in the PLC memory of the mapped data block Length box The length box allows the user to select the number of visible rows The minimum and the default value is 100 words If more than 100 words are configured the mini mum Length value will be that number The user can set the Length value to up to 7168 words Occupied field This field display the actual length of the data block not necessarily the same as the amount of data in it This length includes both data and any gaps between mod ules Gaps may only be there if Auto Addressing option in the Master Setup tab is disabled See also Note 2 Compress button Pressing the Compress button will compress the Area list associated with it i e this action will remove all gaps from the mapping list by moving all mapped I O modules as close to the start of the memory area as possible See Notes 3 and 4
56. Error Log Section 7 5 The error codes are described in the following table The detailed error code will provide detailed information on an error Meaning Watchdog timer error in CPU Unit Detailed error code 1st byte 2nd byte 00 00 Correction Replace the PLC CPU Unit Non volatile CPU Unit service monitor error Actual monitoring time ms Hex Check the operating environment PLC Bus error 00 00 Replace the CPU Unit PROFIBUS parameter set invalid 00 80 Bus param eter error 00 7D Slave parameter error Check the parameter settings e Re download the configuration if necessary Protocol error 00 7D Fail ing Master Address Check the master devices on the network and make sure they are all working correctly Duplicate master address 00 7D Fail ing Master Address Check the master devices on the network and ensure that they have unique device addresses Hardware error 00 e Check the network wiring and make sure it is correct Check for short circuits Check the bus timing set through CX Profibus Check the HSA setting in CX Profibus and make sure it is set to the master device with the highest address on the net work Check if any other faulty devices are on the same net work Verify that the Highest Station Address setting includes any other master address on the bus CPU Bus Unit fatal error Error ad
57. I O data transferred to from the PROFIBUS DP slaves over the network is compliant with the PROFIBUS DP definitions The table below lists the I O data formats supported by both the PROFIBUS network and PLC CPU Appendix C I O Data Conversions defines the conver Size bytes Data Type Single 8 bit Integer signed unsigned sion of I O data in detail PROFIBUS DP Supported Data is transmitted on a byte by byte basis Section 6 5 CS CJ series PLC Not supported Minimum is 16 bit words Two bytes will be formatted in one word Words con taining odd bytes will be padded with zeros Single 16 bit Integer signed unsigned Single 32 bit Integer signed unsigned Floating point Visible string Byte string Date Clock time Time of day Time difference 6 Supported Data is transmitted on a Most Signifi cant Byte First basis Supported Data is transmitted on a Most Signifi cant Byte First basis Supported Data is transmitted on a Most Signifi cant Byte First basis Supported Length of string is fixed by I O configura tion Data is transmitted on a left to right basis i e first character is transmitted first Supported Length of string is fixed by I O configura tion Data is transmitted on a left to right basis i e first character is transmitted first Supported Date Time format contains absolute time with respect to start of century Date Time is coded in ind
58. Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit perform the following procedure see figure below 1 Make sure that the parameter sets in the Unit are correct and that the Unit starts up normally and insert a Memory Card into the Card slot Turn ON pin 7 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit behind the cover above the Memory Card slot 3 Press and hold the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds When the switch is pressed the MCP WR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while the data is being written The indicator will go OFF after the data has been written properly During the transfer to the Memory Card the Parameter Transfer in Progress bit in Unit Status Word CIO Word n 4 will turn ON Memory Card LED indicators Press and hold the Memory Card Power Switch for three seconds v Pin 7 ON ae ee aa Fa CPWR m BUSY mm BUSY lL This example shows a CS series CPU Unit Memory Card 229 Memory Card Backup Functions Appendix E E 3 Restoring Unit Setup Files In order to restore the Unit s parameter sets from the Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit perform the fol lowing procedure Power down the PLC and insert a Memory Card into the Card slot Turn ON pin 7 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit behind the cover above the Memory Card slot Turn ON the PLC s power supply When the PLC s power is turned ON the MCPWR Indicato
59. Network View window First the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM must be added to the main branch of the project Network To do so one of three pro cedures as outlined below must be used to add the DTM 1 Select the top of the network to which the DTM must be added i e select MyNetwork in the Network View 2 Right click the mouse and a context menu will be displayed 3 From the menu select Add Device 4 A simplified Device Catalogue is displayed The list only contains the de vices which can be inserted at the selected network location see figure be low only Master devices are listed 5 From the displayed list select the device DTM to be added and select the OK button The Device DTM will be added to the network Select Device xi CJTW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master 3 62 2003 10 31 OMRON Corporation CS1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master 3 62 2003 10 31 OMRON Corporation wa _ A d Setting up a network Section 6 2 Using Drag amp Drop 1 2 3 1 Open the Device Catalogue Either select the View Device Catalogue menu option or press the Ml button in the Tool Bar 2 Select a device DTM in the Device Catalogue 3 Left click the mouse and Drag the mouse pointer to the desired location in the network i e MyNetwork in the Network View window 4 Release the mouse button and the device DTM will be added to that loca tion Note Master DTMs can only be added to the main branch of the Network Slave Device DT
60. Notes Appendix G G 3 CIF Driver error messages This section lists the most common error messages encountered with the serial communication driver for the C200HW PRM21 Extended error messages are available through the Help files of the C200HW PRM21 DTM Error Number Description No COM port found or COM port already in use COM port already opened Function call into driver has failed Internal driver error Could not create read thread Could not create read event Could not create write event Could not create timer event Error by writing data Wrong COM state COM state error is set COM buffer setup failed COM set timeout failed Receive buffer overrun Receive buffer full Send busy Error during close driver COM port not opened Invalid handle value Invalid COM number Size parameter invalid Size parameter zero Buffer pointer is NULL Buffer too short Setup error Send message timeout error Could not send a message Send message no device connected Error by send message message receiving Telegram collision Telegram no acknowledgement received Telegram noise Telegram data overrun Telegram parity error Telegram framing error User Telegram unknown error Timeout by receive a message No message received 239 A About Manual ix Adding Devices to the Network 130 Application 231
61. Number 0x0602 Help Diagnostic Extended Diagnostics 0x05 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x0 Device related Non fatal PLC error Device related PLC in Monitor mode Connected Update 6 7 3 Using the Error Log Error Log Concept The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units are equipped with an error logging mechanism which will internally store error events Most of the errors which are stored in the Units Error Log are stored in volatile memory i e when power to the Unit is switched off the errors are lost Severe errors however are also stored in non volatile memory i e these error reports are still available after cycling the power down and up again The errors which can be logged are listed in section 7 5 2 Error Codes The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units can log up to 80 error events 16 of which can be logged in non volatile memory Detecting New Errors in If a new error event is logged in the Error Log of the Unit a bit flag 03 is set in the Error Log the Units Status Word CIO word n 4 see section 4 2 3 Unit Status Word n 4 This bit flag can be evaluated by the user through the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface In order to view the bit flag perform the following actions 1 2 3 1 Open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface 2 Select the Monitor Master Status tab 3 Ifthe Automatic checkbox in the Refresh box has not
62. Output area 2 Output area 2 Input area Input area CIO 3300 Slave 1 Module 1 Slave 2 Module 1 Inputarea 1 4 Input area 1 Slave 4 Module 1 Slave 4 Module 2 CIO 3500 Input area 2 Input area 2 Note 1 The end address of each Input Output area in the PLC memory depends on the size of the allocated I O data 2 If more than 100 words of input or output have been configured for the slave overlap of memory areas will occur in the PLC if default I O map ping is used as shown above Z Caution The default mapping of areas on to the PLC memory is the same default map ping as used in the CS1 CJ1W DRM21 Devicenet Master Slave Unit Care should be taken to avoid data overlap if such a Unit is part of the same PLC CPU system as the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will assemble the cor rect PROFIBUS data messages from the storage order in the Input and Out put memory areas The default allocation of I O modules i e 1 O modules are mapped in ascend ing order of slave addresses and module selection uses the concept of Auto Addressing of the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Auto Addressing will re allocate I O modules according to the algorithm explained above in each area If a configuration has been selected which is changed later for example by adding an I O module to one of the slaves the Auto Addressing feature will I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 A
63. PLC CPU error occurred e The ERH indicator is ON the other LED indicators are OFF e The ERR ALM LED indicator on the PLC CPU is ON Determine error in the PLC CPU Refer to the CS1 Series CPU Unit Operation Man ual W339 or the CU Series CPU Unit Operation Manual W393 A Unit error occurred e The ERC indicator is ON the other LED indicators are OFF e The ERR ALM LED indicator on the PLC CPU is ON Restart the Unit and read the error log to determine the type of error The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in either OFF LINE or STOP mode e The BST LED indicator is OFF e The BF LED indicator is ON A PROFIBUS interface error has occurred see Master Status 2 error flags CIO Word n 6 bit 00 03 see Note for details Determine the mode of the Unit Check the Master Status 1 Word CIO Word n 5 bit 00 to bit 03 see Note If Unit is in OFF LINE or STOP mode e Verify that the master does not use the same address as another Master Unit on the network Otherwise correct the Master Unit s PROFIBUS address Set CLEAR or OPERATE switch in ClO Word n see Note Network cabling is not correct e BF LED indicator is ON e Master Status 2 error flag may provide more information CIO Word n 6 bit 00 03 see Note Verify that the network installation is correct e Verify that the network is still in tact and connected to the Unit Verify that any repeaters used are func tioning correctly
64. Server Runtime User Manual W391 for details on configuring CX Server Note 1 For further explanation only the direct connections between the PC and the PLC on which the Unit is attached are considered These include ToolBus and SYSMAC WAY 2 Select the Settings button next to the Network Type selected to display the Network settings window and select the Driver tab Toolbus is shown as example below Network Settings Toolbus x Network Driver Modem Connection Data Format Port Name X Data Bits fe Baud Rate 115200 Parity None 7 M Baud Rate Auto Detect Stop Bits ho Make Default if Cancel Help 5 Make the necessary selections to facilitate communication between the PC and the PLC CPU to which the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is attached and press the OK button Testing CX Server Setup After making the settings press the OK button to close the CX Server inter face In order to verify that the communication has been setup correctly press the Test button in the Device Setup tab of the DTM Configuration User Inter 77 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Note Downloading Parameters Monitoring 78 1 2 3 1 2 3 face This will initiate a FINS command to read the Unit s profile i e the name of the Unit and the firmware version If the communication has been setup correctly the response of the FINS command will yield the required information which will b
65. Slave Interval in milliseconds ms No Target Rotation The anticipated time for one token cycle including allowances for high and low teit Yes Time priority transactions errors and GAP maintenance Do not change the value below the calculated value to avoid bus communication interruptions 66 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Item Description Unit Editable by User Max Retry Limit Maximum number of request transmission retries by this master if a device does not reply to a request Highest Station Address The HSA defines the Highest Station Address of Master devices on the network of which the Master device will request the FDL status when updating the active device list See GAP Update Factor If new slaves are added to the network this field shows the highest device address The Master will periodically check whether new active devices have been added between its own address and the Highest Station Address If any devices are detected GAP is updated Permissible values are in the range of 0 to 126 GAP Update Factor The GAP update factor defines the amount of updates of the active devices i e Master devices list times during one token rotation cycle To update the list the Master device will transmit FDL_Status_request messages to ascending device addresses until it finds a next Master device or until it reaches the Highest Station Address See HSA above The GAP Update Fa
66. Unit Memory Error Eror Log Updated O Parameter Storage in Progress Slave Status oO Slave Diagnostic Received oO All Slaves in Data Exchange Double Master Address Error O Hardware Error O Mode Command Error Parameter Error The DTM Diagnostics User Interface contains two tabbed windows e The Monitor tab This tab displays all Master Unit status and error information as well the overall slave status information which resides in the Master Unit e The Online Operations tab This tab contains controls to initiate state changes in the Master Unit as well as transmit Global Control messages over the PROFIBUS network Monitor Tab The DTM Diagnostics User Interface Monitor tab contains three sub tabs e Master Status tab e Slave Status tab e Error History tab Also the Diagnostics data refreshing mode can be selected e Automatic The Diagnostics data is constantly retrieved from the Unit e Manual The Diagnostics data is retrieved only once from the Unit when pressing the Manual button Master Status Tab The Master Status tab shown in the figure above contains Diagnostics infor mation regarding the Master Status Each of the four status boxes is related to one of the Unit s status words in the PLC CIO Area Memory see sections 4 2 3 Unit Status Word n 4 to 4 2 6 Slave Status Word n 7 The status is indicated by red or green LED indicators Red indicates an error situation
67. Unit is in OFF LINE mode In the OFF LINE mode the Unit will be disconnected from the network Indicates that the Unit is not in OFF LINE mode Unit in Data_Exchange If set to ON this bit indicates that the Unit is in Data_Exchange with at least one allocated and enabled slave device If set to OFF this bit indicates that the Unit is not in Data_Exchange with at any of the allocated and enabled slave devices Auto CLEAR enabled If set to ON this bit indicates that the Auto CLEAR function has been enabled In case an error occurs in one of the allocated slave devices during Data_Exchange this function forces the Unit to the CLEAR mode in which it will force all allocated slave devices to a Fail Safe mode If set to OFF the Auto CLEAR function has been disabled If in this case an error occurs in an allocated slave device the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will continue Data_Exchange with the remaining slave devices Reserved by sys tem This bit will be set to OFF by the Unit Unit contains a valid configuration If set to ON this bit indicates that the Unit contains a valid Configura tion With this Configuration it can parameterize the allocated slave devices and achieve Data_Exchange If this bit is set to OFF the Unit does not contain a valid Configuration or transfer of a new Configuration is in progress Reserved by sys tem These bits will be set to OFF by the Unit
68. Update or Manual Refresh Reading the Master Unit s Status Both the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM and the Generic Slave DTM pro vide special user interfaces to facilitate status debugging and diagnostics determination This section and the next will discuss the use and the features of these diagnosis user interfaces The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis Monitor User Interface pro vides a means to e Monitor the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master Unit status e Monitor an overview of the status of all allocated slave devices e Monitor standard slave diagnostics e Monitor the Unit s Error Log The Error Log is discussed in section 6 7 3 Using the Error Log The information is obtained directly from the Master Unit using FINS com mands The Master DTM reads the Unit s ClO words from the PLC memory as well as the standard slave device diagnostics bytes as received by the Master Unit To open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis Monitor User Inter face perform the following steps 1 Make sure the Master DTM is online with the Master Unit To go on line select the DTM in the Network View and perform one of the following ac tions e Select the Device Go Online option from the main menu or the DTM context menu or e Select the A button from the Tool Bar 2 Acommunication channel will be opened through CX Server The name of the DTM in the Network View window will turn to Italic font to indicate that the Unit is on line
69. and right click the mouse to display the context menu 2 Select Download Parameters from the menu to initiate a download A communication channel through the CIF driver will be opened Alternatively the following can be done Select the DTM in the network view and press the Download button in the toolbar to start the download process Note In case the driver assignment has not been done prior to attempting the download an error message will be displayed Monitoring For monitoring an online connection with the Unit must be made first To achieve this perform the following sequence 1 2 3 1 Togo on line perform one of the following actions e Select the DTM in the Network View e Select the Device Go Online option from the main menu or the DTM context menu or Select the Al button from the Tool Bar 2 A communication channel will be opened through the CIF Driver The name of the DTM in the Network View window will turn to Italic font to in dicate that the Unit is on line 3 From the context menu select the Diagnosis option The DTM s Diagnos tics User Interface will be displayed 88 Generic Slave Device DTM CS ection 3 5 3 5 Generic Slave Device DTM Most of the current PROFIBUS DP slave devices are supplied with a GSD file in order to allow a configurator to setup a configuration for that particular slave device OMRON s Generic Slave Device DTM is provided to allow integration of the GSD file based c
70. area overlap Input Output areas are overlapping Check the Input Output areas and ping within the current configuration make sure they are not overlapping Retry download PROFIBUS I O Data exceeds Input Output area exceeds memory Change the configuration to be memory range range combination of start address within the memory area and retry and length download Slaves should have unique Unique bus addresses must be Change the addresses of the slaves addresses assigned for each slave and ensure no duplicates are present Retry download DTM cannot be added to the net The slave DTM cannot be con Avoid using non PROFIBUS DP work it is nota PROFIBUS device nected e g if adding HART device DTMs DTM DTM Max number of slaves configured DTM can not be added since the Do not add any more DTMs If more New slave cannot be added master has already the maximum are still needed a second PROFI number of slaves 125 assigned BUS DP Master Unit on the same PLC system may be solution Slave address overlap detected Changing the address of an existing Automatically recovers New address assigned new slave results in an address overlap address Invalid data set received from a An internal error has occurred pre Add a new slave DTM into the net slave DTM Slave parameter venting the master DTM to obtain work or change the modules of the changes ignored the slave s parameter set existing slave with correct slave
71. been selected press the Manual button to refresh the status The figure below shows as an example this Error Log Updated bit flag indi cating that a new error event has been logged 172 Monitoring the Network ss s lt i s sSsSsSsSsSS ction 7 oat 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Diagnosis Monitor Online Operations Master Status Slave Status Error History m Master Status 1 Unit Status OPERATE Unit Error sToP Master Eror CLEAR Local Parameter Storage Error OFFLINE Local Parameter Load Error O File Read Error Data Exchange Unit Memory Error Auto Clear Enabled Error Log Updated Valid Configuration OD Parameter Storage in Progress m Master Status 2 p Slave Status O Disturbed Bus Error OD Slave Diagnostic Received E PROFIBUS Protocol Error O All Slaves in Data Exchange Double Master Address Error Hardware Error Mode Command Error Parameter Error Reading the Error Log The Error Log can now be retrieved from the Unit and displayed through the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface To retrieve and view the Unit s Error Log 1 2 3 1 Open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface 2 Select the Monitor Error History Tab tab 3 If the Automatic checkbox in the Refresh box has not been selected press the Manual button to retrieve the Error Log contents from the Unit As an example th
72. button A device DTM selected in the Device Catalogue can be added to a selected Master DTM in the Network Window by clicking the Add Device button in the Device Catalogue window 3 2 6 Saving and Opening Projects Note A project containing various DTMs can be saved and opened to and from hard disk Saving a project file is accomplished by selecting the File Save or File Save As menu option This will display the standard Windows File selection window allowing the user to enter a file name The Project File is saved with the extension CPR Saving the data is initiated from CX Profibus but every DTM must support the save function as well The settings of each DTM are added to the Project file by the DTM itself A Project file can be opened using the File Open menu option This will open the standard Windows File selection window after which the Project file can be selected and opened When opening a Project file the network tree view is constructed However for performance reasons the DTMs are not directly instantiated The advan tage is that the tree view is constructed fast but opening a DTM from the tree view may take longer depending on the performance of the PC used A Project File can also be opened from Windows Explorer Double clicking a file with the extension CPR will invoke CX Profibus and open the selected file 3 2 7 Exporting to HTML Exporting Project to HTML 56 CX Profibus provides automati
73. by data address Note The mapping in the Address Table tab does not define the mapping on to the PLC memory areas This is done by making the appropriate settings in the unit s DM areas see Appendix G 2 Word allocations Address Table Tab The Address Table tab contains an overall module list showing all input and output data per slave along with the Module names sizes data types and start addresses This data has been obtained by the Master DTM by each of the allocated slave DTMs If no slave devices have been allocated or config ured the list will be empty Memory Layout The Memory Layout box list contains the following information Addr Station address on the network obtained from the slave DTM Device Name Device name obtained from DTM Module Name _ System generated name IType Defines the Type of the Input B Input Byte type e IW Input Word type lAddr Word Start Address of the Input data of the Module relative to the start of the internal memory of the Unit containing the Input Data block lAddr is expressed in Words OType Defines the Type of the Output e QB Output Byte type e QW Output Word type OAddr Word Start Address of the Output data of the Module relative to the start of the internal memory of the Unit containing the Output Data block OAdadr is expressed in Words Note 1 Modules consisting of one single byte will occupy a full word address 2 A total of
74. bytes of response data are stored at the source node beginning with D the beginning receive word for storing response data Source node Destination node N 15 0 _CMND s D S S Source node beginning send word a D D Destination node beginning receive word n bytes C Source node first control data word i of com C S eae mand i o ec data 7 O ey T a 15 0 a e T T Cc i I fi 7 a m bytes n bytes of command data of 0000 to 07C6 Hex 0 to 1 990 words ee i 15 0 D _ _ _ J noo o o no o m bytes of response data 0000 to 07C6 Hex 0 to 1 990 words 15 11_ 87 0 15 10 87 3 0 C 2 _0 0 i C 4 0 0 0 a p L r inati Number of retries Destination network address 0 to F Hex 0 to 15 retries 00 Hex Local network 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 15 87 0 C 3 0 Response required 1 Response not required Destination unit address 00 Hex PC s CPU Unit 01 Hex Computer user program IS Aoier Pn 10 to 1F Hex Unit nos O to 15 C 5 i i i E1 Hex Inner Board FE Hex Unit connected to network L Response monitor time 0000 Hex 2 s Destination node N 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s 00 to 20 Hex 0 to 32 ne baid fate is slow then setting a The same data can be broadcast to all nodes small value may generate an error The on
75. devices for which the Ignore Auto CLEAR flag has been set see section 3 5 1 Configuration User Interface Extensions Tab will not cause a tran sition to Auto CLEAR not even when they fail on the network 2 Incase a slave device requires more time than the Data Control Time to validate its parameter or configuration message premature triggering of Auto CLEAR can be avoided by increasing the Watchdog Control Time in the Bus parameter set see 6 4 2 Setting the Bus Parameters Increasing the Watchdog time will consequently increase the Data Control Time The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP does not automatically resume nor mal operation after an Auto CLEAR has been initiated In order to resume normal I O data exchange perform the following sequence 1 Determine which slave device failed during network startup or data ex change To do this use the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Monitoring User Interface or the slave DTM see sections 6 7 1 Monitoring the Master Unit and the Network and 6 7 2 Monitoring Slave Status to determine the slave and its type of failure 2 Remove the cause of the failure 3 Press the OPERATE Button in the Master Units Monitoring window Alternatively the Master can also be switched to OPERATE from the PLC program Monitoring the Network Section 6 7 6 7 Monitoring the Network 6 7 1 Monitoring the Master Unit and the Network CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User interface 1 2 3 Using Auto
76. during the writing process e A failure during the reading process e A faulty Memory Card To correct this e Check the Memory Card for faults e Restart the PLC Unit to re download the configuration e f the problem persists use CX Profibus to re download the configuration Parameter error ON An error has occurred initializing the PROFIBUS interface after reading the parame Valid Configuration Indicator will ter sets from the non volatile memory to the volatile memory be OFF Most likely cause e A faulty parameters has been downloaded to the Unit To correct this e Check the parameter settings in CX Profibus and correct them if necessary After correction perform a download of the new parameters to the Unit Disturbed bus Error ON An error has occurred in the PROFIBUS interface with distorted messages received by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Most likely causes e No or invalid termination or no inductors used at high baud rates e Faulty wiring To correct this Check the termination on the appropriate devices Restart the PLC Unit to re download the configuration If the problem persists use CX Profibus to re download the configuration If the problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 188 Troubleshooting the Network S CS ection 7 4 LED Indicators Description Correction PROFIBUS protocol error ON An error has occurred in the PROFIBUS interface with distorted messages rece
77. e The Tool Bar and the Status Bar DTM Window User Administrator Status Bar ZA Network Window The Network Window displays the structure of the PROFIBUS network in a tree view format The tree has at least three levels e The Project Level The master level e The slave level 50 CX Profibus Section 3 2 DTM Device Catalogue Window Error Log Window FDT Monitoring Window Main Menu Command New The highest level of the tree is the project The next level is the PROFIBUS Master level On this level one or more PROFIBUS DP Master devices can be allocated The third level contains the slave DTMs The PROFIBUS network must be assembled in the Network Window i e the various DTMs are added to the network via this window From the Network Window the individual DTM User Interfaces can be opened and accessed CX Profibus supports context menu in the Network Window which are made visible when selecting a device DTM and right clicking the mouse The con tents of the menu may depend on the functionality supported by the DTM The DTM Device Catalogue window will hold the Device Catalogue as well as every opened DTM User Interface The window is an MDI type window or Multiple Document Interface One or more user interface windows can be opened re sized and moved inside this window The Error Log window at the bottom of the CX Profibus application window displays the error messages reported by DTM
78. export process When fin ished CX Profibus will launch the default browser to display the result In this case however no links will be available to other DTMs in the network 3 2 8 Error Logging and FDT Monitoring Error Log Window Purpose of the Error Log Error Log Format Error Log CX Profibus provides two logging windows at the bottom of the application window Both windows are used for displaying events The Error Log window displays error messages reported by the DTMs and by the CX Profibus FDT container application All messages include the Time and Date of occurrence as well as the DTM Name as shown in the Network window The purpose of the Error Log window is error reporting as well as trouble shooting The contents of the window can be copied to the clipboard to allow it to be pasted into another document or into an E mail The errors themselves as well as the sequence of errors may hold additional clues in case of prob lems The format used in the Error Log Window is Time lt Time gt Date lt Date gt lt DTM name gt lt message gt The message displayed originates from the DTM in which the error occurred The figure below shows an example of an error message sequence This example sequence is generated after attempting to change a slave address to that of another slave already assigned to the same Master Unit Time 23 05 Date 04 Nov 03 1 CJ1 W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Slaves should have unique address
79. file and selecting the Open button in the File selection window the GSD file will be copied to the GSD file directory under CX Profibus After copying the GSD file a warning window will be displayed indicating that the Device Catalogue needs to be updated This can be accomplished by selecting the Yes button in the warning window 1 Updating the Device Catalog after copying GSD file can only be done if there is a new project opened i e with no DTMs allocated to the network This is to prevent corruption of an existing network in case a GSD file is removed or replaced 2 The Install GSD Files option allows installation of more than one file at the same time 3 2 5 Adding Devices to the Network Setting up a network in CX Profibus involves adding and configuring single device DTMs The device DTMs as listed in the Device Catalogue can be added to the network in three ways e Using the context menu A context menu will pop up when selecting the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 55 CX Profibus Section 3 2 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM and right clicking the mouse By selecting the menu option Add Device a simplified Device Catalogue is displayed allowing only a selection of DTMs which can be added to the PROFIBUS DP Master DTM e Using the Drag amp Drop function A Device DTM listed in the standard Device Catalogue window can be dragged and dropped from the Device Catalogue to a desired position in the Network Window e Using the Add Device
80. files General Slave Data file A GSD file is a text file containing the characteristic features and configuration options of a device The device data base file of each device is loaded in the configurator and downloaded to the master device GSD files are usually supplied with a Unit or can be downloaded from the Internet either from the manufacturer s site or from the GSD library of the PROFIBUS Nutzer Organisation at http www profibus com The language used in the GSD file is indicated by the last letter of the file extension GS Default GSD English GSE German GSG PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Sectii Italian GSI Portuguese GSP Spanish GSS The GSD files are prepared individually by the vendor for each type of device according to a fixed format Some parameters are mandatory some have a default value and some are optional The device data base file is divided into three parts General Section e General specifications This section contains the vendor name the device name hardware and soft ware release versions device type and identification number protocol specifi cation and supported baud rates DP master Section e DP master related specifications This section contains all parameters which only apply to DP master devices e g maximum memory size for the master parameter set maximum number of entries in the list of active devices or the maximum number of slaves the master can handle DP slave Se
81. g ERNI Delconec and Phoenix Note The 9 pin sub D connector uses 4 40 UNC thread for mechanical fixation of the cable connector Make sure that if non standard PROFIBUS connectors are used the corresponding thread is used on the cable connector 27 Installing the CS1I CJIW PRM21 Units Section 2 2 2 2 Installing the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Units 2 2 1 Handling Precautions When installing the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit on the PLC system observe the following handling precautions e Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before mounting or dis mounting a Unit or connecting or disconnecting cables e Provide separate conduits or ducts for the I O lines to prevent noise from high tension lines or power lines e Leave the label on top of the Unit attached when wiring Removing the label prior to wiring may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit e Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis sipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction 2 2 2 Mounting the CS1W PRM21 The CS1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit can be mounted to any slot in either a CS series CPU Rack a CS series Expansion CPU Rack or a CS1 Duplex CPU Rack The CS series PLC supports up to 7 Expansion CPU Racks in addition to the CPU rack The number of slots to which PROFIBUS DP Master Unit can be mounted depends on the Backplane Up to 16 PROFIBUS DP Master Units can be mounted to a single PLC syst
82. have the same format The PROFIBUS DP protocol does not define the format of user data it is only responsible for the transmission of this data The format of user data may be defined in so called profiles Profiles can reduce engineering costs since the meaning of application related parameters is specified precisely Profiles have been defined for specific areas like drive technology encoders and for sensors actuators 1 1 4 Bus Access Protocol OSI Layer 2 Bus Access The PROFIBUS bus access protocol is implemented by OSI layer 2 This pro Protocol tocol also includes data security and the handling of the transmission proto cols and messages Medium Access Control The Medium Access Control MAC specifies the procedures which determine when a device is permitted to transmit data A token passing procedure is used to handle the bus access between master devices and a polling proce dure is used to handle the communication between a master device and its assigned slave device s Token Passing The token passing procedure guarantees that the bus access right the token is assigned to each master within a precisely defined time frame The token message a special message for passing access rights from one master to the next master must be passed around the logical token ring once to each master within a specified target rotation time Each master executes this pro cedure automatically Polling Procedure The polling or master slave
83. may result in an unexpected operation e When transporting or storing the product cover the PCBs with electrically conductive materials to prevent LSIs and ICs from being damaged by static electricity and also keep the product within the specified storage temperature range e When transporting the Unit use special packing boxes and protect it from being exposed to excessive vibration or impacts during transportation e Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units e Do not attempt to remove the cover over the non used connector hole on the front of the CS1W PRM21 Unit XV Conformance to EC Directives 6 6 Conformance to EC Directives 6 1 Applicable Directives 6 2 Concepts Note e EMC Directives e Low voltage directive EN 61131 2 1994 A12 2000 EMC Directives OMRON Units complying with EC Directives also conform to related EMC standards making them easier to incorporate in other Units or machines The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards See the following note Whether the products conform to the standards in the sys tem used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of OMRON Units complying with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equip ment or control panel in which OMRON devices are installed The customer must therefore perform final checks to confirm that units and the ove
84. means uses the same CIO words as described above To accomplish a Global Control command transmission per from the follow ing sequence 1 Make sure the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM is online with the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit 2 Open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface 3 Select the Online Operations tab 4 Select the commands to be transmitted e g Freeze Sync using the checkboxes 5 Select the groups to transmit the Global Control command to 6 Press the Transmit button to transfer the command to the Unit s CIO area and to set bit 04 in the Software Switches 1 word 7 The Transmit button will be disabled until the command has been trans mitted The time between pressing the Transmit button in the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM user interface and the Global Control command actually being transmitted over the PROFIBUS network will be much longer than when the Global Control command is initiated from a PLC user program due to the additional communication between the PC and the PLC CPU 165 Operating the Network Section 6 6 6 6 4 Using Auto CLEAR Auto CLEAR Feature Enabling Auto CLEAR Note Transition Conditions Note Resume OPERATE mode after Auto CLEAR 166 1 2 3 The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units support the Auto CLEAR function as defined in the PROFIBUS standard This feature when enabled will switch the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to CLEAR mode auto m
85. mode Lit The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in OPERATE mode COMM Not lit No PROFIBUS data exchange with any of the allocated slaves I O Data communication Flashing Fatal error occurred ERC LED is ON Unit initialization failed Lit PROFIBUS data exchange ongoing with at least one allocated slave BF Not lit No PROFIBUS communication errors occurred Bus Fail Flashing At least one allocated slave is not in data exchange with the Unit Lit An error occurred in the PROFIBUS interface of the Unit see section 7 2 Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators Note Unless otherwise specified the frequency of a flashing LED is 1 Hz 50 duty cycle 25 Unit Components Section 2 1 2 1 3 Switch Settings Setting the Unit Number Note Note Unit Number and CPU Bus Unit Word Allocations 26 The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC The unit number must be unique for each CPU Bus Unit Selecting a non unique number for a CPU Bus Unit will prevent the PLC System from starting correctly CS1W PRM21 CJ1W PRM21 Setting range 0 F Hexadecimal isp UNIT 58 NO 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the Unit number 2 Set the switch to the new Unit number Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit number is factor
86. new diagnostics message to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit since the last time it was read or cleared or the slave device has not been allocated to this PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Unit or the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is not in CLEAR or OPERATE mode Note In case an allocated slave device is not responding and there fore not sending a diagnostics message the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit itself will provide a diagnostics message to the PLC CPU containing the mandatory first 6 bytes This diagnostics message will then indicate that the slave is not responding 116 SECTION 5 FINS Commands and Responses This section describes the FINS message service communications commands concept as well as the commands supported by the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units 5 1 5 2 FINS Commands and Responses FINS Message Service Communications 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 1 4 Command Code List Response Code List Sending FINS using CMND Command Response Reference MEMORY AREA READ O101 00000020220 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 5 2 6 RUN 0401 STOP 0402 CONTROLLER DATA READ 0501 0 000005 ERROR LOG READ 2102 ERROR LOG CLEAR 0203 118 118 118 118 119 120 120 121 122 123 123 125 117 FINS Commands and Responses Section 5 1 5 1 FINS Commands and Responses 5 1 1 FINS Message Service Communication
87. not contain a detailed description of the C200HW PRM21 Unit only a description of the DTM For more details on the C200HW PRM21 refer to C200H series PROFIBUS DP Master Units Opera tion Manual W349 E2 L Generic Slave DTM The Generic Slave DTM allows the handling of classic GSD files of up to GSD revision 3 within CX Profibus Upon allocating a slave device for which only a GSD file is available to a Master Unit in the network this DTM will be invoked This DTM consists of two parts e The Settings DTM will provide the user interface to display the device s information and the selectable values as defined in the GSD After mak ing the necessary configuration settings and saving them these will be transferred to the Master DTM e The monitoring DTM will provide a diagnostics interface to the user allowing him to check the Slave s status This DTM obtains the necessary information from the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit s monitoring DTM Downloading the After setting up the configuration it must be downloaded to the PROFIBUS Configuration DP Master Unit The type of serial connection to use for downloading depends on the Unit e CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Connection to the Unit is achieved through the serial port of the PLC CPU using CX Server CX Server also allows routing the download through multiple systems if supported by these systems The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 does not support message routing e C200HW PRM21 Connection to the
88. number of I O modules configured there may be more bytes Header Byte Block Length 765 43 2 1 0 Module Diagnostics Byte Module 0 Diagnostics Module 1 Diagnostics Module 2 Diagnostics Module 3 Diagnostics Module 4 Diagnostics Module 5 Diagnostics Module 6 Diagnostics Module 7 Diagnostics 213 Appendix Header byte Description Block length These bits contain the length of the Module related diagnostics data block including the header byte The Module diagnostics flags will follow this header byte Maximum length of the block including the header is 63 bytes Reserved Fixed to 01 The combination of bit 6 and 7 indicate the type of diagnostics i e 01 indicates Module related diagnostics data Module Diagnostics byte Bit Name Description Module 0 Diagnostics When set this bit indicates that there is Diagnostics information pending related to configuration module 0 i e the first configuration module Module 1 Diagnostics When set this bit indicates that there is Diagnostics information pending related to configuration module 1 Module 2 Diagnostics When set this bit indicates that there is Diagnostics information pending related to configuration module 2 Module 3 Diagnostics When set this bit indicates that there is Diagnostics information pe
89. occurred on the Net work with one or more slave devices If Auto CLEAR is enabled correct the net work problem first Set OPERATE switch in ClO Word n see Note to force the Unit to the OPERATE mode Troubleshooting the Network Problem PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is configured All slaves are in data exchange but the outputs of some slave devices are not updated Probable cause The specified slave devices may be in Sync mode Section 7 4 Correction Send a Global Control Unsync command to the targeted slave or group of slaves Use either the Global Control feature in ClO Words Refer to 4 2 2 Global Contro Mes sage Word n 2 The specified slave device may have its watchdog disabled and is disconnected from the network due to a cabling problem e BF LED indicator is Flashing e ClO Words n 9 to n 16 see Note show which slaves have problems Use CX Profibus and DTMs to determine slave diagnostics Verify that the specified slave device is still connected to the network PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is configured All slaves are in data exchange but the inputs of some slave devices are not updated The specified slave devices may be in Freeze mode Send a Global Control Unfreeze command to the targeted slave or group of slaves Use either the Global Control feature in ClO Words Refer to 4 2 2 Global Control Mes sage Word n 2 The specified slave device may have its watchdog di
90. on the Unit Reserved for future use I O Data allocations Maximum total size 300 words per Unit I O Data words can be allocated to up to 2 input areas and 2 output areas I O size per area up to 200 words Mapping area size set in DM words ClO CIO 0000 to CIO 0235 ClO CIO 0300 to CIO 0511 CIO CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 HR HROOO to HRO99 DM D00000 to D05999 Default mapping DM words contain 0000 e Output area CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 e Input area CIO 0350 to CIO 0399 e Diagnostic flags CIO 0200 to CIO 0215 Maximum total size 7168 words per Unit I O Data words can be allocated to up to 2 input areas and 2 output areas I O size per area up to 7168 words Mapping and area size set by the configura tor CIO CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 WR W000 to W511 HR HROOO to HR511 DM D00000 to D32767 EM E00000 to E32767 Banks 0 to C Default mapping Not supported Note Diagnostics flags available in allo cated CIO Area words Message communications Message communication using IOWR and IORD PLC instructions e IOWR to send Global Control command e IORD to read slave diagnostics FINS message communication not sup ported FINS message communication Commands supported e MEMORY AREA READ to read slave device diagnostics message ERROR LOG READ to read the Unit s error log ERROR LOG CLEAR to clear the Unit s error log RUN to enable communication with a slave device STOP to disable communication with a
91. parameter set 224 Configurator Error and Warning Messages Appendix D Number Message Description Correction Set Parameters failed Slave can An internal error has occurred pre Non recoverable Master DTM tries not be configured venting the master DTM from set to assign a new bus address to the ting changing the slave s bus slave DTM but the slave DTM s address database is locked No slaves assigned Download No slaves have been assigned to the Retry download when at least one aborted master At least one slave must be slave has been assigned assigned Slave s has no modules Down A slave or slaves has no modules Retry download when modules have load aborted been added to the slave s having no modules Configured EM bank banks is The configured EM bank banks are Change the configuration to use only not available in the connected not available in the connected PLC memory areas available in the PLC PLC Download aborted and retry download Connected unit is busy Download Unit is busy with parameter storage Retry download when parameter aborted storage has finished Slave configuration too big The total number of configured Reduce the configuration parameter bytes and configuration bytes does not fit into the FINS mes sage for downloading Maximum number of modules The total number of configured I O Do not add any more modules to the exceeded modules over all
92. parameterized correctly the byte contains FF Hex or 255 Decimal Slave Diagnostics Bytes 5 to 6 Slave Diagnostics Bytes 5 and 6 are mapped to Word D 2 They contain the PROFIBUS ID Number of the slave device The ID number uniquely identifies the type of device The ID Number is a 16 bit code issued by the PROFIBUS Organization For example the ID number of the CJ1W PRT21 PROFIBUS DP slave is 0602 Hex B 4 Extended Diagnostics Data Bytes The afore mentioned 6 diagnostics bytes are a mandatory minimum which is supported by every PROFIBUS DP slave device Depending on the device however it may also support extended diagnostics information which is coded into the bytes following the first 6 mandatory bytes The number of extended bytes depends on the coding and the events that have occurred in the slave device Normally they will not be added to the stan dard diagnostics message i e the first 6 mandatory bytes if no event occurred There are three types of extended diagnostics information e Device related diagnostics e Module related diagnostics e Channel related diagnostics The Module related diagnostics are usually followed by the Channel related diagnostics Both the Device related diagnostics and the Module Channel related diagnostics can occur in one message Device Related Diagnostics The Device related diagnostics data block consist of a header byte followed by one or more device dependent diagnostics data byte
93. re typ ing the password and select the OK button to activate the new password Planning Engineer Password x New Password Confirm New Password Help Cancel Note If access protection is not important for the application you can define an empty string as a password i e when entering the new password simply press the return button on your PC When starting CX Profibus the login win dow can be passed by pressing the return button on your PC without entering a password 3 3 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master To allow configuration and data monitoring from within CX Profibus a CS1 DTM CJ1 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM is installed together with CX Profibus The DTM shows up in the Device Catalogue under two different names e CS1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master e CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master The PROFIBUS DP Master DTM has two main user interface components e DTM Configuration User Interface This user interface facilitates configuration of the Master Unit e DTM Diagnostics User Interface The DTM Diagnostics User Interface facilitates Unit status determination slave status determination and changing the Unit s PROFIBUS opera tional mode This section provides an overview of the PROFIBUS DP Master DTM and discusses both user interfaces 3 3 1 Configuration User Interface Opening the The configuration DTM is opened by Configuration DTM e Selecting the Master DTM in the Network Window and double clicking t
94. same message The extended diagnostics format is defined in the PROFIBUS standard The extended bytes are usually only included in the diagnostics message if an event has occurred which results in extended diagnostics In some cases the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will itself form a slave Diagnostics message This is the case if the slave device is not responding to any request sent by the Master Unit The format of the message will be the same as a message sent by a slave device but the contents has been sent by the Master Unit The last received diagnostics message for each slave device allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit can at any time be retrieved from the Unit through the MEMORY AREA READ FINS command B 2 MEMORY AREA READ 0101 In order to retrieve the last received slave diagnostics message from the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit the PLC CMND 490 can be used to transmit a MEMORY AREA READ FINS command to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The MEMORY AREA READ command format is given below Command Format 01 01 81 FF 00 i ene 4 Command Data specifier No of items code binary Slave station address Response format 01 01 Command End code Diagnostics data code for number of items Parameters e Data specifier code command Defines the data to be retrieved from the Unit Always set to 81 FF 00 Hex e Slave device address command Defines
95. status conditions The LED indicator colours are listed below Indicator Slave Status Colour Associated device does not exchange Diagnostics with this Master Unit i e e Slave not allocated to this Master Unit or e Device is this Master Unit or e Device is another master device Red The slave device is not communicating with the Master Unit It may be disconnected or the Master is in OFF LINE or STOP mode Orange The slave device is communicating with the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit but it is not in Data Exchange due to incorrect parameter set tings See the slave diagnostics for more information Yellow The slave device is in data exchange with the PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Unit but it has reported diagnostics data See the slave diagnos tics for more information Green The slave device is in data exchange with the PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Unit No diagnostics reported Clear Diagnostics Button Pressing the Clear Diagnostics button will clear all new diagnostics data flags in the Unit If all slaves are in data exchange pressing the button will result in all LED indicators turning green Retrieving Slave Provided that the Master Unit is not in OFF LINE or STOP mode the diagnos Diagnostics tics of a specific slave device can be obtained from the LED indicators Mov ing the mouse cursor over the LED will change the cursor from a normal 73 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 arrow pointer t
96. the Configura tion User Interface with out saving the changes Settings have been changed Would you like to leave without saving Closing the GUI without saving the configuration e Yes Do not save data and close DTM e No Do not save data and do not close DTM Closing the Configura tion User Interface with out saving the changes Compressing will re allocate slave configuration in memory area Continue Note Memory Area Input Area 1 Input Area 2 Out put Area 1 Output Area 2 Each of the slave I O data mapping areas can be compressed by pressing the Compress button This will result in the DTM filling up all the gaps in the mapping by moving I O data from higher addresses closer to the start address of the map ping area e Yes No Compress memory area Do nothing When pressing the Compress button in the Slave Area tab I O Allo cation 223 Configurator Error and Warning Messages Appendix D Number Message Description When occurring IO area must be empty Move all Not used item in the start address combo box in When selecting the Not modules into other area output input allocation tabs can only be selected Used item from the Note IO area output areat if there are no I O module mapped in that area memory area box output area2 input area1 OK Close message box Move modules input area2 to other I O area first Slave_User_data part of th
97. the network by setting the destination node address standard is approximately 4 seconds at to FF Hex 1 Mbps or 8 seconds at 500 Kbps The range of node addresses will vary for networks other than Controller Link Networks 119 Command Response Reference Section 5 2 Note With the message service there is no guarantee that a message to a destina tion node will reach its destination It is always possible that the message may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition When using the mes sage service it is advisable to prevent this situation from occurring by per forming resent processing at the node where instructions are issued With the CMND instruction resent processing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been set so be sure to specify a number other than 0 for the number of retries 5 2 Command Response Reference This section describes the FINS commands that can be sent to the PROFI BUS DP Master Units and the responses to each command The command response and where applicable the results storage blocks are given with the commands in graphic form as shown in the following dia gram If the data is fixed it is included in the blocks If the data is variable it is described following the blocks Each box represents 1 byte two boxes repre sent 1 word The following diagram shows 2 bytes or 1 word Two bytes Response codes applicable to the command are des
98. the previous configuration from its non volatile memory Troubleshooting the Network Section 7 4 7 4 2 Troubleshooting the Network using CX Profibus CX Profibus Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Master Unit CX Profibus provides several means to troubleshoot either the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit the slave devices or the network The means all rely on features discussed in the previous section To troubleshoot the Master Unit or the network the Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface provides a help in determining problems The figure below shows the Monitor Master Status tab of the Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface w 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Diagnosis Monitor Online Operations Slave Status Error History m Master Status 1 r Refresh gt Unit Status Automatic OPERATE Unit Error s STOP Master Error e CLEAR Local Parameter Storage Error i OFFLINE Local Parameter Load Error File Read Error Data Exchange Unit Memory Error Auto Clear Enabled Eror Log Updated Valid Configuration O Parameter Storage in Progress Master Status 2 Slave Status oO Disturbed Bus Error O Slave Diagnostic Received oO PROFIBUS Protocol Error oO All Slaves in Data Exchange Double Master Address Error Hardware Error O Mode Command Error Parameter Error The LED indicators shown in the example figure above
99. the slave device network address Set to 00 7D Hex e Number of items to read command Defines the number of bytes to read Set to 1 F4 Hex The diagnostics message is returned from the slave device as a sequence of bytes When transferred to the PLC memory the format is converted to words The format is shown in the figure below The location in the PLC memory designated as D is the Destination location as specified in the CMND 490 instruction 209 Appendix D Byte1 Byte2 D 1 Byte3 Byte 4 D 2 Byte5 Byte 6 D 3 Byte7 Byte 8 D 4 Byte9 Byte 10 The first 6 bytes or 3 words Word D Word D 2 are mandatory bytes which will always be sent by the slave device Any additional i e extended diagnostics bytes start at Word D 3 The contents of the first six bytes is defined by the PROFIBUS standard The contents of the extended diagnostics information is slave device dependent but the format is defined in the PROFIBUS standard The first 6 bytes and the Extended diagnostics format are explained below B 3 Standard Diagnostics Data Bytes Slave Diagnostics Byte 1 A layout of Byte 1 is shown below This byte is mapped to the high byte of Word D 765 43 2 10 Byte 1 Diag Station_Non_Existent Diag Station_Not_Ready Diag Cfg_Fault Diag Ext_Diag Diag Not_Supported Diag Invalid_Slave_Response Diag
100. the upper window e Select the module in the upper window and click the Insert button or Append button Insert will insert the module above the row selected in the lower window Append will add the module to the end of the selected module list 1 The user can select multiple rows in both windows by simultaneously holding the SHIFT or CTRL key on the keyboard and selecting the rows using the left mouse button 2 The amount of I O modules and data which can be selected depends on the slave device The four rows of information above the module display the maximum amounts as well as the selected totals Removing one or more selected modules from the list is done by e double clicking the left mouse button on the module in the lower window e selecting the module in the lower window and click the Remove button In this case selecting multiple modules is also possible Generic Slave Device DTM Section 3 5 Parameter Tab The Parameter tab lists all settings to be made for the Parameter message The Parameter tab is shown below Example shown is the Parameter tab for an OMRON CJ1W PRT21 PROFIBUS DP Slave Unit ti 2 CJ1W PRT21 Configuration GSD File Ident Number 15 x CJ1W PRT21 OMRON Corporation Device Vendor OC_0602 gsd Ox0602 Common Parameters Module Parameters Note Configuration Parameter Group Module Parameters Fail Safe support Watchdog Base Output data on PROFIBUS fail
101. up to 512 Input bytes and 512 Output bytes can be mapped on to the Unit s internal memory Therefore the maximum permissible ad dress value is 255 Words However the C200HW PRM21 to PLC mem ory mapping is limited to a total of 300 I O Words 83 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 Address Table Tab Controls Enable Auto Addressing Changing Mapped Addresses Note Sorting the Displayed Modules The Address Table Tab contains three controls related to the I O mapping The controls are discussed below The C200HW PRM21 DTM provides Auto Addressing to facilitate easy map ping of I O Modules When enabled the I O Modules are mapped in ascend ing station address order while preserving the Module sequence as selected per Slave DTM This means that when a new module is added for a particular slave device the new module will be inserted in the already mapped I O Modules right after the previous module of the same slave device The consecutive modules which were already mapped will move to higher addresses In case Auto Addressing is not enabled the user is allowed to change individ ual mapped addresses by first double clicking the left mouse button on the mapped address after which the address can be manually changed The change will take effect when selecting either the OK or the Apply button 1 In case a changed address overlaps another address in the I O Mapping a warning message will be displayed ind
102. web browsers providing FDT interfaces Since FDT standardizes the interfaces it allows devices from different manufacturers to be integrated in any automation system regardless of the fieldbus system CX Profibus is an example of a FDT container application It is described in detail in the following sections DTMs are provided by the manufacturer of the device A DTM is comparable to a printer driver which allows interactive configuration and diagnostics Setting up a PROFIBUS DP Network Section 1 2 DTM Properties ActiveX User Interface XML based Data Transfer Communication DTM CX Profibus The DTM provides not only the configuration manipulation and monitoring functions for a device including the user interface functions it also provides the connection technology to the device In general a DTM is a Microsoft COM component which can be executed from within a FDT container application A DTM is not a stand alone tool it requires a FDT container application to be executed The DTM provides a number of interface functions through which it can be controlled and accessed in order to transfer data to or from the DTM A DTM provides all the options for configuration and monitoring of a device which it can present to the user through its own user interface The user interface for a DTM is provided using ActiveX windows Control of these windows is done by the DTM but the FDT container application can request specific user
103. will have a significant influence on the performance on the PROFIBUS network The addition of a new device to an existing configuration will require a new configuration file to be downloaded in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit which will temporarily disable all communication by this Unit on PROFIBUS Appendix A Bus Parameters A 1 Bus Parameters The PROFIBUS Bus Parameters define both the baud rate and the bus timing settings necessary to perform the exchange of messages over PROFIBUS The Bus Parameters settings must be determined for each and every Master device on the bus and usually depend on e the number of I O data bytes per slave device e the number of slave devices connected to the master e the number of other masters on the bus The Bus Parameter settings consist for one part of a number of settings which are directly entered into the PROFIBUS interface hardware registers These settings implement the necessary timing to enable the transfer of a single message between the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and a slave device The other part of the Bus Parameters must be calculated These parameters implement the overall cyclic timing as well as the watchdog time to monitor the communication The calculation is performed by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit DTM The software implements a formula to calculate the settings which will be downloaded to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Most of the parameters have baud rate dependent default values Some of the
104. will not be set in next Global_Control message Set Unfreeze bit in next Global_Control message Unfreeze input data at slave device See note 1 Freeze Freeze bit will not be set in next Global_Control message Set Freeze bit in next Global_Control message Freeze input data at slave device See note 1 Unsync Unsync bit will not be set in next Global_Control message Set Unsync bit in next Global_Control message Unsync output data at slave device See note 1 Sync Sync bit will not be set in next Global_Control message Set Sync bit in next Global_Control message Sync output data at slave device See note 1 Not Used 236 C200HW PRM21 Notes Appendix G CIO Bit Name Value Description Word Station address Selected slave device address Target Global_Control message to all slave devices which com ply with the selected group bits See bit 08 15 Not Used Group 1 Select individual groups of slave devices by setting bits associ Group 2 ated with the group Group 3 Set all group bits to 00 to select all slaves Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Note 1 The Clear_Data command will always clear the output data whether the Freeze command is activat ed or not 2 When activated simultaneously Unsync has priority over Sync and Unfreeze has priority over Freeze Status Words The status words for the
105. 0 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Slave station 16 31 Word n 11 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 Slave station 32 47 Word n 12 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 Slave station 48 63 Word n 13 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 Slave station 64 79 Word n 14 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 Slave station 80 95 Word n 15 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 Slave station 96 111 Word n 16 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 Slave station 112 125 When a slave device is in Data_Exchange with the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to which it has been allocated it is exchanging I O Data with the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit If the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in CLEAR mode it will read the slave s input data but send zeros or an empty message as output data If the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in OPERATE mode it will read the slave s input data and send any output data provided by the PLC CPU 114 Allocated CIO Area Words Section 4 2 Word n 9 to n 16 n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number Bit Name Slave Data_Exchange Active flags Status
106. 0 Byte 1 MSB Byte 2 LSB Bit 15 usta Word 0 Byte 1 MSB Byte 2 LSB 32 bit Double Word Data 32 bit double word data is transferred over PROFIBUS with the Most Significant Byte first The PROFIBUS Master Unit will ensure that a double word transmitted or received over PROFIBUS is mapped on to CS1 CJ1 series double word format in the PLC memory area The figure below shows the conversion in graphic format PLC Data area PROFIBUS Bit 07 Bit 00 Bit 15 Bit 00 Byte 1 MSB Word 0 Byte 3 Byte 4 LSB Word 1 Byte 1 MSB Byte 2 Double Word 0 Byte 4 LSB C 3 Floating Point Data Conversions PROFIBUS defines the IEEE 754 format single precision floating point data type It is transferred over the net work as a 4 byte data Most Significant Byte first In the PLC memory area the same data type and size is defined but data of this type is stored with the Most Significant bytes on the higher memory location and the Least Significant Bytes on the lower memory location The figure below shows the conversion in graphic for mat PLC Data area PROFIBUS Bit 07 Bit 00 Bit 15 Bit 00 Byte 1 MSB Single precision Word 0 Byte 4 LSB floating point Word 1 Byte 1 MSB IEEE754 Byte 4 LSB 220 I O Data Conversions Appendix C C 4 Text String Data Conversion PROFIBUS defines ASCII text strings data type It is transferred over the network as a string of characters In order to mai
107. 0 minutes Shock resistance Conforms to IEC60068 2 27 test Ea 196 m s three times each in X Y and Z directions Dielectric strength 600 VAC between isolated circuits Conformance to EMC and Electrical safety standards EN61000 6 2 2001 EN61000 6 4 2001 CISPR11 EN61131 2 1994 a12 2000 Front case Settings Unit Number rotary switch range 0 F Hex Indicators 7 LEDs indicating Unit status and PROFIBUS status Unit status RUN Green LED ERC Red LED ERH Red LED PRM Green LED BST Green LED COMM Green LED BF Red LED Host PLC status Configuration status PROFIBUS status PROFIBUS Connector 9 pin sub D female connector 4 40 UNC thread Memory area allocation CIO Area words allocated for the CPU Bus Unit Fixed allocation of 25 words per Unit CIO 1500 25 x Unit number CIO words provide e 2 words for software switches e 1 word for the Global Control e 21 words for the Unit and Slave statuses DM Area words allocated for the CPU Bus Unit Fixed allocation of 100 words per Unit DM 30000 100 x Unit number DM Area allocated to the Unit is reserved for future use I O Data allocations Maximum total size 7168 words I O Data words can be allocated to up to 2 input areas and 2 output areas Input areas and output areas can be mapped to CIO DM WR and HR Areas as well as EM banks Mapping must be defined through con
108. 00 kBits s e 1500 kBits s default value e 3000 kBits s e 6000 kBits s e 12000 kBits s Optimize The Optimize setting defines whether parameters can be changed by the user Yes e By Standard Forces the user to use the default optimized settings e By User Makes selected fields editable Note 1 If the By User option is selected and changes have been made it is still possible to switch between Optimize settings without the changes being lost 2 If the By User option is selected and the baud rate is changed the pa rameters will be optimized to the new baud rate Slot Time The maximum time a Master Unit must wait for a response to a request message tgiz Yes Min Station Delay The minimum allowed time for a slave device before it will generate a response to tpi Yes of Responders a request message Max Station Delay The maximum allowed time for a slave device to generate a response to a teit Yes of Responders request message Quiet Time The time a transmitting device must wait after the end of a message frame before tgiz No enabling its receiver Setup Time The time between an event and the necessary reaction tert No Min Slave Interval The Minimum Slave Interval defines the poll cycle i e the minimum time between tgit Yes two consecutive Data_Exchange Cycles to the same slave device The Minimum Slave Interval must be smaller than the Target Rotation Time Calculated Minimum
109. 000000 7 1 2 1 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP Master 7 1 2 2 FDT DTM Technology 0 0 0 enrere 7 1 2 3 GSD file Technology 0 0 eee eee eee 8 1 3 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 0 0 0 eee eee ee 9 1 3 1 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Features 0 9 1 3 2 Specifications sss 6a penne swag seclige dab eed eR SNS 10 1 3 3 Comparison with Previous Model 000 15 1 4 CxX Profibus Configurator 0 00 00 eee eee 17 1 4 1 CX Profibus Features 00 0 0 cece eee eee eee 17 124 2 SPC Cations oss dese week cee ete wea ech ett tae hones wee 19 1 5 Basic Operating Procedure 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 21 1 521 OVERVieWS 2 Snead tese tes ee SOR Ot A 21 1 5 2 Preparations for Communications 000005 22 1 5 3 Procedures Prior to Starting Communications 22 Overview of PROFIBUS Section 1 1 1 1 Overview of PROFIBUS 1 1 1 Introduction Standard EN50170 PROFIBUS FMS PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS PA Uniform Bus Access Protocol A Caution PROFIBUS PROcess FleldBUS is an open fieldbus standard for a wide range of applications in manufacturing processing and building automation The Standard EN 50170 the Euronorm for field communications to which PROFIBUS adheres guarantees vendor independence and transparency of operation It enables devices of various manufacturers to intercommunicate wi
110. 001 and 0050 1 to 80 Command Response decimal in the command The response returns the actual number of records read Maximum Number of The maximum number of records that can be stored in the error log In a Stored Records PROFIBUS DP Master Unit the maximum number of stored records is fixed Response at 50 80 decimal Number of Stored The number of records stored at the time the command is executed Records Response Error Log Data The specified number of error log records from the starting record number is Response returned sequentially The total number of bytes in the error log is calculated as the number of records x 10 bytes record Each error log record thus consist of 10 bytes con figured as follows 1st byte 10th byte Error Detailed a code information Month Year Hour Day Second Minutes Error Code Detailed Information Details of the error stored in the record Refer to SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance for details Minute Second Day Hour Year Month Indicate the time at which the error stored in the record occurred Precautions The total number of records to be returned is either the number specified in the command or the number of available new records in the Error Log which ever is smaller If more then one record is read the records are returned in a oldest to newer sequence i e the oldest record is the first in the response message R
111. 0054 satocndawsauianeoieendeuecet a 1 Itende Adini en oie ice ree EA Ria nak PRS Ge AEN ER OS xii 2 General Precautions rreren e a ein a a Rud ee aR A Ra xii 3 Safety Precautions 28st cbc oie ce ee eee a a a a A xii 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 0 eee eee xiii 5 Application Precautions sceso secer ereeru sste roetes ea srra ee eee ens xiv 6 Conformance to EC Directives 00 cect eee eee eens xvi SECTION 1 Features and Specifications essssssesssoseeeo 1 1 1 Overview of PROFIBUS 2 0 00 i E A A EE EEE R ees 2 1 2 Setting up a PROFIBUS DP Network 2 0 0 0 eee nee 7 1 3 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 00 cee eee 9 1 4 CxX Profibus Configurator ssepe esei eee ERG 17 1 5 Basic Operating Procedure 0 0 eee ene eens 21 SECTION 2 Installation and Wiring ccc ceeecccesseeeee 23 221 Unit Component 2 scsi inen ay Seed as aed ie hee wrens ahd aoe Beta Bae E 24 2 2 Installing the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Units 0 eee 28 2 3 Initial Setup Procedure 0 eee eens 31 2 4 Setting up a Network 0 2 ence ences 33 2 5 Defining PROFIBUS DP in the Software 0 0 eee eee eee 37 SECTION 3 Configuration Software ccc ecceeeseccceees 39 SEL Installations i sss a seeds ceete tele E an RSE alas AANE a ole ied ales E A Tala la tune N As 40 3 2 SCX Pronibus si oi3 a eh tan bat ee eds ip ee oe Weleda neues 49 3 3 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Mas
112. 0100 0000 0100 words to be transferred from PLC to the Unit out put buffer see Note 1 and 2 Output Area 2 Start address in the Unit output buffer See m 1 Output Area 2 Start address in the Unit output buffer See m 2 Output Area 2 Size See m 3 Number of input data areas 0000 Default mapping PLC addresses ClO0050 to ClO0099 are mapped to Unit input buffer bytes 000 to 099 0001 One user defined input data area DM word m 8 m 9 and m 10 define the first area 0002 Two user defined input data areas DM word m 11 m 12 and m 13 define the second area Other Default mapping see 0000 Input Area 1 Start address in the Unit input buffer 0000 to 0510 Byte 000 510 even in input buffer of the Unit Other Setting error input area is ignored See Note 1 Input Area 1 Start address in the Unit input buffer 0000 to 5999 D00000 D05999 A000 to A235 ClO0000 ClO0235 A300 to A511 ClO0300 ClO0511 B000 to B099 HROOO HR099 C000 to C063 ClO1000 ClO1063 Other Setting error input area is ignored See Note 1 Input Area 1 Size 0000 to 0100 0000 0100 words to be transferred from PLC to the Unit input buffer see Note 1 and 2 Other Setting error input area is ignored See Note 1 Input Area 2 Start address in the Unit input buffer See m 8 Input Area 2 Start addres
113. 1 e A DTM to configure the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master e A DTM to allow the handling of classic GSD files in CX Profibus The following provides a quick overview of the functions CX Profibus FDT _ CX Profibus provides an FDT environment in which DTMs can be executed Container Application The main function of CX Profibus is to facilitate the DTMs and the data exchange between them It provides e Network setup functions A tree view shows the relations between the DTMs i e the relation between the Master and slave devices e Device Catalogue functions A Device Catalogue containing the installed DTMs is maintained to which the user can add new DTMs or delete them Device DTMs can be added to the network from this Catalogue e Project maintenance functions CX Profibus provides the functions to cre ate save and open project files It facilitates user access control which limits of use to authorized personnel only using password protection e Additional functions CX Profibus provides additional functions like print ing error logging FDT Communication logging and help files CS1 CJ1W PRM21 DTM The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 DTM consists of three parts e The Settings DTM which handles the configuration for the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit This includes the bus parameters settings the I O data mappings and Master specific settings The Settings DTM provides its own user interface The Monitoring DTM which handles the status monitoring and control
114. 1 series PROFIBUS DP Multiple I O Terminal Operation Manual PRT1 COM amp GT1 series Describes the Installation and Opera tion of the PROFIBUS DP PRT1 COM and GT1 series I O Units W900 E2 C200H series PROFIBUS DP Slave unit Operation Manual SYSMAC C200H series C200HW PRT21 PROFIBUS DP Slave unit Describes the Installation and Opera tion of the C200HW PRT21 PROFI BUS DP Slave Units W901 E2 F150 series PROFIBUS DP Vision Sensor Operation Manual F150 C15E 3 PRT21 PROFI BUS DP Vision Sensor Describes the Installation and Opera tion of the F150 PROFIBUS Vision Sensor Z143 E1 CS CJ series Ethernet Units Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ series CS1W ETN01 ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 Ethernet Units Describes the installation and opera tion of the CS1W ETN01 10Base 5 CS1W ETN11 10Base T and CJ1W ETN11 Ethernet Units W343 E1 CS CJ series Serial Communi cations Boards and Serial Communications Units Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CuJ series CS1W SCB21 41 CS1W SCU21 CU1W CSU41 Describes the use of Serial Communi cations Units and Boards to perform serial communications with external devices W336 E1 CS CJ1 series Devicenet Units Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ1 series CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 Describes the Installation and Opera tion of the CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 Devicenet units W380 E2
115. Auto addressing See I O data Mapping Auto CLEAR 6 64 Behaviour 93 Enable 166 Feature 166 Resume OPERATE mode after 166 Transition conditions 166 B Basic Operating Procedure 21 Broadcast communication See Global Control Bus access protocol 4 Bus connector 36 See Wiring Bus parameters 203 Baud rate 204 Data control time 205 Definitions 203 Determining bus parameters 205 GAP update factor 205 Highest station address HSA 205 Max retry limit 204 Max Tsdr 204 Min slave interval 204 Min Tsdr 204 Poll timeout 205 Quiet time 204 Setup time 204 Slot time 204 Target rotation time 204 Watchdog control 205 Bus termination See Wiring C C200HW PRM21 DTM 17 Address table tab 82 Adjusting bus parameters 82 Auto addressing 84 Bus parameter tab 80 Changing address mapping 84 CIF error messages 239 CIO Control words 236 CIO status words 237 Configuration user interface 79 Index Configuring communication 87 Connecting 87 Diagnostics user interface 84 Downloading parameters 88 Installation 48 Memory layout 83 Monitoring 88 Sorting I O modules 84 Unit DM settings 233 Word allocations 233 Cable see Wiring CIO Area See I O Allocations CIO Area Configuring the PROFIBUS DP Master See C200HW PRM21 DTM Configuration See CS1 CJ1W PRM21 DTM Configuration CS1 CJ1W PRM21 External dimensions 14 Functional Specifications 11 General Specifications 10 Protocol Specif
116. C program can send these to the Unit Command code MRC SRC MEMORY AREA READ RUN STOP CONTROLLER DATA READ ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR 5 1 3 Response Code List 118 Response codes are 2 byte codes which indicate the results of command execution They are returned in the response following the command code The first byte of a response code is the MRES main response code which categorizes the results of command execution The second byte is the SRES sub response code which specifies the results MRC Main request code Command Response SRC Sub request code code code MRES Main response code SRES Sub response code MRC SRC MRES SRES FINS Commands and Responses Section 5 1 The MRES codes are shown in the following table along with the results they indicate Refer to Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 for details on response codes including the SRES MRES Execution results Normal completion Master Unit error Slave device error Service not supported Command format error Parameter error Read not possible Status error 5 1 4 Sending FINS using CMND The CMND instruction can be executed from the user program in a CS CJ series PLC CMND sends n bytes of command data beginning with S the beginning send word for storing command data at the source node to desti nation node N In return m
117. C200HW PRM21 is achieved through a serial RS 232c Connection between one of the PC s Serial COM Ports and the dedicated configuration connector at the front of the Unit For details refer to the C200HW PRM21 Manual W349 E2 2 The figure below shows the connection methods for both types Serial connection to CS CJ series Serial connection to C200H series PROFIBUS DP Master Unit PROFIBUS DP Master Unit CX Profibus Configurator CX Profibus Configurator COM Port on PC CS CJ series Peripheral B C200H series PROFIBUS DP Heer Line usor PROFIBUS DP Master Unit ost Master Unit Peripheral or RS232C H PROFIBUS DP la il Port of CPU Unit H B Master Unit a En q 1 Configuration Port on PROFIBUS Network h PROFIBUS Network 17 CX Profibus Configurator Section 1 4 1 4 2 Specifications Functional Specifications Item Specification Model number WS02 9094G Hardware platform Personal computer IBM PC AT or compatible Processor Pentium 500 MHz or higher Memory 256 Mbytes Hard disk A minimum of 256 Mbytes CD ROM drive Graphics resolution 800 x 600 pixels minimum Serial port RS 232C Operating System MS Windows NT4 0 SP6 MS Windows 2000 SP2 e MS Windows XP Note Inter
118. CLEAR OPERATE Auto CLEAR If an error occurs during the data exchange phase of the master the Auto CLEAR function determines the subsequent actions If this function has been disabled the master remains in the OPERATE mode If the function has been Fail safe State enabled the master automatically changes the network to the CLEAR mode in which the outputs of the assigned PROFIBUS DP slaves are switched to zero i e the fail safe state The master continues to read the inputs of the slaves Setting up a PROFIBUS DP Network Section 1 2 1 2 Setting up a PROFIBUS DP Network 1 2 1 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP Master Configuration Technology In order to operate a PROFIBUS network each master in the network needs to be configured This process of PROFIBUS master configuration involves e setting up the network topology i e assigning the slave devices with which the master will be exchanging data e defining the parameterization data which the master will send to each of the slave devices before process data exchange can commence e defining the configuration data i e defining the process data which will be exchanged e setting up the bus parameters which define the baud rate and the bus timing parameters e downloading the configuration setup to the master device The configuration process is usually facilitated by a special Computer based program often referred to as a configurator The configurator requires spec
119. Command too large 1002 Command too short 110C e Mode code setting not supported code exceeds 01 e Invalid device code High byte not equal to 81 e Invalid target slave address exceeds 125 Initiates a state change within the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit This command will disable a pre allocated slave device in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The targeted slave device will temporarily be removed from the Unit s list of active devices The Unit will Unlock the slave device and stop communication with it The configured slave devices are by default enabled A disabled slave device can be enabled using the RUN command see 5 2 2 RUN 0407 The targeted slave device is defined by the device code in the command T 04 02 l Command Station code code 04 02 Command End code code Device code command Defines the slave device to be enabled state as follows High byte Always set to 81 Hex Low byte 00 7D Hex Defines the slave device network address The following end codes can be returned by the Unit in response to the STOP command 0000 Normal 0203 Slave device not allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master 0402 Service not supported by Unit model version Command too large Command Response Reference Section 5 2 Command too short e Invalid device code High byte not equal to 81 e Invalid target slave address exceeds 125 5 2 4 CONTROLLER DATA R
120. Corporation t g COM C DPS Version 1 000 2002 06 Hilscher GmbH k i Compact Slave Cont 32 0 2000 07 Asea Brown Boveri _ CPM14 PRT21 V1 0 2002 03 OMRON Corporation ig COM1 PRT21 V1 0 2000 04 OMRON Corporation m CS1W PRM21 PRO 3 62 2003 10 OMRON Corporation DARC w DP Y1 00 Release 1 00 1999 06 Ferrocontrol GmbH amp Co LE EC1 DEB DPS Version 1 000 2002 07 Hilscher GmbH 2 ET 2005 IM 151 C V0 2 2000 11 SIEMENS Help Update Install GSD Files Check the list of available DTMs and verify that all the devices that need to be added to the Network both master and slave devices are among the DTMs in the list If one or more of the DTMs is missing these DTMs must first be installed and the Device Catalogue updated Non GSD file based DTMs are usually provided with their own setup pro gram Installation of these DTMs must be performed outside CX Profibus e g from Windows Explorer In case of DTM installations outside CX Profibus always initiate an update of the Device Catalogue before assembling a network Without this up date the newly installed DTM will not appear in the list of devices To Up date the Device Catalogue press the Update button in the Device Catalogue main window An Update must also be performed when an already existing DTM is up graded Without the update the old version number will still be shown in the list Failure to update the Device Catalogu
121. EAD 0501 Command Block Response Block Parameters Model Version Response Response Codes Reads the model name and version number data from the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 05 01 l Command code 20 bytes 05 01 20 bytes Command Response Model Version code code The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit model and version are returned as ASCII characters occupying 20 bytes each i e 20 characters each If all bytes are not used the remaining bytes will be all spaces ASCII 20 Hex Example Model CS1W PRM21 CJU1W PRM21 Version V1 00 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large 5 2 5 ERROR LOG READ 2102 Command Block Response Block Parameters First Record Number Command Reads a specified number of error records from the error log 21 02 Command Beginning Number code record of number records 21 02 10 bytes 10 bytes each Command Response Maximum Number Number Error log code code number of stored of records of stored records records records The first record to be read The first record number can be specified in the range between 0000 and 0050 0 to 80 decimal where 0000 is the oldest 123 Command Response Reference Section 5 2 record in the Error Log since the last performed ERROR LOG READ com mand Number of Records The number of records to read is specified between 0
122. H WH Wr WB Ws O22 O21 z z OA OH r OT OB wr Osx BOs V2 z OM WS s Wer Ws was 8s BOT z VRB V4 S VS 7 WB D100 iol m m Hie Hi Wis wir Vis wi09 Gio Yin 12 His His O15 Os O17 Os 1NI D120 121 Hi22 O13 Qiu His C Not configured E Running O Diagnosis E Not found H Ero m Station Error Station Address 4 Error event No reaction of the remote station Connected The C200HW PRM21 DTM Diagnostics User Interface contains five fields of information These fields are described in the table below LED Indicator Description Information Field Operate Master Unit is in OPERATE mode i e the Master Unit exchanges I O data with its slave devices Clear Master Unit is in CLEAR mode i e the Master Unit reads input data from the assigned slave devices but it sends zeros as output data to the slave devices Stop Master Unit is in STOP mode i e the Master Unit may only communicate with other Master devices and not with the assigned slave devices Offline Master Unit is in OFF LINE mode and not active on the PROFIBUS network c 2 g o a O L o n 85 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 LED Indicator Information Field Timeout Description This indicator will be set to ON when due to the number of rejected PROFIBUS messages the Master supervisory timeout has expired This usually indicates a short circuit in the PROFIBUS network The amo
123. Input 7 fy JL Refresh Cycle F4 i Freeze command freezes slave input refresh process Last input data transferred to transmit buffer will be transferred over PROFIBUS Freeze command causes immediate update of transmit buffer Last sampled data will be transferred over PROFIBUS Unfreeze command cancels Freeze command and causes immediate update of transmit buffer Input refresh process started again Note The Global Control command as set in the CIO words is transferred to the Unit together with the I O data but the Global Control command is sent over the PROFIBUS network following the I O data The Freeze command forces an immediate update of the PROFIBUS transmission buffers in the slave device with the last input value sampled This input data is then transferred to the PROFIBUS Master Unit with the next I O data exchange cycle Sync Unsyne commands Sending a Global Control Sync command to a slave device has the following effect e The slave device will update its physical outputs only once with the last received PROFIBUS output data despite new output data being received from the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit e If a new Global Control Sync command is sent the slave device will update its physical outputs only once with the most recent received out put data e If a Global Control Unsync command is sent the slave device will revert back to its original situa
124. J1W PRM21 Note Incase this error occurs the Unit will automatically switch to OFF LINE mode Indicates that no Double Master Address error has occurred Hardware error The Hardware error flag will be turned ON if an error has occurred on the bus e g message exceeding 256 bytes broken messages faulty bus timing or devices beyond the HSA have been detected Note Incase this error occurs the Unit will automatically switch to OFF LINE mode Indicates that no Hardware error has occurred Reserved by sys These bits will be set to OFF by the Unit tem 112 Allocated CIO Area Words Section 4 2 Bit Name Mode command error Status Controlled by Unit operation This bit will be turned ON if e more than one command mode switch has been set i e Bit 00 to Bit 03 in Word n has been set or e a mode command switch is set while the previous command is in progress or e a mode transition command is given and the Unit has detected that it does not yet have a valid configuration or it detected an internal error either of which prevented it from reaching that mode e g Invalid Parameter set and transi tion to OPERATE mode If this bit is turned ON it will remain so until a valid command is sent to the Unit The invalid mode command will be ignored If the bit flags have been cleared the Unit will reset this bit to OFF Parameter error The Parameter set error will
125. M and BF LED indicators will remain OFF 179 Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators Section 7 2 7 2 4 Unit Configuration Errors Unit configuration errors are errors which occur during download of the new configuration or after restarting the Unit following a download The error can be determined by examining the ERC and the PRM LED indicators The error determination procedure uses the table below To determine the error e First find the status of the ERC LED indicator left column e Move one column to the right and find the PRM LED indicator status The probable error causes are then listed to the right of the third column Unit Configuration Errors Probable cause Correction Not Lit Not Lit Not a valid combination Lit No errors The PROFIBUS DP Parameter set is ready for use Flashing No errors A new configuration is being downloaded from the configurator or from the Memory Card Lit Not Lit An error has occurred while writing the Parame Re download the Parameter sets from CX Profi ter sets to the non volatile memory bus or the Memory Card If the problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit During startup the checksum of the Parameter Re download the Parameter sets from CX Profi sets stored in non volatile memory was found to bus or the Memory Card be corrupted If the problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit During startup the Parameter set stored in non Check the P
126. Ms can only be added to Master DTMs Whether or not a DTM can be added to the branch is indicated by the cursor N indicates no addition R indicates that addition is allowed Using the Add Device Button 1 2 3 Note Note 1 Select the top of the network to which the DTM must be added i e select MyNetwork in the Network View 2 Open the device Catalogue Either select the View Device Catalogue menu option or press the wl button in the Tool Bar 3 Select the device that must be added to the network 4 Select the Add Device button at the bottom of the Device Catalogue win dow The device DTM is added to the network Note If a DTM is selected in the Device Catalogue which can not be add ed to the current location in the network the Add Device button will be disabled which is shown as a grayed out button When adding a CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM to the network it is automat ically assigned the PROFIBUS network address 1 This address can be changed after opening the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM After adding the Master DTM to the Network View repeat one of the proce dures as outlined above to add slave DTMs to the Master DTM In the proce dures above the highest level for adding slave DTMs is the Master DTM When adding slave DTMs to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM they are automatically assigned their PROFIBUS network addresses in ascending order i e the first slave is assigned address 2 the second addre
127. Note 1 Ifthe selected PLC memory area on to which the data must be mapped is not supported by the PLC CPU a warning message will be displayed upon downloading the configuration 2 If an invalid setting is made the Occupied length value will change its co lour to red indicating an invalid setting In addition a warning message will be displayed upon saving the changes Invalid settings are for example e The start address and length definitions of the data block will cause it to exceed the area in the PLC e The data mapping of two or more I O Areas Output and or Input will be overlapping each other partly or totally in the PLC memory 3 The Compress button will be disabled i e grayed out when Auto Ad dressing see Master Setup Tab on page 64 has been enabled 4 Before Compressing the Master DTM will display a warning message prompting the user for confirmation of the action Changing Mapped Data By default the data is mapped to Area 1 in both the Output and Input Alloca Allocations tion tabs It is however possible to map a part of the data to the second area in the same tab For example an application may require to store all byte data in one location and all word data in another Moving data mapped in one Area to another Area is done from the module list The procedure is as follows 1 2 3 1 Find the module which must be mapped to a desired Area in the module list and select it 69 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP M
128. Opens an edit window to add or edit Project information Recently used File List Lists the recently used Project files Exit Exits CX Profibus Cut Cuts devices and pastes them to the clipboard Copy Copies devices to the clipboard Paste Copies devices from the clipboard to the cursor position 51 CX Profibus Section 3 2 Menu Command Network View Short Key Description Hides or un hides the Network View window Device Catalogue Opens or closes the Device Catalogue Tool Bar Hides or un hides the Tool Bar Status Bar Hides or un hides the Status Bar Error Logging Hides or un hides the Error Logging window FDT Monitoring Hides or un hides the FDT Monitoring window Add Device Opens up the Device Catalog Add window from which devices can be added to the selected network tree Upload Parameters Uploads the parameters from a device to its associated DTM Download Parameters Downloads the parameters from DTM to its associated device Export to HTML Exports the properties and parameters of the selected DTM or the net work to a HTML file and opens the default browser Properties Displays the properties of the selected DTM or the network Tools User Management Displays the user management i e password management window Window Cascade Cascades all open DTM User Interfaces
129. Output data format Output to slave PLC area Output area start address Action on slave PLC PROGRAM mode Action on slave PLC 1 0 bus fail Input data format Input from slave PLC area Input area start address Slave PLC status indication ON default 10 ms default Reset to 0 default Motorola default CIO area CIOxxxx 0x01 5e Continue 1 0 data exchange Stop 1 0 data exchange Motorola default CIO area ClOxxxx 0x0032 PROFIBUS diagnostics only I Decimal values OK Cancel Apply Help The PROFIBUS DP parameter message contains a number of settings for the slave device It is transmitted to the slave device before the I O configuration message In most cases a slave device requires a block of Common Parame ter settings i e settings which apply to the whole device However there are also more sophisticated modular devices which require parameter settings per I O module selected The specific parameters blocks can be selected from the drop down list at the top of the Parameter tab In the figure above the Common parameters are shown This particular device does not support module parameters so the parameters shown are the only ones The Parameter list consist of a left column containing the name of the Param eter and a right column containing the settings options In order to change the parameter setting double click the row with the left mouse button Depend ing on the type of parameter an
130. Overview 102 DM Area Allocations 103 T O data Configuration 145 Mapping Algorithm 145 Area start address 151 Auto addressing Default behaviour 146 Enable disable 149 Mapping without 149 Re allocating modules behaviour when 148 Compressing 150 Concept 145 Re allocating modules 147 Removing gaps 150 Supported I O range 145 Types 152 219 Conversion 219 Date Time 152 221 Floating point 152 220 Integer 152 219 220 Text string 152 221 Time difference 152 Time of day 152 T O table Creating 32 Installation Handling precautions 28 Mounting CJ1W PRM21 30 CS1W PRM21 28 Installing new GSD files 129 L M LED indicators 25 243 Specifications 25 See also Troubleshooting LED indicators Low voltage directive xvi Maintenance 199 Cleaning 199 Inspection 199 Equipment 199 Procedure 199 Manual About ix Revision history 247 Master devices See PROFIBUS Master Master DTM Configuration 7 See C200HW PRM21 DTM See CSI CJ1W PRM21 DTM Medium Access Control 4 Memory card Backing up Unit setup files 229 Backup functions 229 Restoring Unit setup files 230 Message communication See FINS communication Min slave interval 204 Monitoring CS1 CJ1 PRM21 Master Unit 6 Monitoring Time 6 Slave device 6 Monitoring slave status 171 Multicast communication See Global Control N Network operation modes CLEAR 6 OFF LINE 6 OPERATE 6 STOP
131. PROFIBUS DP Master Units OPERATION MANUAL SYSMAC CS CJ series CS1W PRM21 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units Operation Manual Produced February 14 2005 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use by a trained operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to classify and explain the precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them A DANGER Indicates information that if not heeded is likely to result in serious injury or loss of life N WARNING Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in serious injury or loss of life Z Caution Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in minor or relatively serious injury damage to the product or faulty operation OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The first letter of the word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether it appears in the proper name of the prod uct The abbreviation Ch appears in some displays and on some OMRON products It often means word and is abbreviated as Wd in the documentation The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Logic Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera t
132. Prm_Fault Diag Master_Lock Description Diag Station_Non_Existent This bit is set by the Master Unit if the slave does not respond to any of the request messages sent by the master If this bit is set the diagnostic bits contains the state of the last diagnostic message or the initial value The slave device sets this bit to zero in case of a correct response Diag Station_Not_Ready This bit indicates that the slave device is not yet ready for data transfer Diag Cfg_Fault Set by the slave device this bit indicates that the last received configuration data from the Master Unit are rejected The configuration data in the slave device dif fer from the configuration sent by the Master Unit Diag Ext_Diag This bit indicates that the diagnostics message returned by the slave device con tains extended diagnostics i e it contains more than the mandatory 6 bytes Diag Not_Supported In case the Master Unit sent a message to the slave device which is not sup ported by that device this bit will be set by the slave device 210 Appendix Bit Name Description Diag Invalid_Slave_Response _ This bit is set by the Master Unit if the slave has returned an invalid response to a Master request message The slave device will set this bit to 0 Diag Prm_Fault Set by the slave device this bit indicates that the last received parameter data from the Master Unit have been rejected The parameter data in the slave de
133. Programming Device Applicable Programming Devices Connecting Programming Devices Procedure for Creating an O Table 32 An I O table is used to identify Units connected to the PLC and to allocate I O to them The I O table is stored within the PLC CPU and loaded at start up If any change is made to the Unit configuration of a CS CJ series PC the I O table must be created again to register the Units to the CPU Unit To create the I O table connect a Programming Device such as a Program ming Console or CX Programmer to the PLC The following Programming Devices can be used with CS CJ series PLCs Programming Console Model number Key Sheet required Recommended cable required C200H PRO27 E CS1W KS001 E CS1W CN224 cable length 2 0 m CS1W CN624 cable length 6 0 m CX Programmer and CX Net Model number WS02 CXPLILI EV2 The operations are explained here using a Programming Console For details regarding the CX Programmer and the CX Net refer to the CX Programmer User s Manual CX Net is software that comes with CX Programmer and is automatically installed when CX Programmer is installed To connect a Programming Console attach a CS CJ series Key Sheet and then connect the Console to the CPU Unit s peripheral port It cannot be con nected to the RS 232C port The procedure for creating an I O table is shown here taking as an example an I O table that is generated automatically fo
134. Quiet Time 0 tit Max Retry Limit 1 Setup Time 1 Bit Highest Station Address HSA 126 Bus Monitoring Data Control Time 1200 ms Override slave specific Watchdog Control Time Min Slave Interval 2000 ps Watchdog Control Time 20 ms r Calculated Timing Tidi 37 tit P Auto Clear ON Tid2 150 tBit Values marked with this symbol should be 3 A adjusted to changes in the topology Adjust OK Cancel Apply Help The Bus Parameters are settings which define the communication behaviour and timing on the PROFIBUS network The Bus Parameters depend on the selected baud rate slave communication parameters as well as the number of I O data bytes exchanged between the Master Unit and each of the slave devices C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 The required combination of Bus Parameters is calculated by the program based on the dependencies mentioned above However the user can change selected Bus Parameter manually if the application requires this ZN Caution Changing the calculated Bus Parameters manually is not recommended and should only be performed if this is really necessary Changing the Bus Param eters to an invalid combination may result in Unit malfunctioning and unex pected behaviour Note The bus parameter calculations as performed by the C20Q0HW PRM21 DTM will differ from the calculations performed by the predecessor program Sycondp due to updated insights in bus calculat
135. Reinstall CX PROFIBUS if problem persists contact supplier 227 Configurator Error and Warning Messages Appendix D 228 Appendix E Memory Card Backup Functions E 1 Outline of Functions The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit stores the following setup data in the internal non volatile memory Flash ROM e Bus Parameters set e Allocated slave parameter sets All these parameter sets can be backed up to and restored from a Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit If the parameter data of a good functioning PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has been saved on a Memory Card this saved data can be used to perform a quick configuration when replacing the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit with out the direct use of the Configuration software The data can be backed up to a Memory Card only It cannot be backed up to a EM file The backup process does not only involve the backup of the PROFIBUS DP Master parameter data but also the parameter data of any other Special CPU Bus Unit on the same PLC as well as the PLC program param eter area data and I O memory data This function can be executed in any operating mode When performing a backup from the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to the Memory Card the parameter sets are stored in the file BACKUPnn PRM where nn is the Unit number in 2 digit hexadecimal Note This function is not supported by CS series CS1 CPU Units that are pre EV1 E 2 Backing Up Unit Setup Files In order to save the Unit s parameter sets to the
136. SD file parameter GSD_Revision is set to 3 or higher The additional tabbed windows are discussed below Extensions Tab The Extensions tab contains a number of settings which define additional behaviour of the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit with respect to a particular PROFIBUS DPV1 slave device Although this specific behav iour is defined in the PROFIBUS DP extensions standard PROFIBUS DPV1 it does not necessarily require PROFIBUS DPV1 capabilities from the PROFI BUS DP Master Units The Extension tab window is shown below 92 Generic Slave Device DTM CS ection 3 5 ioi xi Device BK3120 GSD File BK3120 GSE Vendor BECKHOFF INDUSTRIE ELEKTRONIK Ident Number OxBECE Configuration Parameter Group Extensions orv rm Auto Clear r Fail Safe Behaviour Process Auto Clear C Send zeros in Clear Mode C Ignore Auto Clear Send no data in Clear Mode Configuration Data Convention Error on Cyclic Data Exchange DPV 1 compliant Continue if slave not responding EN50170 compliant C Abort if slave not responding Diagnostics update delay 3 bus cycles OK Cancel Apply Help Auto Clear Processing The Auto Clear processing box defines whether or not the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit should ignore a failure of this particular slave when Auto CLEAR has been enabled in the Master Unit See Auto CLEAR Box on page 64 in section 3 3 1 Configuration User Interface When Ignore Auto CLEAR has been selected a failur
137. Setup Bus Parameters Slave Are Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave An Output Allocation Input Allocation Output Allocation Input Allocation Addr Index Device Module CJ1W PRT21 2 1 CJ1W PRT21 1 words 2 2 2 words 3 1 CPM14 PRT21 2 bytes 3 4 words 3 1 CPM14 PRT21 2 bytes Output Area 1 r Output Area 1 C10 ModueName 3200 2 1 words output 3200 2 1 words output 3201 2 4 words output 3201 2 2 words output 3202 4words output 3202 2 words output 3203 4words output 3203 2 4 words output 3204 4words output 3204 4words output 3205 3 2 bytes output No consiste 3205 4 words output 3206 3206 4 words output 3207 3207 3 2bytes output No consiste 3208 3208 One I O module of two output Initial I O Configuration words was inserted and re allocated subsequent I O modules The start address of Output area 1 in the example remains the same after adding an I O module After setting up the initial I O configuration the I O modules can be re mapped to the second Input Output area This can be accomplished by using drag amp drop to move the I O modules To accomplish this perform the follow ing sequence 1 Open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Configuration User Interface 2 Select the Slave Area tab The window shows two sub tabs One for Out put Allocation and one for Input Allocation The following points apply to each of these tabs 147 I O Communication
138. TM Section 3 3 PROFIBUS Communication Group A Caution Global Control Messages The Online Operations tab is shown below ixi Monitor Online Operations Close PROFIBUS Communication Global Control Message Help OPERATE gt Command STOP M UNFREEZE J UNSYNC I FREEZE V SYNC CLEAR m Destination OFFLINE IV Group 1 I Group 5 I Group 2 I Group 6 T Group 3 T Group 7 T Group 4 T Group 8 P AllSlaves Transmit These buttons can be used to force the Unit to change its operating mode The four operational modes are e OFF LINE mode e STOP mode e CLEAR mode e OPERATE mode The mode changes are implemented through FINS messages to the Unit s software switches in the CIO Memory Area see section 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n When initiating a mode change it may interfere with attempts from the PLC Program to write to the same software switches Care should be taken to avoid these situations Global Control messages See section 6 6 3 Transmitting Global Control Commands can be initiated by the user from the Online Operations tab The user can select the Global Control commands e Freeze e Unfreeze e Sync e UnSync All commands can be transmitted independent from each other i e all can be send at the same time However their effects are not independent as for example sending Freeze and Unfreeze at the same time results in an Unfreez
139. Tmar TM Proc Tour Toeri ON Tin Slave device Input ON OFF delay Tpg cye PROFIBUS I O data exchange cycle time See Appendix A Bus Parameters TM Proc l O Processing time in the Master Unit Tw Rrt Master request cyclic refresh until actual start of cyclic refresh Tpic cye PLC cycle time See section 6 5 5 PLC Cycle Time Performance TpLc at PLC cyclic refresh time See section 6 5 5 Tout Slave device Output ON OFF delay The total I O response time is the sum of all components Tio Tin 4 T pp cyc 2 T Proc TM Rri 2 TpLC Cyc TPLC Rf Tout 156 I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 Note The calculation assumes the presence of only one Master Unit on the PROFI BUS network Minimum I O Response The minimum response time i e the time from an input on a slave device Time being set to the time the output on the same slave device is set is calculated based on the figure below The following assumptions are made e The slave device is the first one in the PROFIBUS I O data exchange e The input data is available right before the internally generated cyclic refresh request is set In this case a complete cyclic refresh will take place See section 6 5 4 Exchanging I O Data over PROFIBUS Instruction PLC Cycle Execution Instruction Execution Instruction Execution Master Unit processing PROFIBUS Cycle
140. Transmit a Global_ Control command over the PROFIBUS network with specified settings The table below lists the two control words and their description of individual bits Word n n CIO 2000 10 x Machine number Description No exchange of I O data between PLC and remote I O and no processing of mailbox commands will take place A transition from ON to OFF will clear or hold the outputs depending on the value set in DM m 17 Holding remote outputs is only available in asynchronous data exchange mode Unit in normal operation exchange of I O data with PLC and pro cessing of mailbox commands are enabled I O Communication inhibit I O communication is enabled I O communication is disabled A transition from OFF to ON changes the PROFIBUS DP network state from Operate via Clear to Stop All remote outputs will therefore be reset Input Mailbox clear No specific action Each I O refresh one unprocessed response if available is removed from the input mailbox Not Used Issue Control command No control commands are issued Each I O refresh one control command is issued The control command is specified by CIO n 09 13 and the destination is specified by ClO n 1 Not Used Clear_Data Clear_Data bit will not be set in next Global_Control message Set Clear_Data bit in next Global_Control message Clear output data at slave device Unfreeze Unfreeze
141. U e Master Unit I O configuration initialization after which the Master Unit goes to OPERATE e One PROFIBUS DP cycle to request slave diagnostics e One PROFIBUS DP cycle to transmit parameter messages to all slave devices e One PROFIBUS DP cycle to transmit the I O configuration messages to all slave devices e One PROFIBUS DP cycle to request slave diagnostics The average time for the first three actions assuming a maximum I O config uration is approximately 2 seconds The remaining time depends on the PROFIBUS settings For a maximum I O configuration with 125 slave devices 56 words I O each i e the total I O size amounts up to 7000 words one PROFIBUS DP cycle lasts approximately 70 ms A complete start up cycle will then last approxi mately 280 ms The total system start up time from Unit reset until I O data exchange will then be 2 3 seconds Operating the Network Section 6 6 6 6 Operating the Network 6 6 1 User Access to the Network Access to the Unit 1 2 3 N Caution There are several ways through which a user can have access to and control over the PROFIBUS network e Through a PLC user program A PLC user program can set the operational mode of the Unit send Glo bal Control commands read Master and slave status diagnostics infor mation and access the Unit s Error Log Furthermore the I O data transferred between the PROFIBUS network and the PLC memory and can be used by the
142. Unit Operation Manual W349 E2 L MACH No Unit settings area Control and Status Area Error flag Restart flag DM20000 to DM20017 C1O02000 to ClO2004 AR418 00 AR502 00 DM20100 to DM20117 C102010 to ClO2014 AR418 01 AR502 01 DM20200 to DM20217 C102020 to ClO2024 AR418 02 AR502 02 DM20300 to DM20317 C102030 to ClO2034 AR418 03 AR502 03 DM20400 to DM20417 C102040 to ClO2044 AR418 04 AR502 04 DM20500 to DM20517 ClO2050 to ClO2054 AR418 05 AR502 05 DM20600 to DM20617 ClO2060 to ClO2064 AR418 06 AR502 06 DM20700 to DM20717 C102070 to ClO2074 AR418 07 AR502 07 DM20800 to DM20817 ClO02080 to ClO2084 AR418 08 AR502 08 DM20900 to DM20917 C1O02090 to ClO2094 AR418 09 AR502 09 DM21000 to DM21017 C102100 to ClO2104 AR418 10 AR502 10 DM21100 to DM21117 C102110 to ClO2114 AR418 11 AR502 11 DM21200 to DM21217 C102120 to ClO2124 AR418 12 AR502 12 DM21300 to DM21317 C102130 to ClO2134 AR418 13 AR502 13 DM21400 to DM21417 C102140 to ClO2144 AR418 14 AR502 14 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F DM21500 to DM21517 C1102150 to ClO2154 AR418 15 AR502 15 Unit Settings The Unit settings are located in the DM area in the PLC memory The exact location of the block of settings depends on the Machine Number setting
143. Unit can not implement the mode change due to an invalid con figuration the command will be ignored and the Mode command error flag in the Master Status 2 word CIO Word n 6 will be turned ON See also section 4 2 5 Master Status 2 Word n 6 3 Ifthe PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is not in the correct mode i e the Unit is in OFF LINE or STOP mode the Transmit Global Control message com mand will be ignored but the bit will remain ON The command will be sent when the Unit transitions to the correct mode unless the user clears the Bit No error indication will be generated 4 2 2 Global Control Message Word n 2 A PROFIBUS Global Control message can be transmitted by the Unit on user demand to either Global Control Multicast e one or more groups of slave devices allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Command Master Unit Multicast command or Global Control Broadcast e all slave devices allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Broadcast Command command The number of the group to which each slave device belongs is defined in its parameterization message Only the slave devices assigned to the groups to which the Global Control message is addressed will process the command Group Address Setting The group address to send the message to is specified in bit 00 through bit 07 Selecting specific groups of slave devices i e a Multicast command requires setting of one or more bits in this range to ON Selecting all slaves i e a Broadcast comm
144. ach main group 2 Selecting the main group displays all devices in the group Additional DTM In order to obtain more information of a specific DTM right click the DTM in Information the list and from the pop up menu select DTM Information This opens a 54 CX Profibus Section 3 2 window with additional DTM information The figure below provides an exam ple for the CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM xl DTM Info Name Cu1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Vendor OMRON Corporation Version 3 62 Date 2003 1031 Close 3 2 4 Updating the Device Catalogue Updating the Device Catalogue Installing GSD Files Note If a new DTM has been installed it will not automatically be included in the Device Catalogue In order to add newly installed DTMs to the list the Device Catalogue must be updated by selecting the Update button at the bottom of the window Updating the Device Catalogue may take some time depending on the amount of DTMs installed A dialogue window with a progress bar will be shown during the update process After updating the Device Catalogue it will be stored on hard disk The next time CX Profibus is started the updated list will be used The Device Catalogue also allows the installation i e copying of new GSD files into the GSD directory for the Generic Slave Device DTM Selecting the Install GSD Files button displays the standard Windows File selection win dow After selecting the GSD
145. address in to a value which is already occupied will result in an error message Target Rotation The anticipated time for one token cycle including allowances for high and low tert Yes Time priority transactions errors and GAP maintenance Token Rotation Time in ms ms No GAP Update The GAP update factor defines the amount of updates of the active devices i e Yes Factor Master devices list times during one token rotation cycle To update the list the Master device will transmit FDL_Status_request messages to ascending device addresses until it finds a next Master device or until it reaches the Highest Station Address See HSA below Permissible values are in the range of 0 to 255 81 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 Item Description Unit Editable by User Max Retry Limit Maximum number of request transmission retries by this master if a device does not reply to a request Highest Station The HSA defines the Highest Station Address of Master devices on the network Address of which the Master device will request the FDL status when updating the active device list See GAP Update Factor If new slaves are added to the network this field shows the highest device address The Master will periodically check whether new active devices have been added between its own address and the Highest Station Address Permissible values are in the range of 0 to 126 Data Control Time The cycle time in whi
146. allocated slave configuration devices can not exceed 4000 D 3 Error Messages Communication The table below lists the Error messages related to CX Server communication between the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit DTM and the PLC Message Description Correction 50 Communication Failure with Unit The communication between the PC Ensure there are no problems and the Unit on the PLC could not be with the connection between the achieved Personal Computer and the PLC e Ensure the Master Unit has been correctly mounted Refer to sec tion 2 2 Installing the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Units for detailed informa tion e Make sure the Device settings are correct e Perform one of the following suc cessfully to confirm the problem has been solved Download configuration Communication Test in Device Settings tab Update monitoring data Slave Diagnostics clearing error log 225 Configurator Error and Warning Messages Appendix D Number Message Description Correction Communication Failure with PLC The communication between the PC Ensure there are no problems and the PLC could not be achieved with the connection between the Personal Computer and the PLC Make sure the Device Settings are correct When problem has been removed disconnect and re con nect Perform one of the following successfully to confirm the prob lem has been solved Update monitoring data Slave Diagnostics c
147. and requires all bits in this range to be set to OFF The Global Control command flags are specified in the bit 10 through bit 13 106 Allocated CIO Area Words s sSsSsSsSS ction 4 2 Transmitting the message is done by setting the Transmit Global Control message switch bit 04 in CIO Word n see 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 Word n 2 Group select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Unfreeze Freeze Unsync Sync Word n 2 n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number Bit Name Status Controlled Unit operation by Group address Each bit in this range represents one of up to 8 groups of slaves Bits 00 to Bit 07 will be included within the Global Control message as group address indicators If a Group number bit is set the slave devices assigned to this group number will process the Global Control command If a Group number bit is not set the slave devices assigned to this group number will ignore the Global Control command except if none of the Group address bits are set i e Bit 00 to Bit 07 are all set to OFF This selection defines a Broadcast command causing all slave devices allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to process the Global_ Control command Reserved by sys These bits are reser
148. andard The figure and the table below define the format as it is stored in the PLC memory Date month Date year 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 65 43 2 1 0 Word 0 Time ms Word 1 Time min SU Time hrs Word 2 Day wk Day month Month Word 3 Year Note The grey areas in the figure above denote reserved bits which are always set to 0 221 I O Data Conversions Description Milliseconds 0 59999 Appendix C Hours 0 23 Daylight saving time indication 0 Standard time 1 Daylight saving time Minutes 0 59 222 Month of the year 0 12 Day of the month 0 31 Day of the week 0 7 Year 0 99 D 1 Number Appendix D Configurator Error and Warning Messages Warning Messages The table below lists the Warning messages which can be displayed by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit DTM These messages usually indicate that the user is about to perform an action which will have significant impact or an action which is only partly supported by the Unit The user is given a chance to abort the function if the impact is undesirable Message Change the PLC to PROGRAM mode Description In order to start downloading a configuration the PLC must be set to PROGRAM mode to prevent I O data being exchanged with the Unit during the change of the configuration e Yes Change state and
149. ange Slave_Diag Global Control CLEAR Set_Prm Chk_Cfg Data_Exchange Slave_Diag Global Control CLEAR Master Class 1 Slave acy clic services Get_Cfg Set_Slave_Addr Rd_In e Rd Out Not supported Master Class 1 Slave ser vices available to the PLC Global Control initiated from ClO Word Can be addressed to one or all slave devices or a specified group of slaves devices Supported commands SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE CLEAR Global Control initiated from ClO Word Can be addressed to all slave devices or a specified group of slaves devices Supported commands e SYNC e UNSYNC e FREEZE e UNFREEZE Master Master services Not supported Not supported Error reporting Error numbers are transferred to CIO word Internal logging not supported 80 error events can be logged in volatile memory 16 error events can be logged in non volatile memory Errors can be retrieved through FINS mes sages 15 CX Profibus Configurator Section 1 4 1 4 CX Profibus Configurator 1 4 1 CX Profibus Features CX Profibus The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit requires a configuration before it can exchange I O data with the slave devices For this purpose OMRON provides the CX Profibus Configuration program which runs under Microsoft Win dows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Together with CX Profibus OMRON provides three DTM COM Objects e A DTM to configure the CS1 CJ1W PRM2
150. arameter set in CX Profibus and re volatile memory was correct but the contents download the Parameter sets from CX Profibus contains errors preventing the PROFIBUS inter if the problem persists replace the PROFIBUS face to be initialized correctly DP Master Unit Lit Not a valid combination Note 1 The table above assumes that the RUN LED indicator is ON and the ERH indicator is OFF Otherwise refer to section 7 2 2 Unit Start up Errors or section 7 2 3 Unit Operational Errors 2 Ifthe PRM LED indicator is OFF or Flashing the BST COMM and BF LED indicators remain OFF 180 Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators Section 7 2 7 2 5 Network Errors Network errors are errors which occur when attempting to startup a network i e the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has been switched to CLEAR or OPER ATE mode The Unit will parameterize the slave devices and start data exchange An error in this process can be determined by examining the BST COMM and BF LED indicators The error determination procedure uses the table below To determine the error e First find the status of the BST LED indicator left column e Move one column to the right and find the COMM LED indicator status e Move one column to the right and find the BF LED indicator status The probable error causes are then listed to the right of the third column Network Errors BST COMM BF Not lit Not lit Not lit Correction Switch the Unit to
151. are all related to bit flags in the Unit Status Word the Master Status Word 1 the Master Status Word 2 and the Slave Status Word see section 4 2 Allocated CIO Area Words The table below lists combinations of LED indicators with information on pos sible problems 187 Troubleshooting the Network S CS ection 7 4 LED Indicators Description Correction Local Parameter Storage Error An error has occurred when writing the configuration to the non volatile memory Valid Configuration Indicator will To correct this be OFF e Restart the Unit e Re download the configuration e If the problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Local Parameter Load Error An error has occurred when loading the configuration from the non volatile memory Valid Configuration Indicator will t the volatile memory at start up be OFF Most likely causes e A failure or interruption during the writing process e A faulty parameter setting which makes initialization of the PROFIBUS interface not possible To correct this e Check the parameter settings for incorrect values e Restart the Unit e Re download the configuration e If the problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit File read error is ON An error has occurred when loading the configuration from the non volatile memory Valid Configuration Indicator will t0 the volatile memory at start up be OFF Most likely causes e A failure or interruption
152. as each of which can be mapped on to PLC memory The figure below shows the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM s Slave Area tab for an example network with a CJ1W PRT21 a CPM1A PRT21 and an F150 PRT Vision system wt 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Configuration I 0 x Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area Output Allocation Input Allocation Addr Index Device 2 1 CJTW PRT21 1 words output 1 Word D00000 2 2 words output 2 Word D00100 3 4 words output 4 Word D00102 4 8 words output 8 Word D00001 3 1 CPM14 PRT21 2 bytes output No consis 2 Byte D00106 10 1 F150 PRT 1 words output 1 Word D00009 i Dutput Area 1 Output Area 2 D Module Name la 00000 2 1 words output 2 2 words output 00001 2 8 words output 00101 2 words output 00002 8 words output 00102 2 4words output 00003 8 words output 100103 4 words output 00004 8 words output 100104 4 words output 00005 8 words output 00105 4 words output 00006 8 words output 00106 3 2bytes output No consiste 00007 8 words output 00107 00008 8 words output 00108 00009 10 1 words output z 00109 xl Area JDM T Occupied 00010 Words Area DM v Occupied 00007 Words Start Address jo Start Address 100 Length 100 Length 100 By default all Output data is mapped on to Output Area 1 and all Input data is mapped on to Input Area 1 Each of these Ar
153. as set prior to power up on the front of the Unit using the rotary switch The Unit settings define e the I O mapping areas and the mapping of the slave status data e the data exchange procedure synchronous or asynchronous e the Units behaviour in case of a fatal PLC error CLEAR or HOLD outputs The Unit can be operated in a default mode i e all DM settings set to 0000 The table below lists the contents of the Unit settings 233 C200HW PRM21 Notes Function Number of output data areas Appendix G Word m m DM 20000 100 x Machine number Description Default mapping PLC addresses CIO0050 to ClO0099 are mapped to Unit output buffer bytes 000 to 099 0001 One user defined output data area DM word m 1 m 2 and m 3 define the first area 0002 Two user defined output data areas DM word m 4 m 5 and m 6 define the second area Other Default mapping see 0000 Output Area 1 Start address in the Unit output buffer 0000 to 0510 Byte 000 510 even in output buffer of the Unit Other Setting error output area is ignored See Note 1 Output Area 1 Start address in the Unit output buffer 0000 to 5999 D00000 D05999 A000 to A235 ClO0000 ClO0235 A300 to A511 ClO0300 ClO0511 B000 to B099 HROOO HR099 C000 to C063 ClO1000 ClO1063 Other Setting error output area is ignored See Note 1 Output Area 1 Size 0000 to
154. aster DTM Section 3 3 Note 2 Left click the module and drag it while holding the Left mouse button to the desired Area This can be the end of the list or any empty space in the list in which it will fit see Note 3 Release the mouse button The module data is copied in the desired Area and appended to the already existing list The same entry in the other list is now deleted 4 Finally the PLC memory address to which the module is mapped is now updated in the module list 1 If Auto Addressing is enabled see Master Setup tab in this section any empty spaces evolving out of moving of modules to another Area will be removed by compressing the list Modules located to a higher address will be moved to a lower address to fill up the gap 2 If Auto Addressing is disabled compressing the list can be accomplished by pressing the Compress button after all modifications to the mapping have been made 3 3 2 Diagnostics User Interface Diagnostics User Interface Opening the DTM Diagnostics User Interface 70 1 2 3 The PROFIBUS DP Master DTM provides a second user interface to display the Diagnostics information available in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit This information concerns e Unit and PROFIBUS DP Interface status flags e Slave status flags and common slave diagnostics e The Unit s Error Log Furthermore the Diagnostics User Interface allows changing the Master s PROFIBUS operational mode and the tran
155. atal error has occurred in the Unit s pro gram The appropriate error code is stored in the error log error Restart the CPU Unit If the problem per sists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Lit Not lit Not a valid combination during operation Lit Not a valid combination during operation Not lit Not lit Unit is functionally correct If there are still problems proceed to check on the other LED indicators Lit A write verify check failed while writing the error log to the non volatile memory Send a ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS com mand to the Unit Restart the Unit A write verify check failed while writing the new configuration to the non volatile memory Check the Parameter set in CX Profibus and re download the Parameter sets from CX Profibus If the problem persists replace the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit Not Lit Memory in the CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem per sists replace the CPU Unit The CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem per sists replace the CPU Unit A cyclic Monitor time out has occurred i e a timeout on exchange of data between the Unit and the PLC CPU Restart the CPU Unit If the problem per sists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Not a valid combination during operation Note If operational errors prevent the Unit from functioning correctly the PRM BST COM
156. atically in case one of the slave devices fails on the network The purpose of this is to force the PROFIBUS network to a safe state When in CLEAR mode the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will read each slave s input data but not send output data Depending on the slave device the Mas ter will instead send either empty output data messages or output data mes sages containing all zeros The Auto CLEAR function can only be enabled through CX Profibus The controls to enable it can be found in the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Master Setup tab see section 6 4 1 Setting the Master Parameters The Auto CLEAR function will only be active if the Master Unit has been switched to OPERATE mode An automatic transition to CLEAR mode will take place in the following situa tions 1 During network startup at least one slave device rejects its parameter or I O configuration message or fails to respond All slave devices which have already reached data exchange with the Master will be switched to CLEAR mode again Also slave device which remain in not ready state during a time period which exceeds the Data Control Time See section 6 4 2 Set ting the Bus Parameters will cause the Master Unit to switch to CLEAR mode 2 After successful network start up there is no I O data exchange with at least one slave device for a period of time which exceeds the Data Control Time 1 Slave devices which have either been disabled in the Master Unit or slave
157. ation Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area Output Allocation Input Allocation addr Index Device Module Size Type Aa 2 1 CJ1W PRT21 1 words output 1 Word CI03200 2 4 words output 4 word CI03201 3 1 CPM1A PRAT21 2 bytes output No consis 2 Byte C103205 4 1 F150 PRT 1 words output 1 Word CI03206 Zj Output Area 1 Output Area 2 ClO __ Module Name 3200 2 1 words output 3201 2 4 words output 3202 4 words output 3203 4 words output 3204 4 words output 3205 3 2 bytes output No consiste 3206 4 1 words output 3207 3208 3209 zl Initial I O configuration mti 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Configuration Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area Output Allocation Input Allocation Ador Index Device Module Size Type Ads 2 1 CJ1W PRT21 1 words output 1 Word CI03400 2 4 Word Cl03200 1 CPM1A PRT21 es output No consis 4 1 F150 PRT 1 words output 1 Word CI03204 i Output Area 1 r Output Area 2 Cio Module Name a Module Name a 3200 2 4 words output 3400 2 1 words output 3201 4 words output 3401 3 2 bytes output No consiste 3202 4 words output 3402 3203 4 words output 3403 3204 4 1 words output 3404 3205 3405 3206 3406 3207 3407 3208 3408 3203 Ea 3403 zi The first Output modules of slave device 2 and 3 were moved to Output area 2 148 I O Communication Characteristics Secti
158. ation x Setup will install CX Server in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder You can choose not to install CX Server by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Folder ciroen Files 0OMRONSCX Server Browse 19 Next the user is prompted to select the additional driver software for CX Server None of these additional drivers are required to accomplish serial communication between the PC and the PLC CPU Whether or not to in 46 Installation Section 3 1 stall additional components depends on hardware installed on your PC Press the Next button to continue The installation will now be performed Install FinsGateway NSB Support x CX Server will install support for all types of Serial Modem and Ethernet connections Additional support is available for OMRON NSB connections Select from the options listed below art J SYSMAC LINK NSB Support F SYSMAC NET NSB Support SYSMAC ISA Board Support J CS1 PCI Board Support J CS1 Bus Interface Board Support lt Back Next gt Cancel 20 After completing the installation a notification will be displayed allowing the user to view the CX Server release notes Press the Finish button when donw Setup Complete Setup can launch the Release Notes file if selected below Click Finish to Complete CX Server Setup
159. aves often apply parameters related to a specific I O module e g the physical slave device consist of a number of hardware modules each defining an amount of I O data requiring its I O module selection and requiring its own parameters Example The Parameter tab of the CJU1W PRT21 is shown in the figure below It lists the common parameters for the CJ1W PRT21 lolx Device CJ1W PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number Ox0602 Configuration Parameter Group Module i Common hd Parameters Fail Safe support ON default Watchdog Base 10 ms default Output data on PROFIBUS fail Reset to 0 default Output data format Output to slave PLC area cio area CIO xxxx x Output area start address Fin Action on slave PLC PROGRAM mode Action on slave PLC 1 0 bus fail Data Memory Dxxxxx Work area Wx Input data format Holding area feel Input from slave PLC area Input area start address 00032 Slave PLC status indication PROFIBUS diagnostics only I Decimal values OK Cancel Apply Help In the figure above the parameter captions are listed in the left column and the options can be set in the right column In order to change settings double click the required parameter row with the left mouse button Depending on the parameter type either a drop down lists will become available for selection or a value can be entered Example In the figure above the parameter settin
160. be turned to ON if an error has been detected in the contents of the Parameters set while configuring the PROFIBUS interface using these parameters If the bit flags have been cleared the Unit will reset this bit to OFF Reserved by sys tem These bits will be set to OFF by the Unit 4 2 6 Slave Status Word n 7 The Slave Status word collects all the information on the slave devices allo cated to the Unit Master It summarizes the slave information of the Slave Data_Exchange Active flags see 4 2 8 Slave Data_Exchange Active Flags Word n 9 to Word n 16 and the Slave New Diagnostics flags see 4 2 9 Slave New Diagnostics Flags Word n 17 to Word n 24 Word n 7 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 Slaves in data exchange Slave diagnostics received Word n 7 n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number Bit Name All slaves in Data_Exchange mode Status Controlled by Unit operation All slave devices which are allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit are and enabled are in Data_Exchange with the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit All slaves which are in Data exchange are indicated in CIO Word n 9 to n 16 see 4 2 8 Slave Data_Exchange Active Flags Word n 9 to Word n 16 When turned OFF this bit indicates that at least one slave device is not in Data_Exchange with the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Reserved by sys tem Thes
161. c functions and communication profiles This streamlined architecture ensures fast and efficient data transmission The application functions which are available to the user as well as the system and device behaviour of the various PROFI BUS DP device types are specified in the user interface RS 485 transmission technology or fibre optics are available for transmission RS 485 transmission is the most frequently used transmission technology Its application area includes all areas in which high transmission speed and sim ple inexpensive installation are required PROFIBUS modules are intercon nected by single twisted pair shielded copper wires The RS 485 transmission technology is very easy to handle Installation of the twisted pair cable does not require expert knowledge The bus structure per mits addition and removal of devices or step by step commissioning of the system without influencing the other devices Later expansions have no effect on devices which are already in operation Transmission speeds between 9 6 kbit s and 12 Mbit s can be selected as shown in the table below One unique transmission speed must selected for all devices on the bus when the system is commissioned Baud rate kbit s Distance segment m The maximum cable length values depend on the transmission speed and are based on type A cable see Cable Type on page 35 The length can be increased by the use of repeaters Howe
162. c generation of project documentation upon command of the user The documentation is generated in HTML format and can cover either single DTMs or the whole project After generation of the HTML document it will automatically launch the default Internet browser to display the result Exporting the project information to HTML can be achieved in two ways e Select the main menu File Export Project as HTML option A window will pop up displaying the progress of the export process e select Export to HTML option from the context menu First select the project level in the Network window then right click the mouse to display the context menu A window will pop up displaying the progress of the export process CX Profibus Section 3 2 Exporting DTM Information to HTML 1 2 3 After exporting the information the default browser is launched showing the result of the export process Links are available to open the information pages for the individual DTMs The extent of the information made available depends on the individual DTMs This can range from device type and version information up to all set tings and selections made for the device Exporting single DTM information to HTML is achieved by the following sequence 1 Select the DTM in the network window 2 Right click the mouse to bring up the context menu 3 Select the Export to HTML option from the context menu A window will pop up displaying the progress of the
163. can use these same means to detect new errors in the Error Log as well as read and clear them Refer to sections 5 2 5 ERROR LOG READ 2102 and 5 2 6 ERROR LOG CLEAR 0203 for details on FINS commands SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance This section describes the troubleshooting procedures and maintenance operations for the CS 1 CJ1W PRM21 needed to keep the PROFIBUS network optimally working 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 OVERVIEW Sse 3 eGR Se EHR Ege Mee e SSCP Bleek S ewe BE whe Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators 722 1 LED Indicators oane rea couse ake eee eke eee E 7 2 2 Unit Start up Errors 0 000 000 2 7 2 3 Unit Operational Errors 00 000 000005 7 2 4 Unit Configuration Errors 0 000000005 7 2 9 Network Errors erme io ed oe WERE GG Troubleshooting Using Error Status 00 0 7 3 1 Unit Status Word 0 00 0 eee 7 3 2 Master Status 2 Word 0 00 00 02 rerne Troubleshooting the Network 0 0 cece eee eee 7 4 1 Troubleshooting Parameter Download 7 4 2 Troubleshooting the Network using CX Profibus 7 4 3 Troubleshooting I O Communication Troubleshooting Using the Error Log 7 5 1 Error Log Overview 0 0 0 00 cece eee eee T52 Error CodeS ehh sled ead sek Bd a eaa ae Mee tice Troubleshooting FINS Commands
164. cess Control and User Management The FDT Standard defines four access levels and two attributes for FDT Con tainer applications which can be used to restrict access to the program or certain features thereof for unauthorized personnel The actual use of the restrictions also depends on the application CX Profibus implements the four levels as well as one of the attributes These levels are listed below e Observer e Operator e Maintenance e Planning Engineer e Administrator The access rights per level are defined in the table below Function Observer Operator Maintenance Planning Administrator Engineer New file Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Open file Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Save File Not allowed Not allowed Not Allowed Allowed Allowed Save As Not allowed Not allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Properties View only View only Edit Edit Edit Export to HTML Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Open Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Add GSD files Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Allowed Allowed Update Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Allowed Allowed Project File Catalogue access Device Open Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Master settings View only View only Edit Edit Edit Communication View only View only Edit Edit Edit settings Go online Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Monitoring Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Change state a
165. ch the master updates its Data Transfer List in which it keeps an overview of all slave states Data Control Time is based on the Watchdog time Twp Data Control Time 6 Twp Min Slave Interval The Minimum Slave Interval defines the poll cycle i e the minimum time between two consecutive Data_Exchange Cycles to the same slave device The Minimum Slave Interval must be smaller than the Target Rotation Time Watchdog Control Override slave specific Watchdog control time This setting when selected allows the user to set one Watchdog Control Time for the whole network and override the Watchdog Control Time provided by the Slave DTM The Watchdog Control Time defines the time for a slave device to set its outputs to a fail safe state if during that time no communication between the Master device and that slave device was detected The Watchdog is automatically set for all configured slaves based on the value of Typ Calculated Timing The Calculated Timing is the time that the Sender spends at idle after the receipt of the last Bit of a telegram on the Bus until the first Bit of a new telegram is sent on the Bus These values are calculated by the DTM and only displayed for information purposes Auto Clear ON When selected the Unit transitions to the CLEAR mode in the event of a network error e g because one or more configured slaves are not in the Data Exchange mode Adjusting Bus Parameters If t
166. clamp or similar device The cable shield should continue in the cabinet right up to the PROFIBUS device Ground Rail Ensure that the PLC and the control cabinet in which it is mounted have the same ground potential by providing a large area metallic contact to ground e g galvanized steel to ensure a good electrical connection Grounding rails should not be attached to painted surfaces Inside cabinet For further information regarding PROFIBUS network installation please refer to Installation Guideline for PROFIBUS DP FMS PNO Order No 2 112 which is available at every regional PROFIBUS Organization The information covers Outside cabinet e Commissioning of PROFIBUS equipment e Testing the PROFIBUS cable and bus connectors e Determining loop resistance e Testing for correct bus termination e Determining the segment length and cable route e Other test methods e Example of an equipment report in the PROFIBUS guideline 2 5 Defining PROFIBUS DP in the Software Defining the Configuration After making the physical connections of the network the configuration then has to be defined in the software OMRON provides a dedicated PC based configuration program called CX Profibus as well as the required DTMs for this purpose It must be used to e Define the master s e Assign slaves to their respective master s e Assign slaves to groups for broadcast multicast messages e Enter bus parameters e g baud rate targ
167. clicking the mouse From the context menu select Configuration The Master DTM Configuration User Interface which is displayed in the CX Profibus DTM window is shown below tat 1 C200HW PRM21 Configuration 5 x Bus Parameters Address Table Profile m Bus Parameters Baud Rate 1500 kBit s 7 Station Address m Slot Time w tBit Target Rotation Time A 11894 tBit Min Station Delay Time foo tBit a 7 9293 ms Max Station Delay Time 150 tBit GAP Actualization Factor w Quiet Time o tBit Max Retry Limit l Setup Time T Bt Highest Station Address HSA 126 Bus Monitoring Data Control Time 1200 ms Override slave specific Watchdog Control Time Min Slave Interval 2000 ps Watchdog Control Time a ms ees i Bit T Auto Clear ON ieee el a eel OK Cancel Help Master DTM Configuration The Master DTM Configuration User Interface consist of two tabbed windows User Interface e Bus Parameters tab e Address Table tab The two tabbed windows are discussed below 79 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 Configuration Interface Buttons The Master DTM Configuration User Interface contains four general buttons They are listed in the table below together with the action taken when press ing them OK Evaluate and save the changes made if any and close the user interface Note If any invalid settings have been made a warnin
168. cribed at the end of the command description 5 2 1 MEMORY AREA READ 0101 Command Format Response Format 120 The MEMORY AREA READ command is used to the last diagnostics data message the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit received from the specified slave device The command frame requires three byte data type specifier specify ing the information and one byte specifying the slave device address The number of items to read must be 244 the maximum data size of the PROFIBUS DP diagnostics message or less 01 01 81 FF 00 _ o Command Data specifier No of items code binary Slave station address 01 01 Command End code Diagnostics data code for number of items Command Response Reference Section 5 2 Parameters Response Codes 5 2 2 RUN 0401 Command Format Response Format Parameters Data specifier code command Defines the data to be retrieved from the Unit Always set to 81 FF 00 Hex Slave device address command Defines the slave device network address Set to 00 7D Hex Number of items to read command Defines the number of bytes to read Set to 1 F4 Hex The following end codes can be returned by the Unit in response to the RUN command 0000 Normal 0203 Slave device not allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master 0402 Service not supported by Unit model version 1001 Com
169. ct any CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit failures This programs specifically covers failures due to faulty bus parameters set by the user F 2 Application Note Background The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM allows the user to change certain bus parameter in order to further opti mize the PROFIBUS network performance The risk however in doing this is that certain combinations may lead to failures in the communication either direct or at a later point in time The direct result of this failure is that communication between the Master Unit and the PLC CPU the PLC I O refresh cycle will take longer than anticipated A ladder program can now be used to detect this if the application warrants this safety measure It relies on the fact that non used software switches see section 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n when set by the user program are always reset by the Master Unit F 3 Application Program The ladder program as shown in the figure below will regularly set switch number 15 in the Software Switches 1 word CIO Word n where n in the example is 1500 and start a counter The counter will count the amount of PLC I O refresh cycles before the Master Unit resets the switch If the counter reaches the maximum value e g 40 as in the example ladder program without the switch being reset a PLC error will be generated The counter must be configured by the user and depends on the PROFIBUS cycle The longer that cycle is the lon
170. ct human life You must consult your OMRON repre sentative before using a PLC System in the above mentioned applications Safety Precautions Z WARNING Z WARNING N WARNING N WARNING ZN Caution Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Never touch any of the terminals while power is being supplied Doing so may result in serious electrical shock or electrocution Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or immedi ately after power has been turned OFF Doing so may result in electric shock Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the torque specified in the operation manual Loose screws may result in burning or malfunction Operating Environment Precautions 4 N WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I O even when the program is stopped i e even in N WARNING PROGRAM mode Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the status of any part of memory allocated to I O Units Special I O Units or CPU Bus Units Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unex pected operation of the loads connected to the Unit Any of the following oper ation may result in changes to memory status e Transferring I O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Pr
171. ction e DP slave related specifications This section contains all specification related to slaves e g minimum time between two slave poll cycles specification of the inputs and outputs and consistency of the I O data DTM versus GSD File When comparing the two configuration technologies a GSD file only provides information on the device characteristics and configuration options It has no GUI of its own nor can it connect to the device itself A GSD file always requires a separate configurator program to interpret the data In the FDT DTM concept all these device related functions are included in the DTM The DTM can be executed from any program which provides FDT interfaces 1 3 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 1 3 1 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Features PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is a CPU Bus Unit which can be installed on a CS1 CJ1 PLC System There are two available models of the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit the CS1W PRM21 for connection to a CS1 PLC System and the CJ1W PRM21 for connection to a CU1 PLC System Both models provide identical functionality CPU Bus Unit A total of up to 16 CPU Bus Units can be mounted on the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack The total of 16 must include all PROFIBUS DP Master Units and all other CPU Bus Units Unit Control and Status Up to 25 words of control and status words are exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and a dedicated CIO memory area of which the location is related to
172. ctions e CIO Word n 3 is reserved for future extension of data to be transferred to the Unit These words are reserved for future use and it is therefore not recommended to use them for temporary data storage by a user program The Unit will ignore the bits in these words and consequently not change them i e the Unit will not set the bits to OFF The other CIO Words are explained in the fol lowing sections Allocated CIO Area Words s s s sSsSsSsSsSS ec ton 4 2 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n All the switches of Software Switch 1 execute a function when turned ON by the user in any PLC mode The Unit will turn the switch to OFF after the command has been executed All flags are set to OFF at Power ON Reset The Unit state is not restored after a Power Down of the Unit Note If multiple bits in the range of Bit 00 to 03 are set simultaneously the com mand is ignored the bits are set to OFF again and the Mode command error flag in Master status 2 word is set see 4 2 5 Master Status 2 Word n 6 1514131211109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 Word n OPERATE mode STOP mode CLEAR mode OFFLINE mode Transmit Global Control message Clear new diagnostics flags Word n n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number Status Controlled Unit operation by Switch Master to Switches the Unit to the OPERATE mode If the Unit is alrea
173. ctor is fixed to 1 Poll Timeout The maximum time interval that this master device may need for the execution of a master master function Data Control Time The cycle time in which the master updates its Data Transfer List in which it keeps an overview of all slave states Data Control Time is based on the Watchdog time Twp Data Control Time 7 Twp Watchdog Control Slave Area Tab The Watchdog Control Time defines the time for a slave device to set its outputs to a fail safe state if during that time no communication between the Master device and that slave device was detected The Watchdog is automatically set for all configured slaves based on the value of Typ The Slave Area tab displays the mapping of the I O data from to the allocated slave devices on to the PLC memory areas The mapping can be made auto matically but can also be changed by the user before downloading The Slave Area tab is shown below Only the Output Allocation tab is shown wt 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Configuration Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area Output Allocation Input Allocation aao Indes Device Mere __ Ste Tee aces 1 CJ1W PRT21 1 words output 1 Word CI03200 2 2 words output 2 Word CI03201 3 4 words output 4 Word CI03203 4 8 words output 8 Word CI03207 1 COMA PRT 21 2 bytes output No consis 2 Byte CIlO3400 Ee 1 words output i Output Area 1 Out
174. d 3 Troubleshooting CS1 CJ1 PRM21 Master Unit 176 CX Profibus 176 Error codes 197 Error log 196 Adding records 196 Clearing 196 Error log location 196 Error log records 196 Logged errors 196 Reading Error log 196 Error status 183 CIO words 183 Unit status word 183 FINS Commands 198 LED indicators using 177 Network CS1 CJ1W PRM21 DTM 187 CX Profibus using 187 I O communication 192 LED indicators using 181 Slave devices 189 Overview 176 PROFIBUS network 176 Unit configuration LED indicators using 180 Unit operational errors LED indicators using 179 Unit startup LED indicators using 177 U Unit number CPU Bus Unit allocations 26 Setting 26 See also CS1 CJ1W PRM21 DTM Unit replacement 200 Precautions 200 Replacing PROFIBUS Units 200 Index Unit setup 200 V W vibration resistance 11 Warning messages 223 Watchdog control See Bus parameters Wiring Bus connector 36 Bus termination 35 Inductors 36 Resistors 35 Cable length 3 Cable shield connection 37 245 Index 246 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W409 E2 02 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision The page numbers of a revision refer to the previous version Revision Code Revised Content March 24 2004 Initial version February 14 2005 Page ix
175. d the selection options either the field can be edited directly or a drop down list with options will appear The parameter settings must be performed carefully In general the slave device will reject the parameter message if it contains any faulty parameter Consequently the slave device will not reach I O data exchange with the PROFIBUS DP Master The parameter values are by default displayed in Hexadecimal format By checking the check box at the bottom the values are converted to decimal values 91 Generic Slave Device DTM CS ection 3 5 Group Tab In the Group tab the user can define to which group the slave device will belong This group definition is used to define multi cast groups of slave device to which a Global Control message can be transmitted The window is shown below Selecting the Groups The user can check the check boxes for each group the slave device will belong to The group setting is transferred to the slave device as part of the parameter message io xi Device CJ1W PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number 00602 Configuration Parameter Group i I Group 5 Group 2 T Group 6 I Group 3 I Group 7 I Group 4 I Group 8 The three tabbed windows discussed above allow for making all the standard PROFIBUS DP settings for a slave device For slave devices supporting PROFIBUS DPV1 two additional tabbed windows will show up These tabbed windows will appear if the G
176. data for which it has been configured The OPERATE mode is the mode used for normal network operation The CLEAR mode is the mode used for situations which require a safety state to fall back to see section 6 6 4 Using Auto CLEAR In order to change the Unit s operational mode open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface The figure below shows this Online Operations tab Press the desired mode button in the upper left corner of the window Freie Monitor Online Operations Close PROFIBUS Communication m Global Control Message Help OPERATE Command STOP M UNFREEZE J UNSYNC I FREEZE IV SYNC CLEAR Destination OFFLINE N Group 1 T Group 5 I Group 2 T Group 6 I Group 3 I Group T Group 4 l Group 8 P AllSlaves Transmit In order to change the network to OPERATE mode i e start I O data exchange press the OPERATE button The OPERATE status of the Master Unit can be retrieved from the Monitor Master status tab in the same user interface The Unit s operational mode can also be changed from the PLC user pro gram by setting the appropriate bit in the Software Switches 1 Word CIO Word n see section 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n Operating the Network Section 6 6 Example Below is an example ladder program which changes the operational mode to OPERATE if the current mode is not OPERATE and non of the other mode switches are set The unit number for the example U
177. ddress which reported an error The error is specified in the Error Event field Error Event Station Error The Error Event field displays the error which occurred during communication between the master unit and the slave device as specified in the Station Address field Connected 86 When set to ON this LED indicates that the C200HW PRM21 DTM is online and exchanging data with the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master unit C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 3 4 3 Connecting to the C200HW PRM21 Configuring Communication 1 2 3 For the purpose of downloading a configuration as well as monitoring the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM uses a dedicated serial driver to connect to the Unit through one of the serial ports on the PC To setup this driver for communication to the Unit perform the following procedure Open the device s context menu by e Selecting the C200HW PRM21 Master DTM in the Network Window and clicking the right mouse button e Selecting the C200HW PRM21 Master DTM in the Network Window and from the main menu selecting Device From the context menu select Additional Functions Device Assign ment The driver window will open in the DTM Window as shown below Device Assignment CIF Serial Driver r Driver Description Device Driver OF Serial Driver m Board Selection Name Type Version Date Error ren O o E o meco rem2z e Co
178. del Applicable PLC Types of communications Model number CS Series CPU Bus Unit e Remote I O communications master CS1W PRM21 CJ Series CJ1W PRM21 General Specifications General specifications of the CS CJ series PROFIBUS DP Master Units con form to the general specifications for the SYSMAC CS CJ series CPU Units 10 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Section 1 3 Functional Specifications Item Specification Installation PROFIBUS DP Master Unit types CS1W PRM21 CJ1W PRM21 Applicable PLC series CS series CJ series Mounting position e CPU Rack e CPU Rack e CS Expansion Rack Excluding CJ1 Expansion Rack a C200H Expansion I O Rack or SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack e CS1D Duplex Unit classification CPU Bus Unit Applicable unit numbers 0 to F Hex Maximum number of Units per PLC 16 Current consumption 400 mA max at 5 Vdc Dimensions W x H x D 35 x 130 x 101 mm 31 x 90 x65 mm Weight 187g typical 100g typical w c oO Z e A S W Ambient temperatures Operating temperature 0 to 55 C Storage temperature 20 to 75 C Ambient operating humidity 10 to 90 with no condensation Vibration resistance Conforms to IEC60068 2 6 test Fc 10 to 54 8Hz 0 25 mm amplitude 54 8 to 300Hz acceleration 29 4 m s in X Y and Z directions for 120 minutes each Total time 12 linear sweeps x 10 minutes sweep 12
179. download configura tion e No Stop download When occurring At the start of download ing in case the PLC is in RUN MONITOR mode DPV1 Slave slaves is assigned to master DPV1 slaves are not fully supported The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit supports only basic DPVO functions This means that the DPV1 slave can still be operated but the DPV1 func tionality is not possible e OK Close message box At the start of download ing in case one of the slaves is a DPV1 slave Return the PLC to mode mode After download with PLC previously in RUN or MONITOR the PLC can be returned to RUN or MONITOR mode e Yes Change state e No PLC remains in PROGRAM mode e Cancel PLC remains in PROGRAM mode After completing the download PROFIBUS I O Data area over lapping and or exceeding mem ory range Save anyway One or more of the I O Data mappings is incor rect Either the I O data or a part of the I O data is mapped beyond an existing memory area or two or more mappings are overlapping in mem ory e Yes Save settings e No Do not save settings e Cancel Do not save settings Closing the Configura tion User Interface with invalid configuration or saving invalid settings Settings have been changed Would you like to save One or more settings have been changed but not yet saved e Yes Save data and close DTM e No Do not save data and close DTM e Cancel Do not close the DTM Closing
180. dress in program Restart the CPU Unit If the prob lem persists replace the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit CPU Bus Unit memory error Note 1 02 Network Parameter 06 Error log 01 Read error 02 Write error Restart the CPU Unit If the prob lem persists replace the PROFI BUS Master Unit The time information from the CPU Unit is used in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit An error record is not created in non volatile memory when the error con cerns an Error Log Write error 197 Troubleshooting FINS Commands Section76 7 6 Troubleshooting FINS Commands Any problems in FINS communications can be determined using the response codes when the CMND 490 instruction has been used The table below lists response codes returned by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit after execution of FINS commands the probable cause of errors and recom mended remedies Refer to the Communications Commands Reference Man ual W342 for further information on response codes Main code Probable cause Correction 00 No errors 02 Remote node A FINS command was sent to read write Specify only addresses of allocated slaves in error specific slave data or to control a slave the FINS command but the specified slave is not allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 04 Service not A FINS command which is not supported Check the command code and be sure the supported by the Unit Model has been sent com
181. dy in this OPERATE mode mode no action will be taken In OPERATE mode the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will parameterize all allocated slave devices and commence I O Data Exchange See Note 1 and 2 If the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has entered the OPERATE mode the Unit will set this bit to OFF again Switch Master to Switches the Unit to the STOP mode If the Unit is already in this mode STOP mode no action will be taken In STOP mode the Unit will be online connected to the network but not communicate with its slave devices See Note 1 and 2 If the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has entered the STOP mode the Unit will set this bit to OFF again Switch Master to Switches the Unit to the CLEAR mode If the Unit is already in this CLEAR mode mode no action will be taken In CLEAR mode the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will parameterize all allocated slave devices and it will read the input data of the slave devices but it will send zeros or empty output messages to slave devices See Note 1 and 2 If the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has entered the CLEAR mode the Unit will set this bit to OFF again Switch Master to Switches the Unit to the OFF LINE mode If the Unit is already in this OFF LINE mode mode no action will be taken In the OFF LINE mode the Unit will be disconnected from the network See Note 1 and 2 If the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has entered the OFF LINE mode the Unit will set this bit to OFF again
182. e Any existing overlap in the allocated PLC memory areas e Availability of EM banks should any of the I O Areas be mapped to one of the EM Banks Availability of the EM banks depends on the PLC CPU type Anyone of these errors will abort the download process without conse quences for the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The error messages associated with these failures are listed in Appendix D 2 Error Messages Configuration The list also provides remedies If no errors occurred during the checking phase the Master DTM will try to establish communication with the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit through CX Server If this fails an error message will be displayed indi cating a communication problem see Appendix D 3 Error Messages Com munication A failure to establish communication prior to download will have no consequences for the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The list provided in Appendix D 3 Error Messages Communication also pro vides possible remedies If none of the first two processes result in a failure downloading will com mence As soon as downloading has started the data in the volatile memory of the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will be overwritten If a failure occurs during the download process which prevents the Master DTM from completing the process the user must restart the Unit manually Restarting the Master Unit will abort the download process in the Master Unit and recover
183. e CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface may interfere with a PLC user program running at the same time This can result in unexpected behaviour It is recommended to change the PLC CPU mode to PROGRAM mode to avoid this interference during the use of the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User interface 159 Operating the Network Section 6 6 6 6 2 Changing PROFIBUS Mode of the Master Unit PROFIBUS DP Network Modes Normal Operating Modes Changing the Mode from the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Example Changing the Mode Using the PLC Program 160 The PROFIBUS standard defines four different network modes in which a Master Unit can operate The modes are e OFFLINE The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit does not access the network nor does it respond to messages e STOP The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is on line but does not communicate with its slave devices It does communicate with other Master Units in that it passes the token message e CLEAR The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is on line and communicates with its slave devices It will parameterize all allocated slave devices but only read their input data The Master Unit does not send valid output data to the slave devices Instead it will send empty output data messages or messages containing zeros OPERATE The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is on line and communicates with its slave devices It will parameterize all allocated slave devices and exchange all I O
184. e Slave_User_data part of the slave parameter set When adding a slave PROFIBUS slave parameter set _ will not be used The additional user parameters DTM to the network will be ignored See slave no in the slave parameter set are not supported by which defines additional name the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit user parameters Note no slave address e OK Close message box name slave DTM name Auto addressing will reallocate When selecting the Auto Addressing check box When checking the slave I O mapping Would you like in the Master Setup tab all slave I O data map Auto Addressing check to proceed pings will be compressed in each of the I O map box on the Master Setup pings The slave I O mapping will be changed tab e Yes Update slave I O module mapping and check checkbox e No Do not update slave I O module map ping and uncheck checkbox D 2 Error Messages Configuration The table below lists the Error messages which can be displayed by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit DTM in case there are configuration errors Usually these are detected either when entering or up on download The table suggests corrections to the problems in the right most column Message Description Correction Total I O area size exceeds maxi The I O configuration exceeds the Change configuration to reduce the mum maximum limit of 7168 or 7k amount of I O data to 7168 words words maximum or less PROFIBUS I O Data
185. e bits are reserved for future use and are always set to OFF by the Unit 113 Allocated CIO Area Words ss lt sSsSSSsSS tion 4 2 Bit Name Status Controlled Unit operation by New slave diagnos At least one of the slave devices allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Mas tics received ter Unit indicates that new Diagnostics data is available The slaves which indicates this data are indicated in CIO Word n 17 to n 19 see 4 2 9 Slave New Diagnostics Flags Word n 17 to Word n 24 When turned OFF this bit indicates that none of the slave device has returned new diagnostics messages since the last time the flags were cleared Reserved by sys These bits are reserved for future use and are always set to OFF by the tem Unit 4 2 7 Actual Bus Cycle Time Word n 8 The actual bus cycle time word indicates the current bus cycle time expressed in BCD in 0 1 ms units The maximum value is therefore 999 9 ms Values larger than 999 9 ms are set at 9999 4 2 8 Slave Data_Exchange Active Flags Word n 9 to Word n 16 The Slave Data_Exchange Active flags indicate for each slave device if it is in Data_Exchange mode with the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The flags are allocated to a block of eight ClO words and each bit in the block corresponds to a device address 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 Word n 9 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 1 0 Slave station 00 15 Word n 10 31 3
186. e command at the slaves 75 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Selecting the Groups Transmit Global Control Command A Caution Specific groups to send the Global Control command to can be defined by selecting the appropriate checkbox Selecting the All Slaves checkbox can will disable the individual check boxes and result in a Global Control com mand to all slave devices In order to transmit the Global Control press the Transmit button The com mand will be transmitted only once Both the Global Control command con tents group select and the transmit command are transferred to the Unit through its CIO words see section 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n and section 4 2 2 Global Control Message Word n 2 When transmitting a Global Control command it may interfere with attempts from the PLC Program to write to the same software switches Care should be taken to avoid these situations 3 3 3 Connecting to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Configuring Communication 1 2 3 CX Server Configuring CX Server 1 2 3 76 The PROFIBUS DP Master DTM uses CX Server to connect to the Unit for both downloading a configuration as well as monitoring the Master Unit To setup the communication to the Unit perform the following procedure 1 Open the Master DTM Configuration Interface Device Setup tab see sec tion 3 3 1 Configuration User Interface 2 Select the Unit Number It must match the unit number
187. e connector 4 40 UNC thread Connect the PROFIBUS DP network cable to this connector Termination must be provided with the cable connector 24 Unit Components Section 2 1 2 1 2 Indicators The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units are each fitted with seven LEDs to indicate the operational mode and status of the Unit and the PROFIBUS network CS1W PRM21 CJ1W PRM21 PRM21 RUN ERC PRM COMM ERH BST BF Indicator Specifications Indicator Meaning Not lit e Startup test failed Unit not operational e Operation stopped due to a fatal error Lit Initialization successful Unit is in normal operation ERC Not lit Unit is in normal operation PROFIBUS DP Master Lit One of the following errors occurred Unit Error e Startup error e Non volatile memory error checksum failed write verify failed e Invalid PROFIBUS parameter configuration setting e Fatal error in program execution ERH Not lit PLC CPU in normal operation PLC Error Lit One of the following errors occurred e PLC CPU Bus error e Cyclic Refresh Monitor Time out PRM Not lit PROFIBUS Parameter configuration is not available or incorrect Parameter database Flashing PROFIBUS Parameter configuration is being transferred to the Unit and is not yet available Lit PROFIBUS Parameter configuration is correct and operational BST Not lit The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in OFF LINE or STOP mode Bus status Flashing The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in CLEAR
188. e contents of the Error Log as it is displayed is shown in the figure below In this case a Hardware Error has been detected on the PROFI BUS network wti 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Diagnosis Monitor Online Operations Master Status Slave Status Error History Content 00219 O0x0000 PROFIBUS hardware error Entry Time a 03 Mar 04 17 26 49 Note Reading the Error Log contents will not clear it Clearing the Error Log In order to clear the Error Log perform the following actions 1 2 3 1 Open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface 2 Select the Monitor Error History Tab tab 3 Press the Clear button in the lower right corner of the window 173 Monitoring the Network Section 6 7 Accessing the Error Log from the PLC CPU 174 Note This will clear not only the Error Log stored in volatile memory but also the error log events stored in the non volatile memory Clearing the Error Log is not possible if an error which was just added to the Error Log is still active The cause of the active error has to be removed first before the Error Log can be cleared Attempting to clear the Error Log while an error is still active does not result in an Error message from the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface uses FINS messages to read the CIO bit flags and access clear the Error Log contents A user program running in the PLC CPU
189. e diagnostics was monitored 169 Monitoring the Network Section 6 7 Reading Standard Slave Diagnostics Clearing Diagnostics Flags 170 Note Note The newly received diagnostics can be viewed by clicking with the left mouse button on the LED indicator indicating diagnostics The mouse pointer will change in to a hand icon when positioned over the LED indicator Clicking the LED indicator with the left mouse button has the following effects e The address of the associated slave device will be displayed in the Slave Diagnostics Data box in the lower half of the window e The standard diagnostics flags of the associated slave device will be dis played LED indicators representing a status are coloured green LED indicators representing a potential problem are coloured red e The colour of the LED indicator for the specific slave device in the Slave Status Flags box will change colour if no new diagnostics is available i e a yellow LED will turn to green e The New Diagnostics Received LED indicator in the Slave Diagnostics Data box will be set to ON If the Auto Update refresh mode has been selected the New Diagnostics Received LED indicator will be ON only during one update cycle provided no new diagnostics are received after displaying The standard diagnostics for a slave device displayed in the Slave Diagnos tics Data box can be used to e Troubleshoot the device the configuration or the network connec
190. e displayed in the Device Information box in the Description and Firmware Version fields If the communication is not setup correctly the two fields will contain three dashes i e and an Error message will be displayed in the Error Log win dow of CX Profibus The communication settings must be changed to the cor rect value first When CX Server has been setup correctly it can be used for e Configuration download e Monitoring purposes Since CX Server is the common driver software for connection between PC based CX programs e g CX Programmer CX Supervisor etc and the CS1 CJ1 series PLC all these programs can communicate simultaneously with the PLC However the settings for CX Server made through each of these programs have to be exactly the same to allow simultaneous communi cation In order to download the parameter sets to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit perform the following sequence 1 Select the DTM in the network view and right click the mouse to display the context menu 2 Select Download Parameters from the menu to initiate a download A communication channel through CX Server will be opened automatically Alternatively the following can be done 1 Select the DTM in the network view and press the Download button in the toolbar to start the download process For monitoring an online connection with the Unit must be made first To achieve this perform the following sequence 1 To go on line perf
191. e in this case may also result in undesired behaviour when adding these DTMs to the Network GSD file based DTMs can be installed from within the Device Catalogue main window To do so follow the procedure below 1 Press the Install GSD File button at the bottom of the Device Catalogue main window refer to figure above The standard windows File Open window will be displayed In the File Open window browse to the sub directory containing the GSD file select the one or more GSD file s and press the Open button in the 129 Setting up a network Section 6 2 6 2 1 Using the Context Menu window The GSD file s will be copied to a sub directory of the CX Profi bus directory 3 After completing the copy a window will be displayed asking the user per mission for an update of the Device Catalogue see figure below If more GSD files need to be installed select the No button and continue with in stallation of GSD file Otherwise select the Yes button Question CX Profibus x To complete the import the device catalogue must be updated sZ Do you wish to do this now _ w Note Updating the Device Catalogue may take several minutes depending on the number of installed GSD files Adding Devices to the Network 130 1 2 3 If the Device Catalogue is up to date it can be used to setup the network Set ting up a network in CX Profibus starts with adding single device DTMs to the
192. e is sent the I O configuration is rejected This is for example the case with the OMRON PRT1 COM Multiple I O PROFIBUS DP Interface 3 A mandatory I O module sequence is sometimes indicated in the GSD file by using non PROFIBUS standard GSD file keywords i e only interpreted by a specific configurator The Generic Slave DTM does not check such keywords In this case refer to the manual of the specific device for details 4 Also in this window are the maximum values which can be set and the to tals of I O data that actually have been set If while selecting I O modules one of the maximum values is exceeded a warning message will be dis played Example For the CJ1W PRT21 the first four I O modules have been selected see fig ure below tat 2 C31 W PRT21 Configuration 1 5 x Device CJ1W PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number Ox0602 Configuration Parameter Group r Device Settings Station Address fe IV Enable watchdog control Watchdog Interval 200 ms m Module Configuration Max length of input output data 360 Byte Length of input output data 60 Byte Max length of input data 200 Byte Length of input data 30 Byte Max length of output data 200 Byte Length of output data 30 Byte Max number of modules 32 Number of modules 4 Available Modules 1 word In Out OxFO 2 words In Out OxF1 4 words In Out OxF3 8 words In Out OxF 7 16 watords In Out
193. e of this particular slave device i e the slave device requests new parameters or fails to respond will not activate the Auto CLEAR mode The Master Unit will however service the slave device This feature can be used with slaves which can fail during operation but for which failure it is not necessary to switch the entire network to Auto CLEAR mode Control Description Process Auto CLEAR When Auto CLEAR has been enabled in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit a failure of this particular slave will cause an Auto CLEAR event Ignore Auto CLEAR When Auto CLEAR has been enabled in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit a failure of this particular slave will not cause an Auto CLEAR event The Master will however service the slave device e g send new parameters Configuration Data The Configuration Data Convention setting defines how the slave device will Convention handle the special identifier format data parts of the Check I O configuration message The slave can perform the check either according to the original PROFIBUS DP standard or according to the PROFIBUS DPV1 standard This allows PROFIBUS DP slaves to use either standard PROFIBUS DP data types or extended PROFIBUS DPV1 data types 93 Generic Slave Device DTM Section 3 5 Control Description DPV1 Compliant The Check I O configuration message will contain PROFI BUS DPV1 Data type definitions in the special identifier format data parts and the slave device will perform t
194. e to be installed for CX Profibus and its components The windows shown below will be displayed offering the 43 Installation Section 3 1 choice of available languages Select the desired language package and press the Next button CX Profibus Select application language Please select the language for the CX Profibus program German InstallShield lt Back Next gt Cancel 12 You are now required to specify the destination directory for the configura tor files If the default directory shown in the window is acceptable click the Next Button To specify a different directory click the Browse Button specify the desired directory and click the Next Button If a new directory is specified the software will create it automatically CX Profibus x Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install CX Profibus in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder cionan Files Omron CX Profibus Browse InstallShield E Cancel 13 Specify a Program Folder to which a shortcut to the program will be added The default Program Folder is OMRON CX Profibus You can specify any one of the other available Program Folders listed in the Existing Folders frame After making the desired selection select the Next button The in
195. eas can be mapped on to PLC memory independently of each other Changing the mapping can be achieved using drag amp drop The module which is mapped to Area 1 and which must be mapped to Area 2 can be copied there by dragging it from the overall module list on top to Area 2 The I O mapping concept is discussed in section 6 5 2 Mapping I O Data 1 By default the Auto Addressing option will be enabled see section 6 4 1 Setting the Master Parameters If any I O modules are moved from one Area to another the I O modules in first Area are re mapped to close all the gaps between mappings 2 Prior to download the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM will check the mappings for possible Area overlaps PLC memory overlaps and non ex isting EM banks If an error is detected download will be aborted and the necessary correction must be made first When mapping the I O Areas make sure that the I O data will not overlap the Unit s own CIO Area or the CIO Area of any other special CPU Unit The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM does not check this Failure to avoid this will lead to unpredictable behaviour of the Unit 141 Configuring the Master Section 6 4 6 4 4 Configuring CX Server The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM uses CX Server to connect to the Unit for both downloading a configuration as well as monitoring the Master Unit In order to setup the communication to the Unit perform the following proce Configuring Communication 1 2 3
196. ecautions 2 2 2 Mounting the CS1W PRM21 2 2 3 Mounting the CJ1W PRM21 Initial Setup Procedure 2 3 1 Selecting a unit number 2 3 2 Creating an T O table Setting up a Network 2 4 1 Network Structure 2 4 2 Bus Termination 2 4 3 PROFIBUS Cable Connector 2 4 4 Shielding Precautions Defining PROFIBUS DP in the Software 24 24 25 26 27 28 28 28 30 31 32 32 33 33 35 36 37 37 23 Unit Components ss Section 2 1 2 1 Unit Components 2 1 1 Nomenclature The illustration below shows the Status LED indicators the Unit number selector switch and a 9 pin female sub D connector on the front side of the CS1W PRM21 and the CJ1W PRM21 Units Each of these components are explained in the following sections CS1W PRM21 LPRM21 oss RUN mm ERC m m ERH Indicators BSTm mm PRM BFE mi COMM UNIT No pig Unit number switch a This switch sets the Unit Number of the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit as a one digit hexadecimal number PROFIBUS DP Connector 9 Pin Sub D female connector 4 40 UNC thread Connect the PROFIBUS DP network cable to this connector Termination must be provided with the cable connector CJ1W PRM21 ERC PRM COMM a JH incicators ERH BST BF UNIT g NA Unit number switch This switch sets the Unit Number of the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit as a one digit hexadecimal number PROFIBUS DP Connector 9 Pin Sub D femal
197. ece eee Maintenance Replacing the Unit Appendices A Qa 7ramMoUa ww NGO ea hanana Gee ed 8 owe eee wesw tau ate cewes Bus Parameters Slave Diagnostics Message 1 0 e teens I O Data Conversions Configurator Error and Warning Messages 0 0 0 0 e eee Memory Card Backup Functions 0 2 0 eee eeeeee Application Notes C200HW PRM21 Notes 128 128 133 137 145 159 167 176 177 183 186 196 198 199 200 203 209 219 223 229 231 233 241 Revision History ic lt 0 060s 86 seec sb sceies sees ieee 247 About this Manual This manual describes the CS1W PRM21 and CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units It also describes how to install and operate them Both Units serve the same purpose enable devices of var ious manufacturers to intercommunicate without making any special interface adaptations They are technically the same they differ only in their physical dimensions and weight and the way they are connected to the backplane This manual also describes to a lesser extend how to configure the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit using the CX Profibus Configurator For more information on the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master unit refer to the C200H series PROFIBUS DP Master Units Operation Manual W349 E2 L Please read this manual carefully so that you understand the information provided before installing or using the PROFIBUS DP Mast
198. ee HSA below The GAP Update Factor is fixed to 1 Poll Timeout The maximum time interval that this master device may need for the execution of a master master function Data Control Time The cycle time in which the master updates its Data Transfer List in which it keeps an overview of all slave states Data Control Time is based on the Watchdog time Twp Data Control Time 7 Twp Watchdog Control The Watchdog Control Time defines the time for a slave device to set its outputs to a fail safe state if during that time no communication between the Master device and that slave device was detected The Watchdog is automatically set for all configured slaves based on the value of Trp A 3 Determining the Bus Parameters The bus parameters defined in the previous paragraph are used to configure the PROFIBUS DP hardware interface and to calculate the cycle time for I O data exchange as well as the watchdog value Most of the parameters set in the Bus Parameter Tab are directly transferred to the interface hardware registers The table below lists these parameters along with their default value for the available baud rates These values are also the minimum values for each parameter at a given baud rate Baud rate kBits s o Retry Limit Poll Timeout ms O H W O 1O 0 0 0 0 Blo pola oa ay Ss ot 205 Bus Parameters App
199. either CLEAR or OPER ATE mode Probable cause The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in OFF LINE or STOP mode No communication over the network A hardware error has occurred in the PROFIBUS interface of the Unit or a mas ter device has been detected beyond the Highest Station Address The Unit has switched to OFF LINE This indicates faulty wiring broken mes sage short circuits faulty bus timings or an active device has been detected beyond the Highest Station Address setting HSA e Check the network wiring and make sure it is correct not too long long stub lines etc Check for short circuits Check the bus timing set in CX Profibus Check the HSA setting in the DTM s Bus Parameter tab Set it to the highest mas ter address which is on the network Check if any other faulty devices are on the same network Switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again Check the network wiring and other master devices on the network Make sure they are all correct Check if any other faulty devices are on the same network Switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again A protocol error has occurred in the PROFI BUS interface of the Unit the Unit has switched to OFF LINE This indicates lost tokens A Double Address error has occurred on the network i e there is a second master device with the same PROFIBUS address on the network the Unit has switched to OFF LINE Check the master devices on the n
200. em If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units e g Ethernet Units the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 16 CS1W BC023 BC033 BC053 BC083 BC103 CPU Backplane CS series CPU Rack Can mount to any position 2 with 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots CPU 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots Expansion Backplane not possible with 2 slot CPU Backplane Up to 16 Units can be mounted CS1W BI033 BI053 BI083 BI103 CS series Expansion Backplane 10 he Slots shown in the diagrams CS series Expansion Rack l Can mount to any position with 3 5 8 or 10 slots 3 5 8 or 10 slots C200H Expansion I O Backplane C200H Expansion Rack PROFIBUS DP Master Unit cannot be mounted to any slots PS CPU CPU Unit PS Power Supply Unit Note The CS1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit s maximum current con sumption is 400 mA Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 28 Installing the CS1 CJIW PRM21 Units Section 2 2 Mounting Procedure Mount the CS1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to the Backplane using the following procedure Z Caution Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before mounting or dismounting a Unit or connecting or disconnecting cables 1 2 3
201. endix A The parameters to calculate are e Min Slave Interval tg 7 e Target Rotation Time tg 7 e Watchdog timeout ms e Data Control Time ms These four values depend on the number of slave devices allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit the number of I O bytes each of the slave devices will exchange with the Master Unit and how many other Master Units are on the PROFIBUS network at the same time Furthermore the Unit will require additional time to pro cess the PROFIBUS I O data and exchange this with the PLC CPU Based on this the Min Slave Interval value for one Master Unit can be calculated as follows Min Slave Interval A B4 slave devices C4 bytes to transfer bits per us A slave devices Bo modules C gt Words to exchange 1 in which A4 By C4 are constants in tg determining the PROFIBUS DP cycle time on the bus Ao Bo Co are constants in us determining the cycle time between the Unit and the PLC CPU slave devices are the devices allocated to this Master Unit only modules are the total number of I O modules selected for the slave devices Trp Min Slave Intervalyaster A The total Target Rotation Time is calculated as the sum of all individual Min Slave Interval values for each Master Unit on the PROFIBUS network From the total Target Rotation Time the Watchdog time for each slave device is calculated as follows Twp 3 Trp Baud rate 3 in which Typis the
202. environments can lead to malfunction failure and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC system Ensure that the operating environment is within the specified condi tions at installation time and remains that way during the life of the system Follow all installation instructions and precautions provided in the operation manuals xiii Application Precautions 5 Xiv Application Precautions Z WARNING Z Caution Observe the following precautions when using the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury Always heed these precautions e Always connect to a class 3 ground 100 Q or less when installing the Units Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation or the PLC or the system or could damage the PLC or PLC Units Always heed these precautions e Install double safety mechanisms to ensure safety against incorrect sig nals that may be produced by broken signal lines or momentary power interruptions When adding a new device to the network make sure that the baud rate is the same as other nodes When adding a new slave device to the network make sure that the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in the OFFLINE state to prevent unex pected results when starting up the slave device Use specified communications cables Do not extend connection distances beyond the ranges given in the spec ifications Alwa
203. er Unit Start with the precautions in the following section They describe the operating environment and application safety measures which must be observed prior to and when using the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The sections of this manual are as follows Section 1 introduces the PROFIBUS DP Master Units and CX Profibus Section 2 describes the installation and setup of the PROFIBUS DP Master Units Section 3 describes the installation of CX Profibus and provides a overview Section 4 describes how the Units interface to the PLC CPU Section 5 describes the FINS commands supported by the PROFIBUS Master Units Section 6 describes the operational aspects of the PROFIBUS Master Units Section 7 provides procedures for troubleshooting the PROFIBUS network and the Units The Appendices contain information supplementary to the information in the main body of the man ual They are referred to in the various sections as required Manual Products Contents CS series SYSMAC CS series Describes the installation and opera W339 E1 Programmable Controllers CS1G H CPULILI E tion of the CS series PLCs Operation Manual CJ series SYSMAC Cu series Describes the installation and opera W393 E1 Programmable controllers CJ1G CPU tion of the CJ series PLCs operation Manual CS CJ series SYSMAC CS Cu series Describes the ladder diagram pro W394 E1 Programmable Controllers CS1G H CPULILI E CJ1G gramming instructions supported by Programming Man
204. er of the DTM or the GSD If the device is defined by a GSD file the Generic Slave Device DTM reads out the GSD file entry Revision The string provided by this variable is the version number displayed in the list For DTMs Date is the date associated with the revision For GSD file based slaves the date listed in this column is the date the GSD file was last modified The Vendor name is provided by the DTM or the GSD files DTM Group Selection The left window pane allows selection of specific groups of device DTMs with Window common attributes e g Vendor name Protocol type etc If a group is selected all device DTMs which belong to that group will be listed in the right window pane The table below lists the possible groups that can be selected List item Description Device Sub groups which can be selected are Types e Communication DTMs e g PROFIBUS DP Master devices e Gateways e g to another network type e Modular devices e Other devices e g slave devices Vendors Sub groups which can be selected are all available vendors This information is provided by each DTM It allows the user to select a group of devices from one vendor Groups Sub groups are the device types e g digital I O analog I O etc Protocols Sub groups which can be selected are all the communication protocols found in the Device Catalogue Note 1 The sub groups will be displayed by clicking on the sign next to e
205. eral all I O data exchanged during a PROFIBUS I O data exchange cycle must be exchanged with the PLC CPU as soon as possible after the end of each PROFIBUS DP I O data exchange cycle is signalled In order to transfer I O data between the Unit and the PLC CPU the Unit has to request a transfer of I O data The actual transfer of I O data will then be performed during the next PLC cyclic refresh which depends on the PLC user program To avoid missing I O data as much as possible the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 uses the following rules for cyclic refresh with the PLC CPU e The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit estimates based on the actual PLC cycle and the last cyclic refresh when a new cyclic refresh from the PLC CPU can be expected and requests a refresh of I O data shortly before that e If the end of PROFIBUS DP I O data exchange is signalled before the request based on the estimation is issued the PROFIBUS Master Unit will immediately request a cyclic refresh e If the end of PROFIBUS DP I O data exchange is signalled after the request has been issued or during the cyclic refresh the PROFIBUS Master Unit will request a cyclic refresh as soon as the requested cyclic refresh has been finished The implementation of these rules are illustrated in the figures below for two distinctive cases The figure below shows the effects of these rules for the case in which the PROFIBUS DP I O data exchange cycle gt PLC cyclic refresh
206. ere there are other devices in the network which have the same address the device address of the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM may need to be changed After making the changes select the Save button in the lower right corner of the user interface to accept the changes Next select the Master Setup tab to display the Master Setup options 6 4 1 Setting the Master Parameters Master Setup Tab The Master Setup tab defines e the behaviour of the Master Unit when the PLC CPU switches its mode between RUN MONITOR and PROGRAM mode e The behaviour of the Master Unit in case an error occurs in one of the slave devices allocated to the Master Unit The method of I O data mapping 138 Configuring the Master Unit Behaviour upon PLC Mode Changes Note Auto CLEAR behaviour Section 6 4 The figure below shows the Master Setup tab lolx Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK m Action to PLC Mode Transition Cancel To RUN MONITOR Mode r To PROGRAM Mode Help Keep Current Mode C Keep Current Mode Goto OPERATE Mode Goto CLEAR Mode Auto Clear r Support C Auto Clear Mode OFF IV Auto Addressing The user can select the way the Unit will behave if the PLC mode is changed The default settings are e Set the Units operational mode to CLEAR i e set all outputs to a safe state when switching the PLC CPU to PROGRAM mode e Set the Unit s operational mode to OPERATE
207. es Time 23 05 Date 04 Nov 03 1 CJ1 W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Slave address overlap detected New address assigned 2 User Administrator A By right clicking the mouse cursor in the Error Log window a context menu is displayed This context menu provides the options listed below 57 CX Profibus Section 3 2 Error Log Window Context Menu Menu item Description Equivalent menu command Clear all entries Clears the entire Error Log window Copy to clipboard Copies the entire contents of the Error Log window to the clipboard Hide Hides the Error Log window View Error Logging FDT Monitoring Window Note The FDT Monitoring window displays the communication between the FDT Container application i e CX Profibus and any of the DTMs The communi cation is listed as a sequence of function calls from the CX Profibus to a DTM and vice versa The FDT Monitoring window is hidden by default After starting CX Profibus the window will be displayed by selecting the View FDT Monitoring option from the main menu The purpose of the FDT Monitoring window is troubleshooting in case prob lems occur with third party DTMs The contents of the window can be copied to the clipboard to allow it to be pasted into another document or into an E mail The messages themselves as well as the sequence of messages may hold additional clues in case of problems The format used in the FDT Monitoring Window is Time lt Time gt
208. es and save them Cancel Help Save Save in the context of the buttons means that the changes made by the user are saved in the DTM only i e the changes are not permanently saved in the Project yet This is indicated by the asterisk next to the DTM in the Network View window The next time in the same session the GUI is opened the changes will still be there In order to save the changes permanently e g to hard disk Click the File Save option from the main menu of CX Profibus CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Device Setup Tab The Device setup tab see figure above provides the controls to achieve communication between the PC and the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit It allows setting of the unit number to identify it on the PLC system and the device address to identify it on the PROFIBUS network It also will invoke the CX Server interface to setup and test the communication between the PC and the PLC to which the Unit is attached The Device Setup tab has the following components Settings Box The Settings box contains the setting the user must make before setting up the communication and before testing the communication Control Description Station Address Address of the Unit in the PROFIBUS network Default value is 1 but is should be changed if there is already another device with that number Unit Number This number must be the same as the number selected with the Unit Number Selector
209. es on the network i e not to specific groups e always at the start of every I O data exchange cycle and e only when the Master Unit is either in OPERATE or in CLEAR mode 2 The user can only initiate transmission of Freeze Unfreeze and Sync Un sync to either all slave devices or specific groups of slave devices These Global Control commands are transmitted separately from the automati cally transmitted messages at the end of the PROFIBUS I O data ex change cycle User initiated Global Control commands can be transmitted to either all slave devices allocated to a Master Unit or to one or more of up to eight groups of slave devices The group addresses are defined by up to eight bits in a group address byte which is part of the Global Control command If a Global Control command is targeted to all slave devices all the group bits in the group address bytes are set to 0 In order for a specific slave device to belong to a certain group the group assignment for the slave has to be defined through the Generic Slave DTM Configuration User Interface A slave device can belong to one or more groups at the same time or to no specific group at all The group assignment is sent to the slave devices as part of the parameter message To define the group assignment of a slave device through the Generic Slave DTM refer to section 6 3 3 Selecting the Group Assignment Sending a Global Control Freeze command to a slave device has the follow
210. es there is only one I O module and can therefore not be selected by a user The selected I O module bytes are sent over the PROFIBUS network to the slave device at startup using a Chk_Cfg message The slave device has to check and approve the I O modules sent by the Master Unit before I O data exchange can be established The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit supports up to 4000 I O modules which can define a total of up to 7168 words of input data and or output data The I O module selection made per slave by the user is also used to setup the I O mapping i e the definition of which I O modules are mapped to which PLC memory location This section discusses the aspects of I O data exchange between the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and the PLC CPU 6 5 2 Mapping I O Data I O Mapping Concept Default I O Mapping Algorithm The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit provides an I O mapping concept based on the I O module selection for each slave device Each selected I O module can depending on whether it defines input and or output data be mapped to one of two input and or output areas Each of the two input and output areas can be mapped to any PLC memory area location independent of each other The I O mapping must be setup using the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM as provided with CX Profibus Mapping the I O modules involves two steps e Allocate each I O module to one or more of the Input Output areas e Al
211. esponse Codes Normal Command too large Command too small Beginning record number is out of range The number of read records is 0 124 Command Response Reference Section 5 2 5 2 6 ERROR LOG CLEAR 0203 Clears the number of records stored in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit error log Command Block 21 03 Command code Response Block 21 03 Command Response code code Response Codes Response code Description 0000 Normal 250F Memory writing error Error Log was not cleared normally 260B Cannot Clear the Error Log The error cause still exists 125 Command Response Reference Section 5 2 126 SECTION 6 Operation This section describes how to operate the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit in a Network It will discuss setting up a network configuring all the connected devices and starting the network Furthermore it provides information the I O data exchange performance and it also provides information on how to monitor a network using the Unit and CX Profibus 6 1 6 2 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 Introductions s 42 isk es beds eek eRe Se MARRS RR a RAR E AR Setting up a NetWork ossec o caa e E eens 6 2 1 Adding Devices to the Network 0 0 00000 6 2 2 Changing Device Addresses 0 00000 e eee eee Configuring the Slave Devices 0 0 cee eee eee ees 6 3 1 Defining the I O configurati
212. et work Make sure they all have unique network addresses After correction switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again Not lit Not a valid combination Lit Not a valid combination 181 Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators Flashing Lit 182 Not lit Not lit Probable cause Not a valid combination Section 7 2 Correction Lit A Bus disturbance error has been detected This indicates a termination error termina tion resistors are missing or inductors are not used or two slave devices with the same address Switch the Unit to OFF LINE mode Terminate the network at the appropriate places see section 2 4 2 Bus Termina tion Check if any other faulty devices are on the same network Switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again Flashing None of the allocated slave devices responds to the master s request mes sages None of the slaves is in I O data exchange with the Master Unit This may indicate a loose network connec tor on the Master Unit or a broken cable Switch the Unit to OFF LINE mode Check the network wiring Check if any other faulty devices are on the same network Check if actual slave addresses match the configured addresses Check if the slave parameter settings are correct If necessary change them and download them again Switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again Not Lit There are no errors The Unit is
213. et rotation time etc Downloading the The system must be downloaded to the Master Unit after configuring it at the Configuration PC This is made possible by either connecting the serial COM port of the PC to the CS1 CJ1 PLC with a serial interface cable or use an ethernet connec tion between the PC and the CS1 CJ1 PLC via an ethernet unit or Controller Link unit 37 Defining PROFIBUS DP in the Software Section 2 5 38 SECTION 3 Configuration Software This section contains the procedures for installing the configuration software It also presents an overview of the Configuration software and discusses the main aspects of defining a PROFIBUS configuration A more detailed description of the use of the Configuration software can be found in SECTION 6 Operation 3 1 3 2 3 5 Installations o lt 0 i300 soit ag tind ed inh Pe asin ee lias ge See EAs eee Eas 3 1 1 Installation Requirements 0 0000000008 3 1 2 Installation Procedure 0 0 c eee eee 3 1 3 Installing the C200HW PRM21 DTM CX Profi bus e seenen eiere a a a bent Seabee ete ete ed os 3 2 1 Starting CX Profibus 0 0 eee eee ee 3 2 2 CX Profibus Main Window 00 0 0 eee ee eee 3 2 3 Device Catalogue 00 cee eee ee eee 3 2 4 Updating the Device Catalogue 00008 3 2 5 Adding Devices to the Network 00 00 0005 3 2 6 Saving and Opening Projects
214. ever the allocated area is reserved for use in a future extension of the Unit Therefore using this area for user data is not recommended Unit number Allocated words voit number Allocated words D30000 to D30099 D30800 to D30899 D30100 to D30199 D30900 to D30999 D30200 to D30299 D31000 to D31099 D30300 to D30399 D31100 to D31199 D30400 to D30499 D31200 to D31299 D30500 to D30599 D31300 to D31399 N or A OJ PP o D30600 to D30699 D31400 to D31499 D30700 to D30799 D31500 to D31599 103 Allocated CIO Area Words Section 4 2 4 2 Allocated CIO Area Words 104 For each CPU Bus Unit the CS CJ series PLC allocates up to 25 words in the CIO area Data is stored in the offset position defined by the unit number and shown in the following figure starting from the first allocated word to the Unit in the CIO Area First word n CIO 1500 25 x Unit number CIO WORDS Word Bit 15 Bit 00 Data direction n Software switches 1 n 1 Reserved CPU Unit to PROFIBUS Unit n 2 Global Controlcommand CPU Unit to PROFIBUS Unit n 3 Reserved n 4 Unit status word n 5 Master status word 1 Master status word 2 Slave status word Actual bus cycle time Slave Data Exchange Active flags PROFIBUS Unit to CPU Unit Slave New Diagnostics flags The CIO Words contain two Reserved Words e CIO Word n 1 is reserved for future extension of switch fun
215. evice as in the Slave Diagnostics Data box in the Master DTM Monitoring User Interface e The Extended Diagnostics tab displaying the extended diagnostics reported by the slave device The interpretation of this diagnostics infor mation depends on the type of slave device Standard Slave As an example the standard slave device diagnostics information window is Diagnostics Example shown below For more information regarding interpretation of the LED indica tors refer to section 6 7 1 Monitoring the Master Unit and the Network 2101 x Device CJ1W PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd OK Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number 0x0602 Help Diagnostic Extended Diagnostics r Station Status Wa Master lock W Slave deactivated Parameter fault W Syne Mode W Invalid slave response Freeze Mode Function not supported Watchdog on Extended diagnostics Slave device W Configuration fault Wa Static diagnostics W Station not ready WW Reparameterization requested W Station not existent Wa Extended diagnostics overflow Assigned Master Address 1 Device internal Ident Number 0x602 Connected Update Extended Slave Extended diagnostics data are often not always provided by a slave device Diagnostics to indicate additional slave specific diagnostics error and alarm information which can not be contained in the standard data part of the diagnostics mes sage These extended diagnostics data bytes are sent by the
216. ext time the Master addresses the slave e request re parameterization from the Master before resuming O data exchange If disabled the slave will remain in data exchange even if the Master is not communicating thus maintaining its outputs in the latest known state based on the last I O data exchange message 2 Watchdog Interval This value is the watchdog timeout related to the Master Slave communi cation time out Note Enabling the Watchdog Control is highly recommended for safe operation of the network Z Caution In the current version of CX Profibus the watchdog value for each of the slave devices is overruled by the value determined by the Master DTM Therefore changing the value in the Generic Slave DTM has no effect When done making the I O configuration settings press the Apply button at the bottom of the window Next select the Parameter tab to make the neces sary parameter selections 135 Configuring the Slave Devices Section 6 3 6 3 2 Setting Parameters The parameters are sent by the Master Unit to the slave device prior to estab lishing I O data exchange The slave device will reject incorrect parameters and not establish I O data exchange unless the parameters are changed In general there will be two types of parameters e Common Parameters Most of the slave devices require at least the common parameters These parameters apply to the whole slave device e Module Parameters Modular sl
217. eze See Global Control G H Generic Slave DTM 18 Extended diagnostics 171 Extensions Alarm SAP 97 Alarms 96 Auto Clear behavior 93 Configuration processing 93 Diagnostics Update Delay 95 DPV1 enable 96 Error on Cyclic Data Exchange 94 Fail safe behavior 94 Max Alarm PDU length 96 Max channel data length 96 Standard diagnostics 171 Generic slave DTM Configuring 133 Group assignment 137 I O Configuration 134 Appending 134 Defining 133 Inserting 134 Removing 135 Parameters 136 Common 136 Module 136 Watchdog 135 Global Control Broadcast message 106 Commands 162 Freeze Unfreeze 75 162 T O synchronization 162 Multicast message 106 Selecting groups in CIO words 106 in CX Profibus 76 Sync Unsynce 75 162 163 Transmitting commands 164 CIO Words via 106 CX Profibus via 76 165 PLC program via 164 GSD file DP master section 9 DP slave section 9 DTM versus GSD file 9 General section 9 GSD file technology 8 Installing new 129 Language 8 HSA See Bus parameters T O Allocations CIO Area Actual bus cycle time Word n 8 114 Global Control message Word n 2 106 Master status word 1 Word n 5 110 Master status word 2 Word n 6 112 Reserved words 104 Slave Data_Exchange flags Word N 9 n 16 114 Slave New diagnostics flags Word n 17 n 24 116 Slave status word Word n 7 113 Software switches 1 Word n 105 Unit status word Word n 4 109 CIO DM Area
218. figurator 11 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Section 1 3 Item Reading slave device diagnostics Specification The MEMORY AREA READ 0101 FINS command can be used to obtain the last received Slave Diagnostics message Reading and controlling the error log Catalogues the history of error events The Unit supports the following Error Log related FINS commands e ERROR LOG READ e ERROR LOG CLEAR Device state changes Allocated slave devices can be disabled and enabled in order to tempo rarily remove them from data exchange services The internal error log records the history of error events The Unit supports the following FINS commands to implement this Note RUN e STOP Error history size and storage Error log FINS messaging Protocol Specification The PROFIBUS Master Unit supports storage of up to 80 error events including time stamps in volatile memory 16 error events can be logged in non volatile memory Item Specification Applicable standards Protocol type supported PROFIBUS Unit types EN50170 Volume 2 PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP Class 1 Master PROFIBUS Media type RS 485 galvanically isolated from the PLC PROFIBUS Connector 9 pin sub D female connector 4 40 UNC thread Termination according to EN50170 provided by the cable connector Unit device address range 0 125 set through the configurator Number of slave devices supported 125 max addre
219. following standard selections are available 1 alarm of each selected type 2 alarms in total 4 alarms in total 8 alarms in total 12alarms in total 16 alarms in total 24 alarms in total 32 alarms in total Pull Plug alarm When set this checkbox enables the signalling of a pull plug alarm type i e the removal insertion of a hardware I O module Process alarm When set this checkbox enables the signalling of a pro cess alarm type i e an alarm related to the process con nected to the I O Example Upper Limit exceeded alarm Diagnostic alarm When set this checkbox enables the signalling of a diag nostic alarm i e an alarm related to the functioning of a specific I O module in a slot Example Short circuit detected Manufacturer specific When set this checkbox enables the signalling of a Manu alarm facturer specific alarm Status alarm When set this checkbox enables the signalling of a Status alarm i e an alarm related to an internal state change ina module Example Change to Run state Stop state Update alarm When set this checkbox enables the signalling of an Update alarm i e an alarm indicating a change in the parameters related to a specific module either by local or remote access 96 Generic Slave Device DTM CS ection 3 5 Extra Alarm SAP For acyclic data exchange between a PROFIBUS DPV1 Master Unit Class 1 and a PROFIBUS DPV1 slave device one specific SAP Ser
220. g correctly e After correction switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again 02 Double master address A second master device with the same network address has been detected on the error PROFIBUS network The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has switched to OFF LINE To correct this e Check the master devices on the network and ensure that they have unique device addresses e After correction switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again 03 Hardware error A hardware error has occurred in the PROFIBUS interface of the Unit The PROFI BUS DP Master Unit has switched to OFF LINE Most likely causes e Faulty wiring e Broken messages e Short circuits or e Faulty bus timings e A master device has been detected beyond the Highest Station Address HSA To correct this e Check the network wiring and make sure it is correct e Check for short circuits e Check the bus timing set through CX Profibus e Check if any other faulty devices are on the same network e After correction switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again 12 Mode command error An error has occurred when setting two or more mode switches in Switch Word CIO Word n The flag will be set to ON until the correct command i e one mode switch has been issued 13 Parameter error An error has occurred initializing the PROFIBUS interface after reading the param eter sets from the non volatile memory to the volatile memory Most likely cause A faulty parameter
221. g allowing the user to define the tar get location of the output data in the PLC memory has been selected Note Readable captions and or convenient selection items are not always provided with the parameters Depending on the slave device and the GSD file imple mentation setting the parameter values may require the help of the user doc umentation for that slave 136 Configuring the Master o Section 6 4 6 3 3 Selecting the Group Assignment The group assignment is sent to the slave devices as part of the parameter message The group assignment is used as an address within the Global Control command message see section 6 6 3 Transmitting Global Control Commands to address a specific group of slaves or all slaves To set a slave device s group address perform the following steps 1 2 3 1 Open the Configuration User Interface of the Generic Slave DTM the spe cific slave device Select the Group tab Select the checkbox next to the group numbers for all the groups to which the slave device will belong 4 Select the Apply button at the bottom of the User Interface Example Assigning slave devices to groups is application dependent The figure below shows the Group selection tab for the CJ1W PRT21 which has been assigned to groups 1 2 and 4 in Device CJ1wW PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number Ox0602 Configuration Parameter Group IV Group 1 I Group 5 lV Group 2 I Group 6
222. g message will be displayed allowing cancellation of the command Cancel Closes the user interface without saving Note If any changes were made a warning message is displayed allowing cancellation of the command Apply Evaluate and save the changes made if any Note If any invalid settings have been made a warning message will be displayed allowing cancellation of the command Help Launch context sensitive Help for the Active tab Z Caution Saving the changes in the context of the buttons means that the changes Bus Parameters Tab 80 made by the user are saved in the DTM only i e the changes are not perma nently saved in the Project yet This is indicated by the asterisk next to the DTM in the Network View window The next time in the same session the GUI is opened the changes will still be there In order to save the changes perma nently e g to hard disk Click the File Save option from the main menu of CX Profibus The Bus Parameters tab contains the parameters for the communication on the PROFIBUS network The Bus Parameters tab is shown below f 1 C200HW PRM21 Configuration 0 x Bus Parameters Address Table Profile m Bus Parameters Baud Rate 1500 kBit s 7 Station Address 1 Slot Time 300 tBit Target Rotation Time 11894 tBit Min Station Delay Time 11 tBit 7 9293 ms Max Station Delay Time 150 tBit GAP Actualization Factor 10
223. g up the device parameters which will be send to the device to make or verify its settings e Selecting the group assignment which defines the group of slave devices each slave belongs to and to allow sending Global Control commands to this particular group All these settings will be downloaded to the Master Unit which will send the data to the individual slave devices over the PROFIBUS network 6 3 1 Defining the I O configuration Opening the DTM In order to define the I O configuration the DTM Configuration User Interface rahe taal User must be opened To do this either ees e select the device in the Network Window and double click the left mouse button e select the device in the Network Window right click the mouse and select Configuration from the context menu Example The figure below shows the DTM User Interface for the CJ1W PRT21 PROFIBUS DP slave device ioi xi Device CJTW PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number Ox0602 Configuration Parameter Group r Device Settings Station Address fe IV Enable watchdog control Watchdog Interval 200 ms m Module Configuration Max length of input output data 360 Byte Length of input output data 0 Byte Max length of input data 200 Byte Length of input data 0 Byte Max length of output data 200 Byte Length of output data 0 Byte Max number of modules 32 Number of modules 0 Available Modules Module Name Module Configurati
224. ger the counter has to count up It is recommended to include a safety margin to avoid the PLC error being generated too soon An estimate for the value can be made using the formula below Timer value Max 40 min PLC Cycle In the ladder program shown as example below the minimum value of 40 has been used The unit number for the example Unit is 0 231 Application Notes Appendix F 232 000000 000000 000001 000002 000002 000004 000003 000006 1500 15 ap 90 J ClOn_bit15 wo Number of PLC cycles without refresh Refresh TestFlag Counter gt FALS 325 007 H wo 1 Refresh Counter amp 40 0000 1500 15 MOV aE 02 H ClOn_bit15 0 TestFlag wo Number of PLC cycles without refresh Refresh Counter CF113 1500 15 TestFlag O P_On ClOn_bit15 Always TestFlag ON Flag Appendix G C200HW PRM21 Notes G 1 Introduction This appendix contains notes on the use of the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master unit on a CS1 PLC Sys tem The C200HW PRM21 is a special I O Unit originally designed for the C200H series PLC but can also be used on the CS1 series PLC systems G 2 Word allocations This section provides a brief overview of the memory allocations required by the C2ZOOHW PRM21 for Unit set tings and Control and status words For more details refer to the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master
225. gh a switch on the connector The special PROFIBUS DP cable connectors often provide a convenient way of connecting the cables The figure on the left provides an example of such a bus cable connector A standard 9 pin sub D plug can only be used if the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is not at the start or the end of a bus segment or on a stub line at a baud rate of 500 kbit s or less The two PROFIBUS data lines are designated A and B There are no regula tions on which cable core colour should be connected to which of the two data terminals on each PROFIBUS device the sole requirement is to ensure that the same core colour is connected to the same terminal A or B for all devices throughout the entire system across all devices and bus segments The PROFIBUS Organization recommends the following rule for data line colour codes PROFIBUS cables in general will use the colours red and green for the data lines with the following assignment e Data cable wire A green e Data cable wire B red This rule applies to both the incoming and the outgoing data lines Defining PROFIBUS DP in the Software Section 2 5 2 4 4 Shielding Precautions Cable Shield Connection To ensure electro magnetic compatibility EMC the shield of the cable should be connected to the metal case of the plug connector If the Unit is installed in a control cabinet the bus cable shield should be brought into physical contact with a grounding rail using a grounding
226. green indicates a status indication The LED indicators are listed in the table below 71 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 LED Indicator Description Master Status 1 OPERATE Master Unit is in OPERATE mode STOP Master Unit is in STOP mode CLEAR Master Unit is in CLEAR mode OFF LINE Master Unit is in OFF LINE mode Data Exchange When set to ON it indicates that the Master Unit is in Data Exchange with all its allocated and enabled slave devices Auto Clear enabled Auto Clear function has been enabled in the downloaded configuration Valid Configuration The Master Unit contains a valid configuration Master Status 2 Disturbed Bus error When turned ON the Disturbed Bus error indicates that distorted messages have been received by the Unit This may occur if the network is not properly terminated or a cable is used which is too long for the selected baud rate PROFIBUS Protocol Error When turned ON the PROFIBUS Protocol Error indicates that an error has occurred in the protocol handling e g a transmitted token frame could not be read back The Master Unit has switched to OFF LINE Double Master address Error Indicates that a second Master with the same address has been detected on the Bus The Master Unit has switched to OFF LINE Hardware error When turned ON the Hardware Error indicates that an error has occurred on the bus e g mes
227. h indicate the presence of error flags in the Master and Slave Status Words All bits are controlled by the Unit 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 Word n 4 Unit error flag Master error flag Error log contains new errors Parameter transfer in progress Local parameter storage error Local parameter load error File read error Error log storage error Word n 4 n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number Status Controlled Unit operation by Unit error flag The Unit error flag collects the status of all error flags in CIO Word n 4 The bit flag is turned ON by the Unit if Bit 01 Bit 03 Bit 06 Bit 07 Bit 09 or Bit 13 in ClO Word n 4 is set to ON Bit 00 is turned OFF by the Unit if Bit 01 Bit 03 Bit 06 Bit 07 Bit 09 and Bit 13 in CIO Word n 4 are set to OFF Master error flag The Master error flag collects the error flags in the Master status 2 Word i e CIO Word n 6 Master status word 2 contains all error flags related to the PROFIBUS DP Master functions Bit 01 is turned ON if any of the flags in Master status word 2 i e ClO Word n 6 is set to ON see 4 2 5 Master Status 2 Word n 6 Bit 01 is turned OFF if none of the flags in Master status word 2 i e ClO Word n 6 is set to ON Reserved by sys This bit will be set to OFF by the Unit tem Error log contains This bit indicates new errors in the error log since t
228. have returned diagnostics information to the Master Unit In order to determine which slave reported diagnostics select the Slave Status tab next to the Master status tab The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface provides a comprehensive overview of the slave device status without having the user to open all the slave DTMs The overview is presented in the Monitoring Slave Status tab of the user interface and displays only the standard PROFIBUS Monitoring the Network S Section 6 7 diagnostics flags An example is shown in the figure below For the extended non standard diagnostics see section 6 7 2 Monitoring Slave Status wt 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Diagnosis 5 x Monitor Online Operations Close Help Master Status Slave Status Enor History r Refresh r Slave Status Flags T Adonai E 2 th E A E E ak 3 lt b A CR wn OO OOOOOOO 773 OO0O0000000 1 13 OOOBO as OOOO000000 22 O OOOCOOD ws OCOOOOCO0O0O 3233 QOOOOOOCOO 10109 OCOOOOOOOOO 448 QOOOOO00COO 110118 OOOOOCO00O0 853 QOOOOOOCOOD 12135 OOOO0O 6068 QOOOOO000O Clear Diagnostics Slave Diagnostic Data Selected Slave 23 O New Diagnostics Received Station non existent Parameter request used Station not ready Static diagnostics Configuration fault Station type Extended diagnostics received Watchdog On Function not supported Freeze mode Invalid slave response Syne mode Para
229. hdog time for the Unit The device address is normally set automatically by the Master DTM when the slave DTM is added to its tree However the user has the opportunity to change the address The changed address will be transferred to the Master DTM In case a changed address is invalid for example if there is already another slave device with the same new address the Master DTM will set the number back to its old value The Watchdog value is the value used by the slave device to monitor commu nication from the Master Unit If no messages are sent to the slave by its Mas ter within the Watchdog timeout time the slave device will stop data exchange and switch back to the fail safe mode In the current version of CX Profibus the Watchdog setting made in the Generic Slave DTM is overruled by the Watchdog setting in the Master DTM see also section 6 4 2 Setting the Bus Parameters The I O module configuration defines the I O Data which the slave will be exchanging with the Master Unit when it is in data exchange mode The upper window in the Configuration tab contains all possible modules which are in the GSD file The lower window holds all selected I O modules The user has to select the modules which are associated with the physical configuration of the slave device Selecting i e copying the module from the upper window of the lower window can be done in several ways e Double click the left mouse button on the selected module in
230. he check on this assumption EN50170 Compliant The Check I O configuration message will contain stan dard PROFIBUS DP Data type definitions as well as ven dor specific data types and the slave device will perform the check on this assumption Fail Safe Behaviour The Fail Safe Behaviour box defines whether or not the PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Unit will in CLEAR mode send an empty output data message to the slave device or a data message containing zeros Depending on the PROFIBUS DP slave device an empty data message may be required if the slave device performs user specific functions in CLEAR mode and during which the outputs can not be set to zero Control Description Send zeros in Clear When in CLEAR mode the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit mode will send a full output data message to the slave device but the message will contain all zeros Send no data in Clear When in CLEAR mode the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit mode will send an empty output data message i e no data bytes only the message header to the slave device Error on Cyclic Data The Error on Cyclic Data Exchange settings box defines the behaviour of the Exchange PROFIBUS DP Master Units on the PROFIBUS network with respect to this particular slave device in case it fails to respond during I O data exchange Depending on the setting the Master Unit will either continue sending I O data exchange messages to the slave device or abort I O data exchange and continue w
231. he bus configuration is changed and these changes have effects on the Bus Parameters a note symbol 4 appears next to the concerned parame ters of which displayed values are not longer valid Usually in these cases the displayed values are too small and will eventually lead to communication problems The marked parameters need to be recalculated which can be accomplished by pressing the Adjust button at the bottom right of the Bus Parameter tab After re calculation the note symbol will disappear Note In case of large networks it may be required to increase the Watchdog time to allow the network to become fully operational Address Table Tab The Address Table tab displays the mapping of the I O data from to the allo cated slave devices on to the internal I O memory of the Unit The mapping can be made automatically but can also be changed by the user before downloading The Address Table tab is shown below containing example data 82 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 atl 1 C200HW PRM21 Configuration lol x Bus Parameters Address Table CJ1W PRT21 1 word input output 2 2 CJ1W PRT21 2 word input output Iw 1 2 CJ1W PRT21 4 word input output Iw 3 2 CJ1W PRT21 8 word input output Iw 7 3 CPM14 PRT21 2 byte output 15 3 CPM14 PRT21 2 byte input IB 4 BK3120 5 byte input output IB 16 4 BK3120 6 byte input output IB 19 4 BK3120 3 byte input output IB 22 Sort by station address Sort
232. he last time the error new errors log was cleared or read It is set to ON if the error log contains one or more new errors The bit flag is set to OFF by the Unit if the error log is e cleared using the ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS command or e read using the ERROR LOG READ FINS command Parameter transfer The Parameter transfer in progress indicates transfer of Configuration in progress and setup data e from the PC to the Unit s internal volatile memory or e from the Unit s internal volatile memory to non volatile mem ory or e from the flash card to the Unit s internal volatile memory During this transfer no other transfer of data can be started in parallel When set to OFF this bit indicates that no Configuration data transfer is in progress Reserved by sys This bit will be set to OFF by the Unit tem 109 Allocated CIO Area Words Section 4 2 Bit Name Local parameter storage error Status Controlled by Unit operation The local parameter storage error flag will be turned ON if an error occurred during an attempt to write the Configuration and setup data to internal non volatile memory If the error occurred the data in the non volatile memory may be cor rupted and a new Configuration must be downloaded to the Unit When set to OFF this bit indicates that the Configuration and setup data has been transferred to the non volatile memory successfully
233. he left mouse button e Selecting the Master DTM in the Network Window and right clicking the mouse From the context menu select Configuration The Master DTM Configuration User Interface which is displayed in the CX Profibus DTM window is shown below 61 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 o x Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK omron Carai Communication e r r Settings Station Address fi Unit Number jo 4 Device Information OMRON Corporation Description l Firmware Version l Master DTM Configuration User Interface Configuration Interface Buttons Z Caution 62 The Master DTM Configuration User Interface consist of four tabbed win dows e Device Setup tab e Master Setup tab e Bus Parameters tab e Slave Area tab The four tabbed windows are discussed below The Master DTM Configuration User Interface contains four general buttons They are listed in the table below together with the action taken when press ing them Button Action Evaluate and save the changes made if any and close the user interface Note If any invalid settings have been made a warning message will be displayed allowing cancellation of the command Closes the user interface without saving Note If any changes were made a warning message is displayed allowing cancellation of the command Launch context sensitive Help for the Active tab Evaluate chang
234. he power to all mas ter and slave devices before replacing the Unit 2 When replacing the Unit do not reconnect it to the Network before carrying out the procedures listed below 7 8 2 Setting the Unit after Replacement After replacing a PROFIBUS DP Master Unit before re applying the power set the unit number to the same unit number as the previous Unit After re applying the power the configuration settings present in the previous Unit must also be transferred to the new Unit There are two methods to accomplish this e Start up CX Profibus and reload the original project from the stored loca tion and download it to the new Unit e Use a Memory Card to store the all the Unit s settings before replace ment and restore it to the new Unit after replacement After configuring the new Unit re connect it to the network and restart opera tion 7 8 3 Addition Replacement of Units on the PROFIBUS Network Connecting Disconnecting Devices Adding a Device 200 The PROFIBUS network allows to connect and disconnect devices while in operation Connecting disconnecting any device in a PROFIBUS network is liable to result in a temporary increase of the communication cycle time An existing slave device can only be replaced by the same type of device with the same configuration Any change to this configuration is likely to require a new con figuration Changing a device with a different device type and or configura tion
235. he watchdog setting for the slave device is not too low The configuration contains timing errors e BF LED indicator is Flashing e Slaves are sometimes briefly in and out of data exchange Verify that the Bus parameter sets are cor rect If necessary increase Target Rota tion Time and or Min Slave Interval parameters Re download the configuration If the problem persists replace the Unit A second master device with its own slave devices is on the same network interfering with this Master Unit e The baud rate settings of both masters is different The total Target Rotation Time set to both masters is too small i e not the sum of both individual time values Verify that all masters on the network are set to the same baud rate Verify that the total Target Rotation Time for all masters on the network is set to the sum of all individual masters Specific slave devices are configured and allocated to the Master Unit but the slave which is not exchanging data may have been disabled using the FINS STOP command Use the FINS RUN command to enable the slave devices 193 Troubleshooting the Network Section 7 4 Problem PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is configured All slaves were in data exchange but it has now stopped Probable cause No power is supplied to the system All LED indicators on the system are OFF Correction e Verify that power is supplied to the sys tem A
236. i cense key provided on the back side of the CD ROM case User and Licence Information x Please enter your name and the name of your company In order to use the full capability of CX Programmer you must also enter the product license number found on the CD case You may use CX Programmer in Demo mode without a license number Name lt Your Name gt Company lt Your Company gt Licence lt Back Cancel Note 1 If an incorrect 16 digit License code is entered the program will display an error message after which it allows you to re enter the number again 2 If no License code is entered the program will still be installed but it will run only for 30 days after installation After this 30 day trial period you will have to enter the required 16 digit License code in order to be able to run the program 10 After entering the information a window will be displayed allowing you to verify the entered information before installation commences If the infor mation is correct select the Yes button Selecting the No button will revert you to the previous window Registration Confirmation x You have provided the following registration information Name lt Your Name gt Company lt Your Company gt Serial Number Is this registration information correct 11 After entering the correct License code the installation process will first re quire you to select the languag
237. i e start I O data exchange with the slave devices when switching the PLC CPU to RUN MONITOR mode 1 The advantage of this setting is that the user does not have program the starting of the network The disadvantage is that the moment at which the network is started is out of direct control of the PLC user program I O data exchange is started while the program may still be initializing its memory Depending on the application this may have unexpected effects 2 To avoid potential problems at startup it is recommended to set the net work operational mode to keep current mode in case the PLC mode in case the PLC mode changes to RUN MONITOR and to set the operation al mode to CLEAR in case the PLC mode changes to PROGRAM This re quires the PLC user program to switch the network to OPERATE after startup Refer to section 6 6 2 Changing PROFIBUS Mode of the Master Unit for a programming example 3 Aside effect of the default settings can be that the network is started right after downloading the parameters to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit After downloading the parameters the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM will restart the Unit and switch the PLC mode back from PROGRAM mode to the mode it had before downloading This can be RUN MONITOR mode The Auto CLEAR behaviour defines how the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will behave in case one of its allocated slave devices fails dur ing I O data exchange This
238. ial configuration files defining the configuration options for each device which is to participate in data exchange The files must be provided by the manufac turer of the device Two types of configuration technology exist e Configuration technology based on FDT DTM technology Configuration technology based on GSD files 1 2 2 FDT DTM Technology FDT DTM Technology FDT DTM Concept FDT Container Application Device DTM The newer configuration tools are based on FDT DTM technology The FDT DTM concept specifies the interfaces between the engineering sys tems called Field Device Tools FDT and the device specific software com ponents called Device Type Managers DTM The FDT DTM concept separates the device dependent functionality which is in the DTM from the application It provides separate interfaces for device configuration monitoring and maintenance solutions which before largely depended on the manufacturer of the application Because of this concept FDT DTM technology is not limited to PROFIBUS applications In concept any type of network can be configured and accessed provided the appropri ate DTMs are available A FDT container application facilitates configuration of network devices and parameterizing and or manipulating their operational modes All device dependent functionality is concentrated in the DTM FDT container applications can be stand alone tools or can be part of other engineering tools such
239. icating the location of the overlap The overlap is however not automatically corrected 2 Incase the entered mapping address is located outside the range of inter nal memory e g an input address of 256 or higher an error message is displayed and the change is reverted 3 Enabling Auto Addressing again will result in all changes being lost When enabling Auto Addressing a Warning message will be displayed notifying the user of these consequences The I O Modules list can be sorted for more convenient views Two options are available e Sort by station address Sorting by station address groups all I O modules for each slave device together This view is more convenient in case Auto Addressing is enabled e Sort by data address Sorting by data address lists the I O Modules in ascending order Input data first This view is more convenient in case Auto Addressing is dis abled and addresses have been changed manually 3 4 2 Diagnostics User Interface Diagnostics User Interface Opening the DTM Diagnostics User Interface 1 2 3 84 The C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM provides a second user interface to display the Diagnostics information available in the Unit This information concerns e Unit and PROFIBUS DP Interface status flags e Slave status flags In order to access the Diagnostics User Interface the DTM has to be on line i e a communication channel between the DTM and the PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Unit mu
240. ication 13 Specifications 10 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 dimensions 14 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 DTM 17 Address 138 Auto addressing 140 Auto Update 167 Auto CLEAR 139 Bus parameter 140 Changing mode 160 Diagnosis User Interface 167 Downloading the configuration 144 Error Log 172 Access from PLC program 174 Clearing 173 Concept 172 Detecting new errors 172 Reading 173 I O Mapping 141 Manual refresh 167 Master parameters 138 Master setup tab 138 Master Status 168 Monitoring 167 Reading the Master status 167 Slave status 168 Storing the configuration 144 Unit description 143 Unit firmware version 143 Unit number 138 Unit PLC behaviour 139 CX Profibus CD ROM 40 Default password 49 241 Device Catalogue See Device Catalogue DTM Window 51 Error Log Window 51 FDT Monitoring Window 51 Features 17 Generic slave DTM See Generic slave DTM Installation Procedure 40 Requirements 40 Login window 49 Main Menu 51 Main window 50 Master DTM See C200HW PRM21 DTM See CSI CJ1W PRM21 DTM Network Window 50 Specifications 19 Starting 49 Status Bar 52 Tool Bar 52 CX Server Configuring 142 CPU selection 142 Network type 143 Testing the setup 143 D Data conversion See I O data Types Conversion Device address 132 Device Catalogue Additional DTM Information 54 DTM group selection window 54 DTM window layout 53 Generating the Device Catalogue 49 Installing GSD files 55 Invoking 53 Mai
241. ice versa Refer to section 1 1 7 Network Operation Modes for more information on PROFIBUS operational modes The table below defines the behaviour in case the PLC changes to RUN MONITOR mode Keep Current Mode Unit keeps the current mode if the PLC goes to RUN MONITOR mode e g stay in CLEAR mode Go to OPERATE Mode The Unit goes to the OPERATE mode whenever the PLC default setting goes to the RUN MONITOR mode The table below defines the behaviour in case the PLC changes to PRO GRAM mode Keep Current Mode Unit keeps the current mode if the PLC goes to PRO GRAM modem e g stay in OPERATE mode Go to CLEAR Mode The Unit goes to the CLEAR mode whenever the PLC default setting goes to the PROGRAM mode Auto CLEAR defines the Unit s behaviour in case an error occurs in one of the allocated slave devices which causes it to stop data exchange with the Mas ter Unit If Auto CLEAR is enabled the Unit will automatically transition to the CLEAR state and force all its allocated slave devices to the safe state i e all outputs are set to 0 using the Global Control CLEAR command CS1 CJIW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Control Description Auto CLEAR Mode ON Selected Unit transitions to the CLEAR mode in the event of a network error e g because one or more configured slaves are not in the Data Exchange mode Auto CLEAR Mode OFF Selected Unit does not transition to CLEAR mode but
242. imum Slave Interval in milliseconds Target Rotation Time The anticipated time for one token cycle including allowances for high and low priority transactions errors and GAP maintenance Do not set the value below the calculated value to avoid bus communication interruptions Max Retry Limit 204 Maximum number of request transmission retries by this master if a device does not reply to a request Bus Parameters Appendix A Item Highest Station Address Symbol Description The HSA defines the Highest Master device address on the network of which the Master device will request the FDL status when updating the active device list See GAP Update Factor Shows the device address of the master If new slaves are added to the network this field shows the highest device address The Master will periodically check whether new active devices have been added between address its own address and the Highest Station Address If any devices are detected GAP is updated Permissible values are in the range of 0 to 126 Unit Editable by User GAP Update Factor The GAP update factor defines the amount of updates of the active devices i e Master devices list times during one token rotation cycle To update the list the Master device will transmit FDL_Status_request messages to ascending device addresses until it finds a next Master device or until it reaches the Highest Station Address S
243. in CLEAR o r OPERATE mode and exchanging data Lit Not a valid combination Flashing At least one slave device has responded to the master s request messages and is not in Data Exchange There is also at least one slave which has either e not responded to the master s requests messages or e been parameterized incorrectly Switch the Unit to OFF LINE mode Check the network wiring Check if any other faulty devices are on the same network Check if the slave parameter settings are correct Re download after correc tion Switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again Note The table above assumes that the RUN and the PRM LED indicators are ON and the ERH indicator is OFF Otherwise refer to section 7 2 2 Unit Start up Errors section 7 2 3 Unit Operational Errors or section 7 2 4 Unit Configura tion Errors Troubleshooting Using Error Status Section 7 3 7 3 Troubleshooting Using Error Status Error status in CIO Words The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit provides error status indications to the PLC CPU Unit in the Unit Status Word and the Master Status Word 2 which are part of the ClO Words 7 3 1 Unit Status Word The Unit status word CIO Word n 4 contains status and error indications on the Unit itself The figure below shows the Unit Status Word Layout The cor responding bit flag will turn ON if an error event has occurred 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 765 43 210 Word n 4
244. inated at both ends and must not contain network branches The total cable length of the bus depends on the cable and the selected baud rate Also RS 485 specifies a maximum of up to 32 devices master and slave devices per line segment If more than 32 devices are to be con nected or if the total length of the segment must be extended beyond its max imum repeaters must be used to link the separate segments 33 Setting up a Network Section 2 4 Note Repeaters are devices which connect two segments They do not have a device address of their own but they do count in the total number of devices in a segment Repeaters A maximum of up to three repeaters between two devices in a network can be used i e a network can consist of up to 4 segments The maximum number of PROFIBUS devices in such a network is then 122 The figure below shows an example of a two segment network Termination Termination Termination Repeater Tree Topology The use of repeaters allows the extension of three or more Linear Bus seg ments into a Tree topology In a tree topology more than three repeaters are allowed provided that there are no more than three repeaters between any two devices in the network The following figure presents an example of a net work with more than three segments and repeaters Segment 1 Segment 2 Max 31 stations Max 31 stations M S M S Segment 3 Max 28 stations v s
245. ing diagnos tics in module1 the next byte indicates pending diagnostics in module14 e Channel related diagnostics Two channel related diagnostics entries are shown One for module 1 and one for module 14 In module 1 Input channel 4 has detected an overload In module 14 channel 8 has detected an high limit exceeded event 217 Appendix 218 Appendix C I O Data Conversions C 1 I O Data type definitions Standard PROFIBUS DP defines two types of I O data e 8 bit bytes sized data e 16 bit word sized data The standard for PROFIBUS extension also referred to as PROFIBUS DPV1 defines the following additional data types e 8 bit byte signed unsigned Integer data e 16 bit word signed unsigned Integer data e 32 bit double word signed unsigned Integer data e 32 bit single precision floating point IEEE754 format e ASCII Text strings of indeterminate length in 8 bit bytes e 7 byte Date format e 6 byte Time of Day format e 6 byte Time Difference format The CS1 CJ1 series PLC defines similar data types which however differ in size and or storage format in the PLC memory Since the PROFIBUS DP Master Units provides an interface between a PROFIBUS network and the CS1 CJ1 series PLC the Unit will provide the necessary conversions to ensure that the I O data on the PROFIBUS network is transferred to the PLC memory in the correct format This Appendix explains the conversions in detail C 2 Integer Data C
246. ing effect e The slave device will continue to read its physical inputs but not send this data to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit e Instead it will continue to transfer the input data to the Master Unit from the moment the Global Control Freeze command was received e If a new Global Control Freeze command is sent the slave device will update its PROFIBUS input buffers only once with the most recent physi Operating the Network Section 6 6 Global Control Freeze subsequent I O data exchange messages cal input data and continue to transfer this data to the Master Unit with e If a Global Control Unfreeze command is sent the slave device will revert back to its original situation and transfer updated input information to the Master Unit with subsequent I O data exchange messages Note If a Global Control command contains both a Freeze and an Unfreeze com mand the Unfreeze will prevail The figure shown below illustrates the Freeze Unfreeze feature as imple mented by the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit command Global Control Freeze command Global Control Unfreeze command PLC Cycle Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction y Execution Execution Execution Execution Freeze Freeze Unfreeze transmitted transmitted transmitted PROFIBUS TRANSA NNN Cycle SSS i i i 1 I 1 1 I 1 I I 1 i I 1 I f 1 Slave PROFIBUS Input Buffers Slave
247. input from the DTM based on which the DTM will pro vide the necessary ActiveX windows In general multi language user interface windows including DTM specific Help files are supported by the DTM Data transfer to and from a DTM is provided using XML documents The XML documents are standardized for the communication between the FDT container application and for communication between DTMs An additional specification covers the definition of XML data formats for the transfer of application specific data such as PROFIBUS data In general a device configuration DTM is accompanied by a communication DTM This specific DTM facilitates device specific communication e g for downloading a configuration to a PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and or for retrieving monitoring information from PROFIBUS DP Master Unit It may incorporate the specific communication protocol or rely on other available drivers CX Profibus is a FDT container application Together with this container appli cation OMRON provides three DTMs e A DTM to facilitate configuration of the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Units e A DTM to facilitate configuration of the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Unit e A DTM to facilitate integration of GSD file based devices into CX Profibus see section 1 2 3 GSD file Technology for more information 1 2 3 GSD file Technology GSD file Technology GSD File Language The older and most commonly used configuration technology is the based on GSD
248. iojxi Device CJTW PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd OK Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number Ox0602 pac Hel Diagnostic Extended Diagnostics RE 0x05 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x0 Device related Non fatal PLC error Device related PLC in Monitor mode Connected Update The first row of the Extended diagnostics window contains the raw data as received from the slave device Depending on the GSD file it may provide text strings for each Extended diagnostics events entry i e if the event occurs and the diagnostics information is received by the DTM it can display a text string in stead of only the raw bytes This makes troubleshooting the device easier If the strings are not supported the user must determine the event from the raw data bytes 99 Generic Slave Device DTM Section 3 5 100 SECTION 4 Allocated CIO and DM Words This section describes the words allocated to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit in the CIO and DM Areas These words facilitate controlling the Unit and accessing the Unit and network statuses 4 1 Overview of Word Allocations 0 00 0c ccc eens 102 4 1 1 CIO Area Word Allocations 0 000 c ccc eens 103 4 1 2 DM Area Word Allocations 0 000 c eee 103 4 2 Allocated CIO Area Words 0 0 ene 104 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n 0 0 ce cee eee 105 4 2 2 Global Control Message Word n 2 0 0
249. ion algorithms The table below lists the parameters shown in the Bus Parameter tab Description Editable by User Profile Provides pre selected settings for either a PROFIBUS DP or a PROFIBUS PA Yes network The following selections are possible from the drop down list e PROFIBUS DP Default bit rate 1500 kbit s e PROFIBUS PA Default bit rate 93 75 kbit s Baud rate Defines the transmission rate on the PROFIBUS DP Network The following baud Yes rate values are defined by the PROFIBUS DP standard e 9 6 kBits s e 19 2 kBits s e 93 75 kBits s e 187 5 kBits s e 500 kBits s e 1500 kBits s default value e 3000 kBits s e 6000 kBits s e 12000 kBits s Slot Time The maximum time a Master Unit must wait for a response to a request message tp 7 Yes Min Station Delay The minimum allowed time for a slave device before it will generate a response to tpi Yes of Responders a request message Max Station Delay The maximum allowed time for a slave device to generate a response to a teit Yes of Responders request message Quiet Time The time a transmitting device must wait after the end of a message frame before tgit Yes enabling its receiver Setup Time The time between an event and the necessary reaction teit Yes Station Address This value defines the device address of the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master unit Permissible values are in the range of 0 to 125 An attempt to change the
250. ion of the product 1 2 3 Indicates various lists such as procedures checklists etc Trademarks and Copyrights PROFIBUS PROFIBUS FMS PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS PA are trademarks of PROFIBUS International Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Explorer and ActiveX are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Sycon and CIF are trademarks of Hilscher GmbH Other product names and company names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies The copyright of the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit belongs to OMRON Corporation OMRON 2004 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS About this Manual ccccccccvcccscesccscecsecs X PRECAUTIONS 24
251. ion on error indications in the PLC refer to the CS1 Series CPU Unit Operation Manual W339 or the CJ Series CPU Unit Operation Manual W393 for more details The error determination procedure uses the table below To determine the error e First find the status of the RUN LED indicator left column e Move one column to the right and find the ERH LED indicator status e Move one column to the right and find the ERC LED indicator status The probable error causes are then listed to the right of the third column 177 Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators Section 7 2 Unit Start up Errors RUN Not lit ERH Not lit ERC Not lit Probable cause Power is not being supplied to the CPU Unit or the power supply voltage is too low Correction Supply power Make sure that the correct voltage is being supplied The CPU Unit or Backplane is faulty Replace the CPU Unit or the Backplane The mounting screws on the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit are loose CS Series or the sliders are not properly locked into place CJ Series Tighten the mounting screws to the speci fied torque CS Series or lock the sliders into place CJ Series The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is faulty Replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Lit The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is faulty COMM LED indicator is also flashing Replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Not lit The I O tables are not registered in the CPU Unit Reg
252. ional action must be taken to initiate I O data exchange e g reset the device after a malfunction Configuration fault 190 The I O configuration sent by the Master Unit is rejected by the slave device The Parameter request used LED indicator will also be ON e Check the selected I O modules in the Slave DTM Make sure they match the expected total I O number and sequence e Consult the operation manual of the slave device Check if additional modules must be selected e g empty i O modules for power modules in a modular slave Troubleshooting the Network Section 7 4 LED Indicator Extended diagnostics received Description Correction The slave device has returned extended diagnostics information This does not necessarily indi cate a malfunction The Master DTM does not display the extended diagnostics returned by a slave device Open the associated Slave DTM to check on the contents of the extended diag nostis Function not supported The Master Unit has sent a message to the slave device which is not supported by that device Invalid slave response This bit is set by the Master Unit if the slave has returned an invalid response to a master request message Parameter fault The parameters sent by the Master Unit are rejected by the slave device The Parameter request used LED indicator will also be ON e Check the common parameter settings in the Slave DTM Make sure the parameters are
253. ister the I O tables The same unit number is being used on another Unit as well Correct the unit number Make sure that all unit numbers used in the system are unique The PLC CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem per sists replace the CPU Unit Lit Not a valid combination at startup 178 Not lit Not lit Unit is functionally correct If there are still problems check on the other LED indicators Lit During startup the checksum of the Error Log stored in non volatile memory was found to be corrupted Send a ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS com mand to the Unit Restart the Unit During startup the checksum of the Param eter sets stored in non volatile memory was found to be corrupted Re download the Parameter sets from CX Profibus or the Memory Card If the problem persists replace the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit During startup the Parameter set stored in non volatile memory was correct but the contents contains errors preventing the PROFIBUS interface to be initialized cor rectly Check the Parameter set in CX Profibus and re download the Parameter sets from CX Profibus If the problem persists replace the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit Memory in the CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem per sists replace the CPU Unit The CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem per sists replace the CPU Uni
254. ith requesting the slave diagnostics data When continuing sending I O data exchange data the slave s diagnostics data will not be updated Control Description Continue if slave not The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will continue to send I O responding data exchange messages when the slave device fails to respond The diagnostics data of the slave will not be updated Abort if slave not The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will abort the data responding exchange with the slave device and continue to send diagnostics request message to the slave until it responds The diagnostics data of the slave will be updated accordingly Note A slave s failure to respond during I O data exchange will always be reported to the PLC CPU by resetting the corresponding Slave Data_Exchange Active flags in the CIO Words see section 4 2 8 Slave Data_Exchange Active Flags Word n 9 to Word n 16 If Auto CLEAR has been enabled the failure to respond will result in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit switching to CLEAR mode based on this CIO flag 94 Generic Slave Device DTM Section 3 5 Diagnostics Update Delay DPV1 Tab Note The Diagnostics Update Delay defines the number of PROFIBUS DP cycles during which the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will ignore diagnostics message returned from the slave containing the Prm_Req flag This flag indicates that the Master Unit should re parameterize the slave but in the case of reduced performance slave devices the re
255. iting of specific bus parameters Slave area setup The Slave area setup allows the user to define the I O Data map ping of the I O Data from each of the slave devices on to the PLC memory areas Monitoring functions Master status read out Slave status and slave diagnostics read out Read out of the Unit s error log Support functions Context sensitive help functions Multi language support H O o a a z I A O Bus parameter setup The bus parameter setup allows the selection of baud rate and cal culation and editing of specific bus parameters Address mapping setup The address mapping setup shows an overview of the mapping of the I O data of each Slave on to the Units memory The mapping can be accomplished automatically but the function also allows editing of individual address mappings Monitoring functions e Master status read out e Slave status read out Support functions e Context sensitive help functions e Multi language support Generic Slave DTM General functions The Generic Slave DTM reads the contents of a specific GSD file located in a special sub directory and displays the setup options to the user It supports e GSD file revisions 1 and 2 PROFIBUS DP functionality e GSD file revisions 3 PROFIBUS DPV1 functionality I O configuration setup The I O configuration setup function allows e Selection of device address e Enable di
256. ium Ill or higher 500 MHz minimum e Operating System Windows 2000 SP2 Windows NT 4 0 SP6 Windows XP e RAM 256 MB minimum e Hard disk space 256 MB minimum e Graphics resolution 1024 x 768 pixels minimum e Serial port RS 232C COM1 to COM4 supported e CD ROM drive e Communication cable Cable CS1W CN226 to connect to the peripheral port on the CPU Not included with CX Profibus 3 1 2 Installation Procedure CX Profibus CD ROM 40 Note This section explains how to install the CX Profibus Configuration software and its components for the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit CX Profibus is provided on a CD ROM which contains the following compo nents e Microsoft NET Framework e CX Profibus FDT Container application e CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Configuration DTM e CX Server to allow communication between the PC and the PLC e C200HW PRM21 Configuration DTM e Generic Slave Device DTM to allow slave configuration using GSD files e Additional GSD files for several OMRON slave devices 1 Provided with the CD ROM is a 16 digit installation key which can be found on a label on the CD ROM box The key is unique to the CD ROM and is required to allow full installation of the software The key is also used as reference when registering the purchased software with OMRON 2 If during installation the 16 digit License code was not entered the pro gram will run in demo mode i e it provides all functionality but for a limited pe
257. ived OFFLINE indicator will be ON by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Most likely causes e Lost token messages the token is not returned To correct this e Check the master devices on the network and make sure they are all working cor rectly e After correction switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again Double master address error ON A second master device with the same network address has been detected on the OFFLINE indicator will be ON PROFIBUS network The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has switched to OFF LINE To correct this e Check the master devices on the network and ensure that they have unique device addresses e After correction switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again Hardware error ON A hardware error has occurred in the PROFIBUS interface of the Unit The PROFI OFFLINE indicator will be ON BUS DP Master Unit has switched to OFF LINE Most likely causes Faulty wiring Broken messages Short circuits or Faulty bus timings A master device has been detected beyond the Highest Station Address HSA To correct this Check the network wiring and make sure it is correct Check for short circuits Check the bus timing set through CX Profibus Check if any other faulty devices are on the same network After correction switch the Unit to CLEAR OPERATE mode again Auto Clear enabled ON This combination indicates that one of the slave devices on the network failed caus CLEAR ON ing an aut
258. ividual bytes Supported Time of day format contains time since midnight Supported Time difference format is the same as Time of day format but contains a time difference Supported Single 16 bit integers are transferred to memory words in PLC memory Supported Data is stored with the Least Significant Word at the lowest address Supported Data is stored with the Least Significant Word at the lowest address Supported First characters are stored at the lowest address String is padded with a zero byte or a zero word depending on the number of characters Supported First bytes are stored at the lowest address String is padded with a zero byte or a zero word depending on the number of characters Not Supported Date Time format is transferred to PLC memory as string of words Not Supported Time of day format is transferred to PLC memory as string of words Not Supported Time difference format is transferred to PLC memory as string of words I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 6 5 4 Exchanging I O Data over PROFIBUS PLC Cyclic Refresh vs PROFIBUS I O Exchange Cycle PLC Cyclic Refresh Rules PROFIBUS DP Cycle gt PLC Cyclic Refresh The cyclic refresh cycles of the PLC CPU and the I O data exchange cycles of the PROFIBUS network are two asynchronous processes for which the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit performs the interface function In gen
259. larm of each type x T Pull Plug alarm Manufacturer specific alarm I Process alarm I Status alarm Tl Diagnostic alarm Update alarm Extra Alarm SAP Alarm Acknowledge via SAP 51 Alarm Acknowledge via SAP 50 OK Cancel Apply Help 95 Generic Slave Device DTM CS ection 3 5 Enable DPV1 This checkbox enables or disables the DPV1 functions for the specific slave device The Master DTM will clear this setting prior to download Max Channel Data Length This parameter defines the maximum size in bytes of the acyclic message exchanged with the PROFIBUS DPV1 Master Unit The size ranges from 4 bytes to 244 bytes The actual upper limit of the number is defined by the buffer capacity of the slave device Max Alarm PDU Length This parameter defines the maximum size of an Alarm message sent from the slave device to the PROFIBUS DPV1 Master Unit The Master Unit uses this number to reserve buffers to handle the alarms The maximum alarm mes sage size ranges from 4 bytes to 63 bytes Alarms The Alarms box defines the types of alarms the slave device will report as well as the alarm handling capacity of the master device The settings in this box are conveyed to the slave device through the Set_Prm message sent by the PROFIBUS DPV1 Master Unit Control Description Alarm mode The Alarm mode indicates to the slave device the amount of alarms the PROFIBUS DPV1 Master Unit can process simultaneously The
260. learing error log Changing the master state CX Server could not be config Configuration of CX Server failed Make sure the settings within the ured Device Set up tab are correct Select the Test Button to check this Make sure the Personal Com puter COM port selected within the Device Set up Configuration is not in use by another applica tion If it is close the connection from within the other application Restart CX PROFIBUS Restart Personal Computer to ensure COM port is released Ensure the correct version of CX Server is installed on the Personal Computer Refer to the Master Manual for installation details When the problem has been removed perform one of the fol lowing successfully to confirm the problem has been solved Select the Configure Button in the Device Set up tab Select the Test Button in the Device Set up tab CX Server could not be initialized Initialization of CX Server was not Ensure the correct version of CX possible Server is installed on the Personal Computer Refer to the Master Manual for installation details DTM cannot configure the con This may be caused by required Make sure the correct version of the nected unit DTM needs to be function which are not supported by DTM is being used If it is not then upgraded the DTM install the correct version and reat tempt download 226 Configurator Error and Warning Messages D 4 Error Messages System
261. les from a slave device the deleted I O modules will leave gaps behind in the already existing I O mapping If after deleting an I O module a slave device still has more than one module configured but these mod ules are not in the same place the DTM will attempt to remap them together Changing the address of a slave device of which already an I O mapping exists has no effect on the existing mapping Selecting an additional I O module for a slave device in the presence of already allocated I O modules will cause a complete re map of all exist ing modules if the total I O does not fit within the space it is already occu pying The modules are re mapped to the next available location in the area leaving behind a gap in the existing I O mapping Subsequent I O modules of other slave device will remain mapped as before the module addition When moving an I O module from one area to another they can be located anywhere with in the target area They are not re mapped to the start of that When moving an I O module from one area to another the module leaves behind a gap in the I O mapping of the first area 1 Gaps in the I O mapping still contribute to the total size of an area al though they do not contain valuable data They therefore decrease the to tal I O capacity of the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and unnecessarily occupy PLC memory 2 Inthe I O data exchange with the PLC CPU these gaps will contain zeros 149
262. llowing personnel who must also have a knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON PROFIBUS Master Units Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during opera tion It is extremely important that all PLC Units be used for their specified pur poses and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affe
263. locate each Input Output area to PLC memory When setting up the network i e selecting the slave devices and I O modules per slave all input modules will by default be allocated to Input area 1 all output modules will be allocated to Output area 1 The following rules apply when allocating the I O modules to the areas e I O modules are mapped starting at the lowest address of an Input Output area e I O modules are mapped in ascending order according to slave device address e I O modules per slave device are mapped in the order in which they were selected when setting up the slave device Furthermore Input area 1 is by default mapped to ClO 3300 whereas Output area 1 is by default mapped to CIO 3200 145 I O Communication Characteristics Example Auto Addressing 146 Section 6 5 The default mapping algorithm is illustrated in the figure below with the fol lowing configuration e Slave device 1 One input output module one output modules e Slave device 2 One input module e Slave device 3 One output module e Slave device 4 Two input modules PLC CPU Unit PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Slave 1 Module 1 Slave 1 Module 2 Slave 3 Module 1 Output area Output area i CIO 3200 Output area 1 Output area 1 CIO 3400
264. mand is supported by the Unit 10 Command for The command is longer than the max per Check the command format of the command mat error missible length and set it correctly The command is shorter than min permis Check the command format of the command sible length and set it correctly 11 Parameter The first word is in an inaccessible area or Set a first word that is in an accessible area error the bit number is not 00 The bit number must be 00 for Ethernet Units Parameters are set incorrectly in the com Check the command data and correct any mand data parameters that are incorrect e Non specified code used e Invalid slave address exceeds 125 e Invalid code in program number exceeds 128 e The number of read records is 0 22 Status error A FINS command was sent to retrieve Change Master mode to either CLEAR or operating mode slave data but the Master Unit is in the OPERATE before re sending the FINS com disagreement wrong mode to access the slave device mand 25 Unit Error An attempt to clear the Error Log failed Re send the ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS com mand If the problem persist non volatile mem ory may be corrupted Replace the Unit 26 Environment A FINS command was sent to enable or No need to sent the FINS command again error no such Unit disable a slave device from the poll list but unless a change to the slave state needs to be the targeted slave is already in that mode
265. mand too large 1002 110C e Invalid start address code word non specified code used e Invalid target slave address exceeds 125 2208 Unit is not in correct mode e g it is in OFF LINE or STOP mode Initiates a state change within the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit This command will enable a pre allocated slave device in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The targeted slave device will be added to the Unit s list of active devices and will be parameterized by the Unit The configured slave devices are by default enabled but can temporarily be disabled i e removed from the active device list see 5 2 3 STOP 0402 The targeted slave device is defined by the device code in the command 04 01 Command Station code code Mode 04 0i Command End code code Device code command Defines the slave device to be enabled state as follows High byte Always set to 81 Hex Low byte 00 7D Hex Defines the slave device network address Mode command Always set to 01 Hex 121 Command Response Reference Section 5 2 Response Codes 5 2 3 STOP 0402 Command Format Response Format Parameters Response Codes 122 Note The following end codes can be returned by the Unit in response to the RUN command 0000 Normal 0203 Slave device not allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master 0402 Service not supported by Unit model version 1001
266. meter fault Station deactivated Master lock Extended diagnostics overflow The upper half of the window the Slave Status Flags box presents the sta tus of each slave device using coloured LED indicators The colours are listed in the table below Indicator Slave Status Colour Associated device does not exchange Diagnostics with this Master Unit i e e Slave not allocated to this Master Unit or e Device is this Master Unit or e Device is another master device Example figure Slave device 0 is not allocated The slave device is not communicating with the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit It may be disconnected or the Master is in OFF LINE or STOP mode Example figure Slave device 6 is not responding The slave device is communicating with the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit but it is not in Data Exchange due to incorrect parameter set tings See the slave diagnostics for more information The slave device is in data exchange with the PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Unit but it has reported diagnostics data See the slave diagnos tics for more information Example figure Slave device 14 has returned diagnostics The slave device is in data exchange with the PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Unit No diagnostics reported Example figure Slave device 2 is in I O data exchange Any other colour than green or grey indicates that new diagnostics have been received from the associated slave device since the last time th
267. mode is changed to PROGRAM mode Refer to section 6 4 1 Setting the Master Parameters for more information 161 Operating the Network Section 6 6 6 6 3 Transmitting Global Control Commands Global Control commands O Data Synchronization Note Group Address Setting Note Setting the Group Address of a Slave Device Freeze Unfreeze commands 162 The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units support the transmis sion of Global Control commands These messages are unconfirmed broad cast messages i e the slave devices do not send a response message which can be used to synchronize I O data related events two more slave devices Two types of synchronization can be achieved 1 Synchronization of input data The inputs on one or more slave devices are read at the same time The synchronized data is transferred to the Master Unit during the next I O data exchange cycle The commands are defined as Freeze and Unfreeze 2 Synchronization of output data The outputs on one or more slave devices are set at the same time The synchronized data has been transferred to the slave devices during the previous I O data exchange cycle The commands are defined as Sync and Unsync 1 The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit also uses Global Control commands to broadcast its own operational mode to other devices on the network These Global Control commands are sent automatically without user interference e to all devic
268. n components 53 Open 129 Updating 55 Device DTM 7 Device profile 4 Diagnostic functions 5 Diagnostics Channel Related 5 Device Related 5 Module Related 5 Diagnostics Update Delay 95 DM Area See I O Allocations DM Area Downloading the configuration 18 242 Index DTM non GSD based 129 E EC Directives Low voltage EN 61131 2 1994 A12 2000 xvi EMC Directives EMI directive xvi EMS directive xvi Environment 11 Error codes 197 Error log 196 Adding records 196 Clearing 196 Error codes 197 Error log location 196 Error log records 196 Logged errors 196 Reading Error log 196 Error messages Communication 225 Configuration 224 231 233 System 227 Error on Cyclic Data Exchange 94 Exchanging I O data 153 I O response time 155 Minimum I O response time 157 PLC cycle time performance 155 PLC cyclic refresh 153 PLC vs PROFIBUS 153 154 F Fail safe 6 94 FDT DTM Communication DTM 8 Device DTM 7 DTM properties 8 DTM versus GSD file 9 FDT Container application 7 FDT DTM Concept 7 FDT DTM technology 7 User interface 8 XML based data transfer 8 FINS communication Command codes 118 Command reference CONTROLLER AREA READ 0501 123 ERROR LOG CLEAR 0203 125 ERROR LOG READ 2102 123 MEMORY AREA READ 0101 120 RUN 0401 121 STOP 0402 122 Message communication 118 Response codes 118 Sending using CMND 119 Troubleshooting 198 Fre
269. n input mail box The input mailbox does not contain a response message to a com mand message issued with lOWR The input mailbox contains a response message to a command mes sage issued with lIOWR Network state Offline Communication with all DP participants is stopped Stop Only communication with DP Master class 2 is possible Clear The master tries to set parameters check configuration and per form data exchange with its associated DP slaves the slaves inputs are transferred to the input buffer their outputs are cleared Operate The master exchanges data with the assigned DP slaves Error number Error numbers CIO n 3 contains error messages related to either a specific slave device or the Unit itself For detailed error code refer to the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Operation Manual W349 E2 Station address The Error number is related to a specific slave device as indicated by the station number The Error number is related to the Unit itself 238 Message length Unit number When CIO n 2 13 is set Reply in output mailbox this ClO word con tains the length of the message that can be retrieved with an IORD instruction Combined with the Unit number this constitutes the correct source information for the IORD instruction Refer to the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Operation Manual W349 E2 C200HW PRM21
270. nction Any errors related to the PROFIBUS DP Master function are collected in the Master status 2 word 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 Word n 5 Unit in OPERATE mode Unit in STOP mode Unit in CLEAR mode Unit in OFFLINE mode Unit in Data Exchange Auto Clear enabled Unit contains a valid configuration 110 Allocated CIO Area Words Section 4 2 Word n 5 n CIO 1 500 25 x unit number Bit Name Unit in OPERATE mode Status Controlled by Unit operation Indicates that the Unit is in OPERATE mode In OPERATE mode the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will parameterize all allocated slave devices and commence I O Data Exchange Indicates that the Unit is not in OPERATE mode Unit in STOP mode Indicates that the Unit is in STOP mode In STOP mode the Unit will be ONLINE connected to the network but not communicate with its slave devices Indicates that the Unit is not in STOP mode Unit in CLEAR mode Indicates that the Unit is in CLEAR mode In CLEAR mode the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will parameterize all allocated slave devices If this is accomplished successfully it will read all input data of the allocated slave devices but it will send zeros or empty output messages to all slave devices Indicates that the Unit is not in CLEAR mode Unit in OFF LINE mode Indicates that the
271. nd Not allowed Not allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed send commands Export to HTML Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Properties View only View only Edit Edit Edit Open Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Device settings View only View only Edit Edit Edit Go online Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Monitoring Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Add DTMs Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Allowed Allowed Delete DTMs Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Allowed Allowed Properties View only View only Edit Edit Edit Export to HTML Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Change password Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Allowed H a S n iv a a a gt m LL O a o Generic Slave DTM Network Management 59 CX Profibus Section 3 2 User Management Changing Access Rights Changing the Passwords 60 To change access rights or to change the passwords for the various access levels first login into the Administrator level This allows you to select the Tools User Management option from the main menu in CX Profibus Other access levels do not have access to this menu option The selection opens the User Accounts window as shown below IT x IV Observer Change password IV Operator Change password IV Maintenance Change password I Planning Engineer Change password Administrator Cha
272. nding related to configuration module 3 Module 4 Diagnostics When set this bit indicates that there is Diagnostics information pending related to configuration module 4 Module 5 Diagnostics When set this bit indicates that there is Diagnostics information pending related to configuration module 5 Module 6 Diagnostics When set this bit indicates that there is Diagnostics information pending related to configuration module 6 Module 7 Diagnostics When set this bit indicates that there is Diagnostics information pending related to configuration module 7 Consecutive bytes contain the diagnostics flags for Module 8 through 15 16 through 23 etc The Module related diagnostics information is usually followed by the Channel related diagnostics which con tain the actual diagnostics data per module Channel Related Diagnostics Channel related diagnostics contain diagnostics information related to a specific channel in a configured I O module e g over peak current detected on current input channel 2 module 0 The Channel related diagnostics information entry in the diagnostics message always consists of three bytes which are outlined below From these bytes the actual event can be deducted 214 Appendix 76543210 Module Identifier byte 1 0 Module number 7 6543210 Channel Identifier byte Channel n
273. net Explorer 5 01 is also required Connection to CS1 CJ1W PRM21 e Peripheral or RS 232C port of PC with PLC CPU Serial commu nications mode Peripheral bus Host Link Toolbus supported by CX Server Communication cable Cable CS1W CN226 to connect to the peripheral port on the CPU Not included in package Operating environment Connection to C200HW PRM21 e RS 232C port of PC with Configuration port on the Unit General Project functions File handling CX Profibus supports overall handling of project files as well as network data e New Start a new project e Open Open an existing project file e Save As Save a project file e Export Export project data to HTML e Properties Edit project property information User management Functionality of CX Profibus can be limited as defined by several password protected access levels e Administrator Planning engineer Maintenance Operator Observer Network setup functions CX Profibus provides network tree view from which hierarchy between Master and slave devices can clearly be distinguished The following network functions are available e Network DTMs i e devices can be added or deleted using drag and drop from the Device Catalogue Network DTMs can be copied and moved from one location to another in the network view DTM names can be edited by the user Any change to the parameters of a DTM is clearly marked in the tree view until
274. nge password Help Cancel By selecting the check box next to a level the Administrator can grant access rights to CX Profibus i e the checked levels can start and access CX Profi bus If a check box is not selected the corresponding level can not be used to start CX Profibus and it will not appear in the drop down list in the login win dow For example in the window below the Observer and Maintenance levels are unchecked x I Observer word IV Operator Change password I Maintenance Change password I Planning Engineer Change password Administrator Change password Help Cancel The next time CX Profibus is started the Observer and Maintenance access levels are not available in the login window as shown below CX Profibus Login x User Administrator SE Administrator Operator we core The Administrator level has always access and can not be disabled in the User Accounts window In order to change a specific password select the Change password button in the User Account window next to the related access level The level must be enabled by selecting the check box to the left of it Pressing the Change password button opens a window allowing the entry of a new password As CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 an example the window below shows the Change password window for the Planning Engineer You can now enter the new password confirm it by
275. nit is 0 oooo00 4200 11 SET 000000 P_First_Cycle W0 00 Go to OPERATE First Cycle Flag o00001 W0 00 1505 05 1505 01 1500 00 1504 01 SET 000002 AF a H 1500 00 Set OPERATE Go to Valid Cfg STOP Set No errors OPERATE mode OPERATE 1505 03 1 oT OFFLINE mode 1505 00 W0 00 RSET 000002 000010 AF W0 00 Go to OPERATE OPERATE Go to mode OPERATE Note If an attempt is made to change the operational mode while a previous change command is still being processed the new command is ignored and the Mode command error bit flag bit 12 in the Master Status 2 word CIO word n 6 see section 4 2 5 Master Status 2 Word n 6 will be set Indirect Mode Changes The Unit s operational mode can also be changed in indirect ways i e without direct user or program interference e Mode changes caused by Auto CLEAR When the Auto CLEAR function has been enabled and one or more of the slave devices on the network stop I O data exchange the Master Unit s operational mode will automatically change from OPERATE to CLEAR This is discussed in section 6 6 4 Using Auto CLEAR e Mode changes caused by PLC mode changes An operational mode change will take place if the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit has been configured to change its operational mode together with the PLC mode i e OPERATE when the PLC mode is set to RUN MONI TOR and CLEAR mode when the PLC
276. nnectcom 2 rooms E E o A o maca roms T T f O Connect com 4 Make sure that the serial cable is attached between the PC s Serial COM Port then in the driver window select the Connect button associated with the COM Port to which the C200HW PRM21 is connected If connection is successful the Error Field next to the selected button will remain 0 The other fields will contain Name and Version information of the firmware on board the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Device Assignment CIF Serial Driver x m Driver Description Device Driver EF Serial Driver Cancel m Board Selection Name Type Version Date Error M com2 Si Connect COM 2 rems oo FO Coeg roms ft Connectcom4 In case of connection error the Error Field will contain an error code which can be used to determine the communication problem Refer to Appendix G 3 CIF Driver error messages for descriptions on most common driver er ror numbers To assign the driver to the selected port and C200HW PRM21 the check box to the left of the COM Port must now be selected after which the OK button must be pressed to close the window 87 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 Downloading Parameters In order to download the parameter sets to the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit perform the following sequence 1 2 3 1 Select the DTM in the network view
277. nostics Depending on the type of slave device it may additionally send Extended diagnostic bytes in a format defined in the PROFIBUS standard The Extended diagnostics usually contain device specific diagnostics informa tion The Extended diagnostics information is displayed in the Extended Diagnostics tab of the Diagnostics User Interface Updating the Diagnostics The Diagnostics User Interface contains two tabbed windows It also contains an Update button which will when pressed refresh the diagnostics data by retrieving it from the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit A Green LED indicator in the lower left corner will indicate whether or not the device is on line Diagnostics Tab The Diagnostics tab displays basic diagnostics for the slave An example of the Diagnostic tab is shown below The diagnostics information is displayed 97 Generic Slave Device DTM Section 3 5 as red and green LED indicators Red LED indicators refer to error events Green LED indicator refer to status situations Device CJ1wW PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number 0x0602 Diagnostic Extended Diagnostics Station Status __ Master lock W Slave deactivated Parameter fault W Sync Mode W Invalid slave response ka Freeze Mode W Function not supported Watchdog on Extended diagnostics Slave device Configuration fault W Static diagnostics W Station not ready WW Reparameterization requested W Station no
278. ntain a readable string in the PLC memory the data is converted to fit the odd character in the Most Significant Byte of the words and the even characters in the Least Significant Byte of the words The string is stored on ascending word addresses in PLC memory The figure below illustrates the conversion PLC Data area PROFIBUS Bit 07 Bit 00 Char 1 Char 2 Bit 15 Bit 00 Word 0 Char 1 Char 2 ASCII Text string Char n 1 Word m Char n 1 Note m n 1 2 rounded to the next lowest integer If the number of text characters is even all bytes will fit in the words but one additional word will be set to 0000 If the number of bytes is odd the last byte of the sequence will be mapped to the high byte of the last word The low byte of the last word will be padded with a 0 C 5 Date Clock Time Data Conversions Date Time and Time Difference data types as defined in PROFIBUS are not supported by the CS1 CJ1 series PLC To ensure that workable data is transferred from PROFIBUS to the PLC memory these data types are treated as 16 bit word data The figure below illustrates the conversion PLC Data area PROFIBUS Bit 07 Bit 00 Byte 1 MSB Bit 15 BitOO op Time ms Byte 2 LSB Word 0 Byte 1 MSB Byte 2 LSB Word Byte 4 Word 2 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 5 Time min Time hrs Date day of week month Word 3 Date and Time information is coded as defined by the PROFIBUS DP st
279. o a hand Left clicking the mouse will then transmit FINS mes sages to retrieve the diagnostics data of the specified slave device The retrieved information is displayed in the Slave Diagnostics Data area The data displayed is the same as displayed with in the Diagnostics User Interface of the Generic Slave DTM Refer to section 3 5 2 Diagnostics User Interface for an explanation of the LED indicators Error History Tab The Error History tab lists the contents of the Error Log stored in the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit The Error History tab is shown below ipl x Monitor Online Operations Close Master Status Slave Status Error History Base Help Detail Content ime Automatic 03 Mar 04 17 26 49 00219 0x0000 PROFIBUS hardware error 0 Manual Maximum Log Capacity 80 Clear The Error Log entries are described in section 7 5 2 Error Codes Refer to this section for details Clear Button Pressing the Clear Button initiates an ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS command All error messages in the Unit and the displayed list will be cleared Online Operations The Online Operations tab is the second main tab in the DTM Diagnostics Tab User Interface It contains the necessary controls to e Switch the Master Unit to PROFIBUS Operational modes e Select one or more groups and Global Control Commands and transmit Global Control message over the PROFIBUS network 74 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master D
280. o continue CX Profibus x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for CX Profibus The InstallShield Wizard will install CX Profibus on your computer To continue click Next 8 After the welcome window the window containing the License statement for CX Profibus is displayed The License window is shown below Please read the License carefully before selecting the Yes button to accept the License If the License is not accepted by selecting the No button the installation will be terminated CX Profibus x License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement IMPORTANT By installing this package you agree to be bound by the following Software License Agreement If you do not agree please return the enclosed software Software without installing this package to the shop where you bought the Software The warranty service set forth in Section 7 of the Software License Agreement and any Please promptly fill in the card and send it to OMRON Corporation x Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No the setup will close To install C Profibus you must accept this agreement InstallShield lt Back o 42 Installation ction 3 1 9 After accepting the License statement the window below is displayed to allow you to enter your name your Company name and the 16 digit L
281. o on The bit will be set to off if an Unfreeze command has been received Diag Sync_Mode If the slave device has been set to the Sync mode using the global command this bit will be set to on The bit will be set to off if an Unsync command has been received Reserved This bit is reserved Diag Deactivated This bit is set by the Master Unit indicating that the slave device has been dis abled i e using the STOP FINS command The slave device is allocated to the Master Unit but removed from cyclic processing 211 Appendix Slave Diagnostics Byte 3 A layout of Byte 2 is shown below This byte is mapped to the high byte of Word D 1 7 65 43 2 10 Byte 3 Diag Ext_Diag_Overflow Description Reserved These bits are reserved and always set to 0 by the slave device Diag Ext_Diag_Overflow If set this bit indicates that there exists more diagnostic information than speci fied in Ext_Diag_Data This bit will for example be set if the slave device has more diagnostics available than it can enter in its send buffer This bit will also be set if the Master Unit receives more diagnostic information than it can enter in its diagnostic buffer Slave Diagnostics Byte 4 Slave Diagnostics Byte 4 is mapped to the low byte of Word D 1 This byte contains the PROFIBUS address of the Master Unit which parameterized the slave If the slave is not
282. og to detect failures of the master or the bus If data communication with the master does not occur within the set watchdog time interval a slave automatically switches its outputs to the fail safe mode Also access protection is provided for the inputs and outputs of the slaves operating in multi master systems Only authorized masters can access their slaves 1 1 7 Network Operation Modes PROFIBUS DP distinguishes four different network operation modes OFF LINE e Communication with all PROFIBUS DP participants masters and slaves is stopped The Master ceases to access the PROFIBUS network STOP e Communication between the master and its slaves is stopped Only com munication between the master and other masters is still possible CLEAR e The master tries to set parameters check the configuration and perform data exchange with its associated slaves Data exchange involves read ing the inputs of the PROFIBUS DP slaves and writing zeros to the out puts of the slaves OPERATE e The master exchanges data with its assigned slaves inputs are read and outputs are written Also the master cyclically sends its local status to all its assigned PROFIBUS DP slaves using a broadcast message The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will always be in one of these four modes Mode transitions from one mode to another will be performed via intermediate modes For example a mode transition from OFF LINE to OPERATE will be performed as OFF LINE STOP
283. ogramming Device e Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device e Force setting resetting bits from a Programming Device e Transferring I O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to the CPU Unit e Transferring I O memory from a host computer or from another PC ona network Execute online edits only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable 4 Operating Environment Precautions N Caution Do not operate the Unit in the following places Z Caution e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidities outside the range speci fied in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem perature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salt e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation e Locations near to power supply lines The operating environment of the PLC system can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system Unsuitable operating
284. omatic transition to the CLEAR mode Slave Diagnostics received ON Check the Monitor Slave Status tab to see which slave failed OPERATE ON The Master Unit is still in OPERATE mode but not exchanging data with all its slave Slave Diagnostics received is devices One or more of the slave devices on the network failed ON Check the Monitor Slave Status tab to see which slave failed Data Exchange OFF Auto Clear enabled OFF Troubleshooting the Slave If the Master Status tab indicates problems related to slave devices their sta Devices tus can be obtained by checking the Slave Status tab The figure below shows this tab As an example a failure of slave device 2 is shown 189 Troubleshooting the Network Section 7 4 wt 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Diagnosis 0 x Close r Refresh m Monitor Online Operations Master Status Slave Status Error History Sl lave Status Flags IV Automatic 0123456789 0123456789 w OO OOO00O 073 OOOO000000 Merial 110000000000 s QCOOOOOCO0O0 22 QQQQQQ0Q0Q00 ws 0000000000 333 QQQQQQQQQQ 10109 QQQQQ00000 449 QOQQOQQQQQQQ 1119 QQQQQQ00000 5159 QQQQQQQ0QQQ 1213 QOOOCOO 8069 OOOOOCO000 Slave Diagnostic Data Selected Slave 2 Ei New Diagnostics Received Parameter request used Static diagnostics Station non existent Station not ready O Configuration fault Station type Extended diagnostics received Watchdog On
285. ome of these parameters it is not recommended to do that Making the wrong configuration may lead to unex pected behaviour An example of the Bus Parameter tab is shown below ixi Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK Baud Rate 1500 kBits s x Cancel m Optimize Help by standard by user Slot time 300 tBit Min Slave Interval 5694 tBit 3 7960 Min Slave Interval ms Min Station Delay of Responders fi 1 tBit Max Station Delay of Responders fi 50 tBit Quiet Time 0 tBit Target Rotation Time Max Retry Limit Setup Time 1 tBit Highest Station Address GAP Update Factor 1 Poll Timeout Data Control Time Watchdog Control 20 ms The baud rate has been set to 1500 kBit s The amount of slaves and the amount of I O data results in a poll cycle time of approximately 3 8 ms Min Slave Interval After making the changes select the Save button in the lower right corner of the user interface to accept the changes Next select the Slave Area tab to display the I O Mapping Configuring the Master Section 6 4 6 4 3 Defining and Changing I O Mapping Example Note A Caution The I O data of all slaves can be mapped on to the PLC memory areas through two Output Ares and two Input Areas The Output data can be distrib uted over two Output Areas each of which can be mapped on to PLC mem ory Similarly the Input data can be distributed over two Input Are
286. on 0 000000 6 3 2 Setting Parameters E eee ee eee 6 3 3 Selecting the Group Assignment 00 Configuring the Master 0 0 c ee eee eee 6 4 1 Setting the Master Parameters 000 000000005 6 4 2 Setting the Bus Parameters 00 00 0000 6 4 3 Defining and Changing I O Mapping 6 4 4 Configuring CX Server 0 0 0 0 cee eee ees 6 4 5 Downloading the Configuration 000 I O Communication Characteristics 00 0 2 cee eee eee 6 5 1 I O Data Configuration 00 00 eee eee eee 6 5 2 Mapping I O Data 2 ees 6 5 3 Supported Data Types 0 0 00 eee eee eee 6 5 4 Exchanging I O Data over PROFIBUS 6 5 5 PLC Cycle Time Performance 00000 6 5 6 I O Response Time 00 0 eee ee eee 6 5 7 System Startup Time 0 0 0 eee eee Operating the Network 0 0 00 0 cece eee ee eee 6 6 1 User Access to the Network 0 00 0 00 00 e eee eee 6 6 2 Changing PROFIBUS Mode of the Master Unit 6 6 3 Transmitting Global Control Commands 6 6 4 Using Auto CLEAR 00 0 eee eee Monitoring the Network 0 0 0 0 cece cette nena 6 7 1 Monitoring the Master Unit and the Network 6 7 2 Monitoring Slave Status 00 00 00 02 eee eee eee 6 7
287. on to lock Slider gt Zz oo AE an ENKI Broren Seu eF Tagg SOCK ae ram TT Release eaS Te in Ca a La PERIPHERAL _ e o lt A BUS PAE our T 20 2 AG2AOV a 0 fa aa S ZA 2 If the sliders are not securely locked the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit func tions may not operate correctly To dismount the Unit move the sliders to the Release direction Note 2 3 Initial Setup Procedure After mounting the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to its PLC System the follow ing Initial Setup Procedure must be applied to allow the Unit to start up prop erly and to be configured for operation e A unique unit number must be selected before the PLC s power supply is turned on e An I O table must be created in the PLC in order to register the Unit on the PLC CPU 31 Initial Setup Procedure Section 2 3 2 3 1 Selecting a unit number 1 Make sure that the PLC Power Supply is turned OFF before setting the Unit number 2 Setthe switch to the desired unit number Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit number is factory set to 0 Make sure that the unit number is unique on the PLC i e there must be no other CPU Bus Units with the same unit number 3 Turn ON the PLC Power Supply After setting the unit number the PLC CPU must now register the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit by creating an I O table 2 3 2 Creating an I O table Connecting a
288. on 6 5 Enable Disable Auto Addressing 1 2 3 Z Caution Note O Mapping Without Auto Addressing Note The example shows that the sequence of slave addresses is maintained the sequence of I O modules selected is maintained and the I O modules are allo cated to the lowest address of the area The Auto Addressing feature can be disabled in the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Mas ter DTM In order to do that perform the following sequence Open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Configuration User Interface Select the Master Setup tab 3 Enable Disable Auto Addressing by selecting deselecting the Auto Ad dressing checkbox in the Support box 4 When Auto Addressing is being enabled a warning message is displayed informing the user of the effects of enabling Auto Addressing Enabling Auto Addressing has the immediate effect of re allocating I O mod ules of an existing configuration within each Input Output area The I O mod ules are re mapped according to the algorithm described above Disabling Auto Addressing has no immediate effect on an existing I O map ping A disabled Auto Addressing feature has the following effects on I O mapping e When adding new slave devices or new I O modules to an existing slave configuration the I O modules will be mapped to the first I O areas but the modules will be appended to the existing I O mapping e When deleting a slave device from the network configuration or deleting I O modu
289. on Identifier a 1 word In Out OxFO 2 words In Out OxF1 4 words In Out OxF3 8 words In Out OxF 1A minrds In Nut X afl Insert Append Configured Modules fst Module Name Module Configuration Identifier Remove The DTM Configuration User Interface displays two lists e The Available Modules list which contains the I O modules the user can select 133 Configuring the Slave Devices Section 6 3 e The Configured Modules list which contains all the I O modules selected by the user Adding Inserting I O To select the I O modules perform one of the following procedures Modules e Select the I O module that needs to be added in the Available Modules list and double click it with the left mouse button If more than one mod ule must be added repeat this step for the other modules e Select the I O module that needs to be added in the Available Modules list and press either the Insert or Append button This method allows selection of more than one module by pressing either the Shift or the Ctrl key on the keyboard while selecting the modules Note 1 When pressing the Insert button the selected I O module will be inserted above the selected module in the Configured Modules list 2 The selected I O modules are sent to the slave device in the same se quence as selected in the user interface Depending on the device the se quence may be checked by the slave device If an incorrect sequenc
290. onents Invoking the Device Catalogue DTM Window Layout DTM List Window Note The Device Catalogue is one of the main components in CX Profibus Its main functions are e to maintain a list of installed DTM and GSD files e to provide convenient sorting and categorizing of the list e to allow updating the list after installation of new DTMs or GSD files e to provide detailed information on selected DTMs The main layout of the Device Catalogue is shown below Device name File date DTM categories Version number Vendor name He Device Catalogue oj x g Device Types F Vendors 58 Brooks Instrument Lg Groups ABB IMDPOT V2 4 2000 07 24 Deutschmann Automation Gmb Ld Protocols Senor B 1998 08 12 ABB DRIVES 2 ABB PSR A 2000 07 24 ABB DRIVES E C200HW PRT21 V1 0 2000 04 20 OMRON Corporation Hg CB_AB32 DPS Version 1 001 1998 07 01 Hilscher GmbH CIFIO4P DPS Version 1 000 2002 06 04 Hilscher GmbH CIF30 DPS CIFIO Version 2 011 2000 03 09 Hilscher GmbH CIF50 DPS Version 1 000 2000 03 03 Hilscher GmbH CIF60 DPS Version 1 000 2000 03 09 Hilscher GmbH 2 CIF80 DPS Version 1 000 2002 06 04 Hilscher GmbH 2 CIFPS1 DPS Version 1 010 2000 03 09 Hilscher GmbH S Cliw PRM21 PRO 3 62 2003 10 31 OMRON Corporation 2 CJIW PRT21 v1 0 2002 06 25 OMRON Corporation COM C DPS Version 1 000 2002 06 04 Hilscher GmbH he COM DPS Version 2 010 2000 03 09 Hilscher GmbH E Compact Sla
291. onfiguration options into an FDT Container application like CX Profibus The GSD files are stored in a separate sub directory under CX Profibus Upon updating the Device Catalogue the Generic Slave Device DTM will scan this sub directory and present an entry in the Device Catalogue for each of the GSD files found Upon adding the GSD based slave device to the network an instance of the Generic Slave Device DTM will be made in the PC memory which will read the GSD file contents The instance of the Generic Slave Device DTM will pro vide the user interface necessary to make the settings for the associated slave device 3 5 1 Configuration User Interface Opening the The configuration DTM is opened by Configuration DTM e Selecting the slave DTM entry in the Network Window and double click ing the left mouse button e Selecting the slave DTM in the Network Window and right clicking the mouse From the context menu select Configuration The slave DTM Configuration User Interface which is displayed in the CX Profibus DTM window is shown below The figure shows the user interface for an OMRON CJ1W PRT21 PROFIBUS DP Slave Unit By default the Configu ration tab is opened lolx Device CJTW PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident Number 0x0602 Configuration Parameter Group r Device Settings Station Address fe IV Enable watchdog control Watchdog Interval 200 ms m Module Configuration
292. onversions 8 bit Byte Data The CS1 CJ1 series PLC memory layout is word oriented and does not support storage of single 8 bit byte data types The PROFIBUS DP master will therefore convert a stream consisting of one or more bytes of data into words The figure below shows the conversion in graphic format PLC Data area PROFIBUS Bit 15 Bit 00 Word 0 Byte 2 Byte 1 f i Bit 07 Bit 00 Word m Byte n Byte n 1 EON to Byte n 1 Byte n Note m n 1 2 rounded to the next lowest integer A sequence of bytes transmitted over the PROFIBUS network is copied to the PLC memory in the following procedure e The first two bytes are stored in the lowest word of the destination data block in PLC memory word Every consecutive two bytes are stored in the next higher words 219 I O Data Conversions Appendix C e Odd byte numbers are copied to the Least Significant byte of a PLC memory word e Even byte numbers are copied to the Most Significant Byte of a PLC memory word e If the total number of bytes is an odd number the Most Significant Byte of the last word is filled with 0 16 bit Word Data 16 bit word data is transferred over the PROFIBUS network with the Most Significant Byte first The PROFI BUS Master Unit will ensure that a word transmitted or received over PROFIBUS is mapped to one word in the PLC memory area The figure below shows the conversion in graphic format PLC Data area PROFIBUS Bit 07 Bit 0
293. option can be enabled if the application in which the Master Unit is used warrants safety precautions to be taken to prevent unexpected behaviour of the application If Auto CLEAR has been enabled the Master Unit will automatically transition to the CLEAR state and set the allocated slave device outputs to the safe state Refer to section 6 6 4 Using Auto CLEAR for a description of how to use the Auto CLEAR function 139 Configuring the Master Section 6 4 Auto Addressing Auto Addressing defines whether or not the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM will automatically map the I O data in such a way that no gaps exist in the I O data If enabled the user does not need to handle the exact mapping of I O data on to the PLC memory areas Refer to section 6 4 3 Defining and Changing I O Mapping for more information on I O data mapping After making the changes select the Save button in the lower right corner of the user interface to accept the changes Next select the Bus Parameter tab to display the Bus Parameters 6 4 2 Setting the Bus Parameters Example 140 A Caution The Bus Parameter setup tab contains all the settings required to setup the communication cycles on the network The settings depend on the selected baud rate the number of slaves the amount of I O data per slave etc By default the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM will calculate the bus param eters based on this information Although the user can decide to modify s
294. ore than 500 kbit s Except at end devices with ter mination it is recommended to always use plug connectors that permit two data cables to be connected directly to the plug This method allows the bus connector to be plugged and unplugged at all times without interrupting data communication between other devices 2 4 2 Bus Termination Termination Resistors In order to minimize cable reflections and ensure a defined signal level on the data lines the data transfer cable must be terminated at both ends with a ter minating resistor combination The bus termination diagram is shown on the left The bus terminator connects the two data lines via a 220 ohm resistor which in turn is connected to VP 5Vdc and DGND via two 390 ohm resistors Pow ering the terminator resistor via VP 5V and DGND ensures a defined idle state 220 Ohm Network potential on the data lines To ensure the correct functioning up to the highest baud rate the bus cable must be terminated at both its ends v _ 390 Ohm B Line A Line 390 Ohm A missing bus termination can cause errors during data transfer Problems can also arise if too many bus terminators are fitted since each bus termina DGND tor represents an electrical load and reduces the signal levels and thus the signal to noise ratio Too many or missing bus terminators can also cause 35 Setting up a Network Section 2 4 Network
295. orm one of the following actions e Select the DTM in the Network View e Select the Device Go Online option from the main menu or the DTM context menu or e Select the A button from the Tool Bar 2 Acommunication channel will be opened through CX Server The name of the DTM in the Network View window will turn to Italic font to indicate that the Unit is on line 3 From the context menu select the Diagnosis option The DTM s Diagnos tics User Interface will be displayed C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 3 4 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM C200HW PRM21 Master To allow configuration and data monitoring for a C200HW PRM21 from within DTM CX Profibus a C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM is available which can be operated from CX Profibus The C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM has two main user inter face components e DTM Configuration User Interface This user interface facilitates configuration of the Master Unit e DTM Diagnostics User Interface The DTM Diagnostics User Interface facilitates Unit status determination and the slave status determination This section provides an overview of the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM and discusses both user interfaces 3 4 1 Configuration User Interface The configuration DTM is opened by e Selecting the C200HW PRM21 Master DTM in the Network Window and double clicking the left mouse button e Selecting the Master DTM in the Network Window and right
296. oubleshooting Using LED Indicators 7 2 1 LED Indicators This section presents a number of easy to use procedures to troubleshoot possible errors using the LED indicators on the front of the Unit see figure below CS1W PRM21 CJ1W PRM21 PRM21 RUN ERC PRM COMM ERH BST BE The possible errors which could occur have been categorized and for each category a group of two or three LED indicators can be used to troubleshoot the problem e Unit start up errors These include errors in the PLC CPU as well as errors in the Unit which prevents the combination from starting up correctly Use RUN ERC and ERH indicators to troubleshoot the errors e Operational errors These include PLC errors PLC Bus errors and error log problems all during operations Use RUN ERC and ERH indicators to troubleshoot the errors e Configuration problems These include errors during or after downloading a new configuration as well as errors in the configuration after startup Use ERC and PRM indica tors to troubleshoot the errors e I O data communication errors These include errors in the PROFIBUS interface or on the network Use BST COMM and BF indicators to troubleshoot 7 2 2 Unit Start up Errors Unit start up errors are errors which occur at starting up the system and which prevent the Unit from functioning correctly in the PLC system Usually these errors also cause the CS CJ PLC CPU ERR ALM indicator to be lit or flashing For more informat
297. p to 16 more serious system errors are also copied to non volatile memory When adding a new record to the error log and the error log is full the latest error will replace the oldest error in the log At power up reset the non vola tile error log will first be copied to the volatile error log The contents of the non volatile error log will be corrupted if the Unit is inter rupted i e power down reset while writing to the error log If an error in the non volatile error log is detected at power up reset the Unit 1 Will try to repair the contents of the error log 2 If the log remains corrupted the Error Log Storage Error bit in the Unit Sta tus Word CIO Word n 4 Bit 13 will be set In this case the error and the flag can only be cleared through the FINS command ERROR LOG CLEAR The start up procedure will be completed normally If during normal operation writing errors to the error log fails the Unit will set the Error Log Storage Error bit in the Unit Status Word CIO Word n 4 Bit 13 n CIO 1500 25 x unit number The error records in the error log can be read with the FINS command ERROR LOG READ The error log can be read from the PLC via CX Profi bus and via CX Programmer Sending the FINS command ERROR LOG CLEAR to the Unit clears both the non volatile and the volatile error logs See 5 2 5 ERROR LOG READ 2102 and 5 2 6 ERROR LOG CLEAR 0203 7 5 2 Error Codes Troubleshooting Using the
298. parameters can be tuned by the user However this is not recommended since the communication may not function correctly due to incorrect settings or too small timing margins This appendix defines the parameters which are shown by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit DTM and provides the formula used for the timing calculations A 2 Bus Parameter definitions The figure below shows the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit DTM Bus Parameter tab in which the bus parameter settings can be made am 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Configuration 5 x Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK Baud Rate 1500 kBits s Cancel m Optimize Help C by standard by user Slot time 300 tBit Min Slave Interval 5966 tBit Min Station Delay of Responders 11 tBit Min Slave Interval 3 9773 ms Max Station Delay of Responders 150 tBit Target Rotation Time er 44 tBit Quiet Time 0 tBit Max Retry Limit fi Setup Time 1 tBit Highest Station Address 7 GAP Update Factor 1 Poll Timeout 10 ms Data Control Time 140 ms Watchdog Control 20 ms 203 Bus Parameters Appendix A The table below defines the bus parameter settings options shown in the figure The Unit tg 7 is defined as the transmission time for one bit at the selected baud rate Baud rate Description Defines the transmission rate on the PROFIBUS DP Net work The following baud rate values are defined by the PROFIBUS DP standard 9
299. perational status of the Master Unit They indicate whether the Master Unit is in OFFLINE mode e STOP mode e CLEAR mode or in e OPERATE mode The Data Exchange LED indicates if I O data exchange is taking place with at least one slave device The Auto Clear enabled LED and Valid Configuration LED provide feedback on the I O configuration downloaded to the Unit Example The figure below shows an example of the Master Status tab in the case of a fully functional network i e there are no errors and all slave devices are exchanging I O data with the Master Unit wt 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Diagnosis 5 x Monitor Online Operations Master Status Slave Status Error History Slave Status Slave Status Overview 168 Auto Clear Enabled Valid Configuration Master Status 2 oO Disturbed Bus Error PROFIBUS Protocol Error Double Master Address Error CQ Hardware Error O Mode Command Error Parameter Error Error Log Updated oO Parameter Storage in Progress Slave Status Slave Diagnostic Received a Slaves in Data Exchange r Refresh m Master Status 1 r Unit Status Boece OPERATE Unit Error O STOP Master Error CLEAR Local Parameter Storage Error OFFLINE Local Parameter Load Error File Read Error Data Exchange Unit Memory Error The Slave Diagnostics Received LED indicates if any of the allocated slave device
300. procedure permits the master currently in pos session of the token to access its assigned slaves The figure below shows a possible configuration The configuration shows three active devices masters and six passive devices slaves Overview of PROFIBUS Section 1 1 Multi peer Communication Broadcast Communication Multicast Communication Token Passing Eg ER g Active stations Master devices Polling vy Passive stations Slave devices PROFIBUS The three masters form a logical token ring When an active device receives the token message it can perform its master role for a certain period of time During this time it can communicate with all assigned slave devices in a mas ter slave communication relationship and a DPM2 master can take the initia tive to communicate with DPM1 master devices in a master master communication relationship In addition to logical peer to peer data transmission PROFIBUS DP provides multi peer communication broadcast and multicast In the case of broadcast communication a master device sends an unac knowledged message to all other devices masters and slaves In the case of multicast communication a master device sends an un acknowledged message to a predetermined group of devices masters and slaves 1 1 5 Diagnostic functions Extensive Diagnostics Device Related Diagnostics Module Related Diagnostics Channel Related Diagnostics Extensive diagno
301. put Area 2 CIO ModuleName 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 2 1 words output 2 2 words output 2 words output 4 words output 4 words output 4 words output 4 words output Swords output 8 words output 3 2 bytes output No consiste 4 1 words output N N CiO ModueName 3209 8 words output xl 3409 xl Area clo v Occupied 0015 Words Area cio T Occupied 0002 Words Start Address 2200 Start Address a400 Length 100 Length fico ompre Ad 10 x OK Cancel Help Save 67 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Allocation Areas Module List Box I O Mapping Areas Note The Slave Area allocation tabs define how the I O data of each of the slave devices is mapped on to the PLC memory The Slave area tab contains two tabs one for Output Allocation and one for Input Allocation Each tab contains an overall module list showing all the output or input data per slave along with the Module names sizes data types and start addresses This data has been transferred to the Master DTM by each of the allocated slave DTMs If no slave devices have been allocated or configured the list will be empty The Module List Box list contains the following information refer to figure above the table applies to the lists in the Input and Output Allocation tab
302. put Area 2 Module Name 3201 3401 2 2 words output 3202 3402 2 words output 3203 2 4 words output 3403 3204 4 words output 3404 3205 4 words output 3405 3206 4 words output 3406 3207 3 2 bytes output No consiste 3407 3208 3408 3209 z 3409 xj Note Auto addressing is disabled Output module 2 of slave device 2 was moved to Output area 2 location CIO 3401 leaving behind a gap in Output area 1 Since gaps in the I O mapping are generally undesirable the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM provides a means to remove all gaps after finalizing the I O mapping procedure This removal is accomplished by compressing the I O modules in a particular area Compressing re allocates all I O modules in an area as close to the start of the area as possible Compressing an area does not change the sequence of the slave devices and or the I O modules It only removes the unused mem ory gaps Compressing can be initiated for each area individually In order to compress an area perform the following sequence 1 Open the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Configuration User Interface and select the Slave Area tab 2 Select the Output Allocation tab or the Input Allocation tab to display the areas to compress 3 To compress the area press the Compress button at the bottom 4 After finalizing the compress action select the Save button at the lower right corner to save the changes made I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5
303. r CX Server version has been installed the installation will be performed The window shown below 45 Installation Section 3 1 will be displayed prompting the user for a selection of language to be used with CX Server Choose Setup Language xj Select the language for this installation from the choices below Cr Caca 17 After selecting the language and pressing the OK button the welcome and licence window shown below will be displayed Please take note of the rec ommendations and make sure all other windows programs are closed be fore continuing Welcome x Welcome to the CX Server Setup program This program will install C Server on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law 18 After pressing the Next button the user is prompted for the directory in which to install CX Server Press the Next button to continue with the de fault directory or the Browse button to select another directory Choose Destination Loc
304. r a PLC connected online In this example a Programming Console is used for creating the I O table For an explanation of how to create an I O table using a CX Programmer refer to the CX Programmer User s Manual Use the following procedure to create the I O table Setting up a Network Section 2 4 Note Initial screen Password e or fi Save or clear the CPU Bus Unit System Setup After creating the I O table the Unit is ready to be configured for first use on the PROFIBUS network After mounting the Unit and starting it up for the first time the Unit s Configu ration is empty This will cause the red ERC LED on the front of the Unit to be switched ON In this situation the Unit can still be configured 2 4 Setting up a Network 2 4 1 Network Structure Communication Medium Note Linear Bus Topology The PROFIBUS standard defines the use of EIA RS 485 as the main commu nication transport medium The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is designed to interface directly to this type of medium This section will discuss the setup of networks based on this medium The other communication medium specified for PROFIBUS is optical fibre The PROFIBUS DP Master Units does not provide a direct interface to this type of medium However by using third party couplers an interface between EIA RS 485 and optical fibre networks can be made PROFIBUS DP defines the use of the Linear Bus Network Topology The Bus must be term
305. r on the front of the CPU Unit will light and flash once The MCPWR Indicator will remain lit while the data is being read The Indicator will go OFF after the data has been read properly During the Data Transfer the PRM LED on the front of the Unit will flash and the Parameter Transfer in Progress bit in Unit Status Word CIO Word n 4 will turn ON 5 Restart the PLC er ON Note 1 Data will not be read from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit if pin 1 of the DIP switch is ON write protecting program memory 2 ACS1 H CJ1 H or CJ1M CPU Unit will remain in PROGRAM mode after the simple backup opera tion has been performed and cannot be changed to MONITOR or RUN mode until the power supply has been cycled After completing the backup operation turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit change the settings of pin 7 and then turn the power supply back ON 6 File backups may take from several seconds to several minutes Refer to CS CU series Programming Manual W394 for information on execution times 7 If an error occurred in the transfer from the Memory Card to the Unit the File Read Error bit in Unit Status Word CIO Word n 4 bit 09 will turn ON To correct this re perform the Restore action If the problem persist use CX Profibus to download the original settings from the PC 230 Appendix F Application Notes F 1 Introduction This appendix contains an application note regarding the use of a special ladder program to dete
306. rall sys tem conforms to EMC standards Applicable EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility and EMI Electromagnetic Interference standards in the EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility standards are as follows CS1W PRM21 EN 61000 6 2 2001 EN 61000 6 2 2001 CJ1W PRM21 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives xvi Units that meet EC directives also meet the common emission standard EN50081 2 The measures necessary to ensure that the standard is met will vary with the overall configuration You must therefore confirm that EC direc tives are met for the overall configuration particularly any radiated emission requirement 10 m SECTION 1 Features and Specifications This section provides an introductory overview of PROFIBUS its functions and how to setup and configure a network It also addresses the PROFIBUS DP Master Units and the configurator their features and specifications 1 1 Overview of PROFIBUS 00 0000 eee ee eee 2 l l Introductloniis iic3 sie E a bcs bb eee derek wee 2 1 1 2 PROFIBUS Communication Protocol 0 2 L 1 3 Device Types 5 2 63 5dicn seb gabe seeds see Aaa eee 4 1 1 4 Bus Access Protocol 0 0 0 0 0 eee cee cee eee 4 1 1 5 Diagnostic functions 00 00 eee eee eee 5 1 1 6 Protection Mechanisms 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee ee 6 1 1 7 Network Operation Modes 0 0000 e eee eee 6 1 2 Setting up a PROFIBUS DP Network 0 00 000
307. rds I J 1 The allocated DM words are not used by the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit However exchange of data to the allocated DM words is reserved for fu ture use and it is therefore not recommended to use the allocated DM words for other purposes 2 The allocation scheme as shown above does not apply to the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Word allocations for this Unit are list ed in section G 2 Word allocations Overview of Word Allocations Section 4 1 4 1 1 ClO Area Word Allocations Software switches PROFIBUS DP Master Unit status and Slave Status data are allocated in the CIO Area according to the unit number as shown below Software switches are bits used as commands from the PLC CPU to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to enable executing Unit functions Unit number Allocated words er Allocated words CIO 1500 to CIO 1524 CIO 1700 to ClO 1724 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 CIO 1725 to ClO 1749 CIO 1550 to ClO 1574 CIO 1750 to ClO 1774 CIO 1575 to ClO 1599 CIO 1775 to ClO 1799 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624 CIO 1800 to CIO 1824 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649 CIO 1825 to ClO 1849 CIO 1650 to ClO 1674 CIO 1850 to ClO 1874 N OO oOo AJOJN oO CIO 1675 to ClO 1699 4 1 2 DM Area Word Allocations CIO 1875 to ClO 1899 The DM area words which are allocated for the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit are not used i e no data is exchanged between an allocated DM area and the Unit How
308. refresh time ms CS1 CJ1G H CPU 0 5 0 001 x the number of I O words See notes 0 3 0 001 x the number of I O words See notes 0 5 0 001 x the number of I O words See notes CS1 CJ1H H CPU CJ1M 1 The number of words refreshed is the total number of words in the I O area that are used by the slave devices including any unused words that may be present in I O mapping gaps refer to section 6 5 2 Mapping I O Data 2 The number of words refreshed also includes the 25 CIO status and com mand words 3 If FINS message communications is being performed add the number of words used in the message communications to the above number of words when messages are being processed 4 For details about cyclic refresh time or PLC cycle time refer to operation manual of the PLC To avoid missing input data or output data the PLC cyclic refresh time must be at least 3 ms I O Response Time The maximum I O response time is defined as the time from the moment an input on a slave device with the lowest PROFIBUS address is switched ON OFF until the moment the output on a slave device with the highest PROFI BUS address is switched ON OFF The figure below shows the timing in case the PROFIBUS DP cycle gt PLC cyclic refresh PLC Cycle Instruction Execution Instruction Execution Instruction Execution Instruction Execution Instruction Execution Instruction Execution Instruction Exec
309. rify that the Bus parameter sets are cor rect e Re download the configuration e lf the problem persists replace the Unit The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is in either OFF LINE or STOP mode e The BST LED indicator is OFF The Unit may have been configured to maintain its current mode last mode was OFF LINE during download The BF LED indicator is ON A PROFIBUS interface error has occurred see Master Status 2 error flags CIO Word n 6 bit 00 03 see Note for details Determine the mode of the Unit Check the Master Status 1 Word CIO Word n 5 bit 00 to bit 03 see Note If Unit is in OFF LINE or STOP mode e Verify that the master does not use the same address as another Master Unit on the network Otherwise correct the Master Unit s PROFIBUS address Set CLEAR or OPERATE switch in ClO Word n see Note Change the configuration to set the Unit OPERATE mode when switching the PLC to RUN MONITOR mode see Master DTM Master Setup Tab Download the configuration and switch the PLC to RUN MONITOR mode Network cabling is not correct e BF LED indicator is ON e Master Status 2 error flag may provide more information CIO Word n 6 bit 00 03 see Note CIO Words n 9 to n 16 show which slaves have problems Verify that the network installation is correct e Verify that all slaves are powered up and functioning correctly Verify that all slave devices are correctly connected to the network
310. riod of 30 days After this period has expired the License code must be provided to the program to allow continuation of use 3 During the limited period of 30 days the valid License code as shown on the CD ROM case can be entered at anytime when the program is running by selecting the License button in the About dialog window 4 Administrator rights are required to install CX Profibus 5 The operations and displays shown in the following procedure may differ slightly depending on the version of Windows software being used The displays for Windows 2000 are shown here Installation ction 3 1 1 2 3 1 Exit all other Windows based programs 2 Insert the setup disk CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 3 Double click Setup exe The setup program for CX Profibus will start A progress dialog window is dis played indicating progress of the setup as the program is loaded InstallShield Wizard CX Profibus Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will gn guide you through the program setup process Please wait Configuring Windows Installer 4 During the preparation the InstallShield wizard will determine if the Mi crosoft NET framework needs to be installed This package is required during installation and for executing CX Profibus If already installed the installation will be skipped and the process will proceed with step 7 Instal lation of the Microsoft NET framework first displays the License sta
311. s Column Description Addr Station address on the network obtained from the slave DTM Index Index number of the I O module Device Device name obtained from DTM Module System generated name Size Module data size unit of type mentioned in next column Type Module data type e g Byte Word etc Addr Mapped address area in PLC memory For example ClO3200 equals CIO Area start address 3200 Each Output Input Allocation tab also contains two areas on to which the I O data can be mapped The areas will in turn be mapped to the PLC memory By default all data is mapped to Area 1 in order of ascending slave device address 1 When mapping the modules are copied from the module list to the map ping Area and not moved This means that the module list acts as a re source for the two Mapping Areas below the module list 2 When adding removing slaves modules and Auto Addressing has been enabled the modules in the Areas will be remapped This usually results in I O data being re mapped Therefore it is recommended to select all slaves and modules before setting up the PLC memory mapping configuration Z Caution The default mapping of areas on to the PLC memory is the same default map Mapping Area Controls 68 ping as used in the CS1 CJ1W DRM21 Devicenet Master Slave Unit Care should be taken to avoid data overlap if such a Unit is part of the same PLC CPU system as the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS
312. s FINS Command Codes Response Codes Note FINS Factory Intelligent Network Services commands are message service communications commands developed by OMRON for Factory Automation control devices They do not depend on a particular transmission path and can be used for reading from and writing to PLC memory or the Unit s mem ory sending or receiving acyclic messages over a network or for controlling various operations The FINS communications can be issued from a CPU Unit Special I O Unit or host computer and they can also be sent to any of these The specific com mands that can be sent depend on the destination When the source of the commands is a PLC CPU Unit the FINS commands are sent by means of CMND 490 For details on FINS commands refer to the Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 The C200HW PRM21 does not support FINS commands Command codes are represented by a 2 byte hexadecimal code FINS com mands always begin with a 2 byte command code any parameters required follow the command code The response code consists of a 2 byte hexadecimal code indicating the results of command execution The first byte provides the main response code MRES which classifies the results the second byte provides the sub response code SRES which contains details about the results 5 1 2 Command Code List The command codes listed in the following table are supported by the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit A PL
313. s The header byte indicates the type of diagnostics data and the total length of the data block The header byte layout is shown below 212 Appendix 5 43 2 1 0 OIN olo Block Length Description Block length These bits contain the length of the Device related diagnostics data block includ ing the header byte The Device diagnostics will follow this header byte Maximum length of the block including the header is 63 bytes Interpretation of the diagnostics bytes in this block is device dependent Reserved Fixed to 00 The combination of bit 6 and 7 indicate the type of diagnostics i e 00 indicates Device related diagnostics data Note The Device related diagnostics as defined above is according to the PROFIBUS DPVO standard With the release of the PROFIBUS DPV1 standard the Device related diagnostics contents has been re defined to accommodate diagnostics from slave devices supporting PROFIBUS DPV1 Module Related Diagnostics The Module or Identifier related diagnostics data block consist of a header byte followed by one or more bytes containing flags which indicate if there is diagnostics pending related to the I O configuration modules Each flag is related to the corresponding I O module defined during configuration Non used flags are always set to 0 The figure below shows the header byte and one module diagnostics byte Depending on the
314. s for the case in PLC Cyclic Refresh which the PROFIBUS DP I O data exchange cycle lt PLC cyclic refresh Unit requests Unit requests Unit requests cyclic refresh cyclic refresh cyclic refresh Unit requests Unit requests cyclic refresh cyclic refresh PLC Cycle Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction y Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution CIO Refresh Output data refresh Input data refresh Cycle Cycle Cycle Cycle Cycle Cycle Cycle Cycle PROFIBUS DP I O data exchange cycle lt PLC cyclic refresh results in the following I O transfer characteristics e All output data sent by the PLC CPU is transmitted over the PROFIBUS network e Not all Input data is transferred to the PLC CPU referring to the figure above Input data marked with 1 1 I 4 I 6 and I 8 are lost Note To prevent input data not being transferred to the PLC CPU the PLC cyclic refresh time must be at least two times the PROFIBUS DP cycle time 154 I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 6 5 5 PLC Cycle Time Performance Note Note 6 5 6 PROFIBUS DP Cycle gt PLC Cyclic Refresh The cyclic refresh time is the time required for I O data to be exchanged between the PLC CPU Unit and the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The PLC CPU Unit cyclic refresh time is increased when a PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is mounted as shown below PLC CPU type PROFIBUS DP Master Unit cyclic
315. s group address and the command e g Freeze Sync These two parameters must be entered in Global Control command word CIO Word n 2 see sec tion 4 2 2 Global Control Message Word n 2 After setting these parameters the Global Control command must be trans mitted over the PROFIBUS network This is accomplished by setting the Transmit Global Control command bit bit 04 in the Software Switches 1 word CIO Word n see section 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n Setting this bit will transmit the message only once After transmission has been completed bit 04 in the Software Switches 1 word will be reset again PLC User Program Transmitting a Global Control command from a PLC user program can be accomplished using the steps described above Example Below is an example ladder program which transmits one Global Control Freeze command to Group 2 The unit number for the example Unit is 0 164 Operating the Network Section 6 6 000000 wae 1500 00 1800 04 MOv 000000 t oy 0002 Send OPERATE Transmit Freeze mode GC 1500 Set Group Address command SET 1502 11 Set Freeze cmd bit CX Profibus 1 2 3 Note SET 1500 04 Transmit GC command RSET wo 01 Send Freeze CX Profibus also provides a means to transmit Global Control commands from the PC through the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface Online Operations tab This
316. s has been downloaded to the Unit To correct this Check the parameter settings in CX Profibus and correct them if necessary After correction perform a download of the new parameters to the Unit 185 Troubleshooting the Network S CS ection 7 4 7 4 Troubleshooting the Network 7 4 1 Troubleshooting Parameter Download Errors in Slave Parameter Sets Errors when Establishing Communication Errors During Download Recovery After Failing Download 186 The PROFIBUS Master DTM provides clear error messages if downloading of the parameters to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit fails Failure can be due to either e Errors or inconsistencies in the slave parameter sets which are checked prior to download e The Master DTM being unable to establish communication with the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit e A communication interruption of the process during download The error messages displayed will provide a clear indication of the problem A download initiated by the user starts with a check on the slave parameter sets The Master DTM will check e The total number of slave devices assigned which must be at least one slave device e The total number of I O modules per slave which must be at least one I O module per slave e The maximum size of the I O data size which must not exceed 7168 words e The maximum number of I O modules which must not exceed 4000 e Any existing overlap in the I O Areas configured
317. s in the Unit input buffer See m 9 C200HW PRM21 Notes Appendix G DM Function Value Description word Input Area 2 Size See m 10 Slave status data mapping 0001 User defined mapping Area defined by DM m 15 Other Default mapping to CIO0200 to ClO0215 Start address in user defined mapping mode Area size 16 words 0000 to 5984 D00000 D05984 A000 to A220 ClO0000 ClO0220 A300 to A496 C100300 ClO0496 B000 to B084 HR000 HR084 C000 to C048 ClO1000 ClO1048 Other Default mapping to CIO0200 to ClO0215 Data Exchange procedure 0000 Fieldbus cycle asynchronous with PLC cycle Default The fieldbus cycles are triggered independently i e asynchro nous of the PLC cycle providing optimal I O response time when the PLC cycle time is at least twice the fieldbus cycle time Fieldbus cycle synchronous with PLC cycle The fieldbus cycles are triggered at the end of an I O refresh and are therefore synchronised with the PLC cycle If the field bus cycle time exceeds the PLC program execution time the next fieldbus cycle will not be triggered until the completion of the next I O refresh This method ensures synchronization between PLC cycle and fieldbus cycle Note 1 Fatal PLC error handling asyn chronous data exchange mode CLEAR outputs All output data sent to the slaves will be cleared HOLD outputs All output da
318. s that the slave device has been disabled i e using the STOP FINS command The slave device is allocated to the Master Unit but removed from cyclic processing Sync mode When set to ON the slave device has been set to the Sync mode using the global com mand Freeze mode When set to ON the slave device has been set to the Freeze mode using the global com mand Watchdog on The watchdog has been enabled at the slave device through the appropriate setting in the parameterization message Slave device Indicates that the device is a slave device Static diagnostics When set the slave device reports static diagnostics i e the error event is serious enough that the diagnostics is continuously reported No data exchange will be performed Re parameterization requested When set the slave indicates that it requires a new parameter setting The slave device is not in Data_Exchange with the Master Unit The indicator remains ON as long as the slave device has not been parameterized successfully Extended diagnostics overflow 98 The slave device has more diagnostics to report than it can fit into its transmission buffer Diagnostics information is being lost Generic Slave Device DTM CS ection 3 5 Extended Diagnostics The Extended Diagnostic tab contains any extended diagnostics reported by Tab the slave device The figure below shows an example of Extended diagnos tics
319. s the following services e Set_Prm e Chk_Cfg e Slave_Diag e Data_Exchange e Global Control FREEZE UNFREEZE SYNC UNSYNC CLEAR The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit supports cyclic Master Slave communica tions for networks with up to 125 slave devices With each slave device it can exchange up to 244 bytes of input data and up to 244 bytes of output data For diagnostics purposes the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit collects all Slave Diagnostics messages which it can transfer to the PLC memory using FINS commands From every allocated slave device it can receive up to 244 bytes of diagnostics data Configuration Before the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit can control the PROFIBUS network it must be configured using the dedicated configuration program CX Profibus Without this configuration the Unit will not be able to achieve data exchange The configurator is explained in section 1 4 CX Profibus Configurator Troubleshooting The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is provided with a variety of troubleshooting Functions functions for prompt recovery in case of errors e Extensive self diagnostic function at startup e Data exchange flags indicating if I O data is being exchanged with the slave devices e Diagnostics flags indicating if new Slave diagnostics data is available e Extensive status and error flags indicating the status of the Unit and the PROFIBUS network e Error log for recording error history data 1 3 2 Specifications PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Mo
320. s to CX Profibus A Time stamp a Date stamp and the DTM name are added to the message The contents of the window can be cleared or copied to the clipboard to allow pasting it into another document The Error Log window is opened by default when starting CX Profibus The FDT Monitoring window at the bottom of the CX Profibus application win dow displays the FDT DTM communication function calls between CX Profi bus and the DTMs A Time stamp a Date stamp the type of information and the DTM name are added to the message The sequence of messages can be used to troubleshoot problems that may occur when using third party DTMs in CX Profibus The contents of the window can be cleared or copied to the clipboard to allow pasting it into another document The FDT Monitoring window is not opened by default when starting CX Profi bus It can be opened through the View FDT Monitoring menu option The main menu of CX Profibus provides all the necessary functionality to handle a complete project The table below lists the main menu and their sub menu items Short Key Description Creates a new Project Open Opens an existing Project Save Saves the displayed Project to a file Save As The Save as command is the same as Save but the Filename Specifi cation Window is always displayed Export Project to HTML Exports Project data in HTML format and launches the browser Project Properties
321. sable watchdog e Overview of available I O modules e Selection of I O modules including Addition Insertion and Removal of multiple modules Parameter setup The Parameter setup function e Setting of common as well as module dependent parameters e Setting of PROFIBUS DP Extension parameters Setting of PROFIBUS DPV1 dependent parameters Group setting The Group setup function allows definition of the group to which the associated slave device will belong Monitoring functions The Monitoring functions provides a display of Standard Slave diagnostics flags Extended diagnostics messages Support functions Context sensitive help functions Multi language support 19 Basic Operating Procedure ssssss lt sSsSsSsSsSsSSSsSS ction 1 5 1 5 Basic Operating Procedure 1 5 1 Overview The following diagram provides an overview of the installation procedures For experienced installation engineers this may provide sufficient informa tion For others cross references are made to various sections of this manual where more explicit information is given Mount the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit on to the PLC See section 2 2 Installing the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Units Select a unique Identity Number 0 F for the Unit using the rotary switch on the front of the Unit See section 2 3 Initial Setup Procedure Connect the PROFIBUS DP Master unit to the PROFIBUS network See sec
322. sabled and is disconnected from the network due to a cabling problem e BF LED indicator is Flashing e ClO Words n 9 to n 16 see Note show which slaves have problems Use CX Profibus and DTMs to determine slave diagnostics Note n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Verify that the specified slave device is still connected to the network 195 Troubleshooting Using the Error Log Section75 7 5 Troubleshooting Using the Error Log 7 5 1 Error Log Overview Logged Errors Error Log Records Error Log Location Adding Error Records to the Error Log Reading the Error Log Clearing the Error Log 196 Note The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit maintains an Error Log which contains the reports on specific error events The following errors are recorded in the error log e Errors in network operation e Errors in data transfers e Error in the CPU Unit Each error is recorded as one record in an error log table Each record con tains e A main error code see 7 5 2 Error Codes e A detailed error code see 7 5 2 Error Codes e A time stamp from the clock in the CPU Unit When an error is detected the error codes and time stamp are recorded in an error log record which is stored in the error login volatile memory i e RAM memory inside the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Serious errors are also recorded in non volatile memory i e Flash ROM A total of 80 error records can be logged in volatile memory U
323. sage exceeding 256 bytes broken messages faulty bus tim ing or devices beyond the HSA have been detected The Master Unit has switched to OFF LINE Mode Command Error When set to ON it indicates that two switches in the CIO switch word see sec tion 4 2 1 Software Switches 1 Word n were set simultaneously Parameter error The Parameter set error indicates if an error has been detected in the contents of the Parameters set while configuring the PROFIBUS interface using these parameters Unit Status Unit Error A Unit error indicates that a new error has been set in the Unit Status word see section 4 2 3 Unit Status Word n 4 Master Error A Master Error indicates that a new error has been set in the Master Status 2 word see section 4 2 5 Master Status 2 Word n 6 Local Parameter Storage Error An error has occurred when storing the configuration to non volatile memory Local Parameter Load Error An error has occurred when loading the configuration from non volatile memory File Read error When turned ON this LED indicates that a transfer from Memory Card to the Unit has failed The Unit must be re configured Unit Memory error When turned ON it indicates that an error has occurred when writing the Error Log to the Non volatile memory Error Log Updated The Error Log contains new entries since the last time it was read or cleared Parameter Storage in Progress
324. se the following procedure to configure the Unit using CX Profibus 1 2 3 1 Wire the network to connect the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to the slave devices 2 Turn ON the PLC power supply and the power supplies of the slave device on the network 3 In CX Profibus create a network and define the parameters and I O con figurations for the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit settings and the allocated slave devices Determine the baud rate and the bus parameter setup Make sure that the Go to OPERATE mode option is selected to force the Unit to OPERATE mode upon a PLC mode change to RUN MONITOR mode 4 Download the network configuration to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Af ter downloading the configuration CX Profibus will restart the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 5 After restarting the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit it will automatically start communication 21 Basic Operating Procedure ssssss SsSsSsSsSSSSSsSS ction 1 5 22 SECTION 2 Installation and Wiring This section shows the PROFIBUS device and identifies its controls and indicators It contains the procedures for installing the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit on the PLC System and setting up the PROFIBUS network 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 Unit Components 2 1 1 Nomenclature 2 1 2 Indicators 2 1 3 Switch Settings 2 1 4 PROFIBUS Connector Installing the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Units 2 2 1 Handling Pr
325. set of the PROFIBUS DP master unit Short Circuit Counter The Short Circuit Counter displays the number of short circuit error events on the PROFIBUS network which were detected by the Master Unit Range of Value 0 to 65535 Transmission Rejected Count D amp je f O o 5 a The Transmissions Rejected Count displays the number of rejected messages A possible reason for this is that the Master itself can not receive the token any more Range of Value 0 to 65535 Any Slave Indicator Station status The LED indicators in the Station status field display the status of each slave station on the network per address The colour of the LED indicator indicates the specific status of the slave device e Grey The slave device is not configured for this Master Unit e Green This slave device is exchanging I O data with the Master Unit e Yellow New Diagnostic is available from this slave device Open the Slave DTM to determine the actual Diagnostics data Opening this DTM will clear the LED indicator and turn to another colour until the next Diagnostics message is received from the specified slave device Blue The slave device was configured but not found on the network Red The slave station has returned a Set_Prm or Chk_Cfg error and is not in data exchange with the Master unit Station Address The Station address field displays the address of the first slave device i e with the lowest a
326. set on the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit through the rotary switch on the front 3 Select the Configure button to start CX Server Up on pressing the Configure button CX Server is launched and displays the CX Server User Interface as shown below Change PLC x Device Name PLC m Device Type en M w Settings Network Type Toolbus bd Settings Comment Cancel In order to configure CX Server for communication with the Unit perform the following procedure 1 Select the type of PLC to which the Unit is attached from the Device Type drop down selection box CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 2 Press the Settings button next to the PLC type selected The PLC settings window see figure below is displayed Device Type Settings CJ1M x General m CPU Type z m Total Program Area Size fior Step z I Read Only r Expansion Memory None E F Read Ony File Memory None x I Read Only Timer Z Clock VV Installed Make Default Cancel Help 3 In this window make the proper adjustments if necessary The selections made must match the physical configuration of the PLC system When done press the OK button 4 Select the Network Type to be used as connection between the PC and the Unit The available options may include other PLC systems or Commu nication Units which are setup to act as a gateway Refer to CX
327. slave in a diag nostics message following the standard data part For slave devices supporting extended diagnostics data the associated GSD files often again not always provide language dependent text strings to facilitate interpretation of the diagnostics codes sent by the slave device The Generic Slave DTM provides an easy to use interface which facilitates the displaying of such extended diagnostics data strings The presence of extended diagnostics as part of the diagnostics data mes sage is indicated by e the LED indicator marked Extended Diagnostics received in the Master DTM Monitor tab Slave Status tab refer to section 6 7 1 Monitoring the Master Unit and the Network e the LED indicator in the Diagnostics tab of the slave Diagnostics User Interface see for example the figure above Also if no extended diagnostics are available the Extended Diagnostics tab will be disabled and inaccessible To display the extended diagnostics click on the Extended diagnostics tab in the Slave Diagnostics User Interface 171 Monitoring the Network o CS ection 6 7 Example The figure below shows an example of the extended diagnostics window con taining extended diagnostics data The first row in the diagnostics window shows the raw data bytes the second and third row show the actual message contained within the extended diagnostics message 2101 x Device CJ1W PRT21 GSD File OC_0602 gsd OK Vendor OMRON Corporation Ident
328. smission of Global Control mes sages In order to access the Diagnostics User Interface the DTM has to be on line i e a communication channel between the DTM and the PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Unit must have been established In order to open the DTM Diagnostics User Interface perform the following sequence 1 To go on line perform one of the following actions e Select the DTM in the Network View e Select the Device Go Online option from the main menu or from the DTM context menu or e Select the A button from the Tool Bar 2 Acommunication channel will be opened through CX Server The name of the DTM in the Network View window will turn to Italic font to indicate that the Unit is on line 3 Select the Device Diagnosis option from the main menu or from the DTM context menu The Diagnostics User Interface will now be displayed CS1 CJIW PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 The figure below shows an example of the DTM Diagnostics User Interface oat 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Diagnosis Monitor Online Operations m Master Status 1 OPERATE sToP CLEAR OFFLINE Data Exchange Auto Clear Enabled Valid Configuration Master Status 2 oO Disturbed Bus Error PROFIBUS Protocol Error Slave Status Error History lol x Refresh ees m Unit Status I Automatic Si Local Parameter Storage Error Local Parameter Load Error File Read Error
329. ss 3 etc The addresses can be changed in the slave DTM User Interface 131 Setting up a network Section 6 2 Example 6 2 2 Example 132 The figure below shows an example network consisting of a CJU1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master and three OMRON slave devices Oat Unnamed CX Profibus File Edit View Device Tools Window Help Dice lta Alle eo MyNetwork E 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS Master P 2 CJ1W PRT21 3 CPM1A PRT21 SE 4 F150 PRT Note that the slave DTMs all have the automatically assigned network addresses displayed to the left of the device name Changing Device Addresses 1 2 3 Note In order to achieve communication between the Master Unit and its allocated slave devices the latter must have the same physical network address as set in the configuration Usually the network address on the actual slave devices are set through dip switches or rotary switches but this setting may differ from the address which was automatically assigned to the slave DTM Assume that the F150 PRT Vision system in the previous example has an actual network address of 10 instead of 4 which was automatically assigned In order to change the network address of the F150 PRT or any other slave device perform the procedure outlined below 1 Open the Configuration User Interface for the slave device by selecting it in the Network View and double clicking the left mouse button 2 Select the Station
330. ss range 0 125 baud rates supported Selectable through the configurator e 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 45 45 kbit s 93 75 kbit s 187 kbit s 500 kbit s 1 5 Mbit s 3 Mbit s 6 Mbit s 12 Mbit s oO S g oD S O 5 m LL O a o Bus timing definitions Calculated by the configurator Master Class 1 Slave cyclic services Set_Prm Chk_Cfg Data_Exchange Slave_Diag Global Control CLEAR Master Class 1 Slave acyclic services Not supported Master Class 1 Slave services available to the PLC Global Control initiated from ClO Word Can be addressed to all ora specified group of slave devices Supported commands e SYNC e UNSYNC e FREEZE e UNFREEZE PROFIBUS DP Services Master Master services 12 Not supported PROFIBUS DP Master Unit si CS ection 1 3 Item Specification Number of I O module definitions 4000 max over all configured slave devices Number of I O data supported by Master Up to 244 bytes input and 244 bytes output max per slave device defined by slave device Total sum of all I O Data must not exceed 7168 words Number of diagnostics data supported by Up to 244 bytes of diagnostics max per slave device Master Diagnostic data is collected at the Unit and can be obtained from the Unit using FINS messaging External Dimensions CS1W PRM21 94 130 D
331. ssword for all levels is password CX Profibus will now start displaying the main window as shown below Sst Unnamed CX Profibus Oy x File Edit View Device Tools Window Help plela llal col Error Log ee User Administrator A 128 Setting up a network Section 6 2 1 2 3 Note Installing New GSD Files 1 2 3 Before starting the assembly of the network in CX Profibus make the follow ing preparation steps 1 Open the Device Catalogue Either select the View Device Catalogue menu option or press the fue button in the Tool Bar The opened Device Catalogue is shown below aox Device Types Device vesin Dae vendr 4l Vendors H 58505 Mass Flow C 2 0 Brooks Instrument Groups 2 ABB IMDPO1 v2 4 2000 07 Deutschmann Automation GmbH Protocols 2 ABB ACPBDO NPBA B 1998 08 ABB DRIVES ABB PSR A 2000 07 ABB DRIVES HA C200HwW PRT21 V1 0 2000 04 OMRON Corporation Hi CB_AB32 DPS Version 1 001 1998 07 Hilscher GmbH Hi CIF104P DPS Version 1 000 2002 06 Hilscher GmbH 2 CIF30 DPS CIF104 Version 2 011 2000 03 Hilscher GmbH HA CIFS0 DPS Version 1 000 2000 03 Hilscher GmbH CIF60 DPS Version 1 000 2000 03 Hilscher GmbH 2 CIF80 DPS Version 1 000 2002 06 Hilscher GmbH CIFPS1 DPS Version 1 010 2000 03 Hilscher GmbH i CW PRM2I PRO 3 62 2003 10 OMRON Corporation CJ1w PRT21 V1 0 2002 06 OMRON
332. st have been established In order to open the DTM Diagnostics User Interface perform the following sequence 1 To go on line perform one of the following actions e Select the DTM in the Network View C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM Section 3 4 e Select the Device Go Online option from the main menu or from the DTM context menu or e Select the A button from the Tool Bar 2 Acommunication channel will be opened through the CIF driver provided this driver has been assigned to the DTM Refer to section 3 4 3 Connect ing to the C200HW PRM21 on how to assign this driver After going on line The name of the DTM in the Network View window will turn to Italic font to indicate that the Unit is on line 3 Select the Device Diagnosis option from the main menu or from the DTM context menu The Diagnostics User Interface will now be displayed The figure below shows an example of the DTM Diagnostics User Interface lolx m Master Operation Mode p Master Status _ p Bus Monitoring Operate W Timeout Wa Fatal Error Wa Eror event W Clear W Not Ready W Control Error Short Circuit Counter 0 Help W Stop WW Auto Clear Transmissions Rejected W Offline Slave Error Geri r Station status Oo 2 3 5 s WO s Go ON 2 G3 u 5 Oe Oi Os wis Oa O27 z BB n OS OE OF OB z O82 B81 z OB OH OS s WV WB WB Ot O41 Oe OB OH WH WH r WR WA On 5 Ve s OH OS WS WT WBS Q5 Ono WH Ve YB WH W
333. ster Section 6 4 Testing CX Server setup Note 4 Select the Network Type to be used as connection between the PC and the Unit The available options may include other PLC systems or Commu nication Units which are setup to act as a gateway Refer to CX Server Runtime user Manual W391 for details on configuring CX Server Note 1 For further explanation only the direct connections between the PC and the PLC on which the Unit is attached are considered These include ToolBus and SYSMAC WAY 2 Select the Settings button next to the Network Type selected to display the Network settings window and select the Driver tab Toolbus is shown as example below 3 Although SYSMAC WAY can be used for the majority of applica tions it is limited in a sense that it can not handle the absolute maximum of I O configuration and parameters i e it can not han dle a slave device which requires 244 I O modules and 244 pa rameter bytes Toolbus does not have that limitation Network Settings Toolbus x Network Driver Modem Connection Port Name x Data Bit 8 v Baud Rate 115200 x Parity None v IV Baud Rate Auto Detect Stop Bit fiz Make Default 5 Make the necessary selections to facilitate communication between the PC and the PLC CPU to which the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is attached and press the OK button After making the settings press the OK button to close the CX Server inter face In order to verify that
334. stic functions defined in PROFIBUS DP enable the fast loca tion of error at slave devices Diagnostic messages are transmitted over the bus and collected at the master Three levels of diagnostic messages are defined e Messages concerning the general operational status of the whole device e g over temperature low voltage e Messages indicating that an error is present in a specific I O range of a device e g an 8 bit output module e Messages indicating an error at a given input or output e g short circuit on Output 5 Overview of PROFIBUS Section 1 1 1 1 6 Protection Mechanisms Monitoring Time PROFIBUS DP provides effective protection functions against parameteriza tion errors or failure of the transmission equipment Time monitoring is pro vided both at the master and the slave devices The monitoring interval is specified when the system is configured Monitoring at the Master The PROFIBUS DP Master monitors data transmission of the slaves with the Data Control Timer A separate control timer is used for each slave This timer expires if response data is not correctly transmitted by the slave within the monitoring interval The user is informed when this happens If the auto matic error reaction Auto CLEAR has been enabled the PROFIBUS DP master exits its OPERATE state switches the outputs of all assigned slaves to the fail safe status and changes to the CLEAR state Monitoring at the Slave Slave devices use a watchd
335. switch on the front of the Unit refer to 2 3 1 Selecting a unit number This number is used in the com munication between the PC and the PLC to transmit the mes sages to the targeted PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Configure Button The Configure button invokes the CX Server communications settings dia log CX Server is the driver software providing the communication functional ity between a PC and the PLC CPU It is the basis for the OMRON s CX Suite programs CX Server is provided with CX Profibus but it may already be installed on the PC if other programs for example CX Programmer have been installed Note The CX Server is designed to manage the communication between the PC and the PLC and also configure the connected PLC CX Server currently sup ports CS1G H CS1H CS1H H CJ1G H CJ1H H CJ1M and CS1G CJ1G PLC types Section 3 3 3 Connecting to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 will provide more details on how to configure CX Server Test Button The purpose of the Test button is to test the communication setup after CX Server has been configured If the PC and the PLC are connected selecting the Test button will invoke a FINS request message to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit via the PLC to read its name and firmware version If the request succeeds both will be displayed in the Device Information Box If the FINS request fails no response an error message will be displayed in the Error Log window In this case the Firmware version field
336. t Note If startup errors prevent the Unit from functioning correctly the PRM BST and BF LED indicators will remain OFF Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators Section 7 2 7 2 3 Unit Operational Errors Unit Operational errors are errors which can occur during normal operation i e after normal startup The error determination procedure uses the table below To determine the error first find the status of the RUN LED indicator left column Then move one column to the right and find the status of the ERH LED indicator Then move again one column to the right and find the status of the ERC LED indi cator The probable error causes are listed to the right of the third column Unit Operational Errors Not lit Not lit Not lit Probable cause Power is not being supplied to the CPU Unit or the power supply voltage is too low Correction Supply power Make sure that the correct voltage is being supplied The CPU Unit or Backplane is faulty Replace the CPU Unit or the Backplane The mounting screws on the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit are loose CS Series or the sliders are not properly locked into place CJ Series Tighten the mounting screws to the speci fied torque CS Series or lock the sliders into place CJ Series A fatal error has occurred in the Unit pre venting it from running any program Restart the CPU Unit If the problem per sists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit A f
337. t existent W Extended diagnostics overflow Assigned Master Address 1 Device intemal Ident Number 0x602 Update Connected The LED indicators are listed in the table below Name Description Master lock The slave device has been parameterized by another master Parameter fault The last received parameter data from the Master Unit have been rejected The parameter data in the slave device differ from the parameter sent by the Master Unit Invalid slave response The slave has returned an invalid response to a Master request message Function Not supported The Master Unit has sent a message to the slave device which is not supported by the device Extended diagnostics The diagnostics message returned by the slave device contains extended diagnostics i e it contains more than the mandatory 6 bytes Configuration fault The last received configuration data from the Master Unit have been rejected The configura tion data in the slave device differ from the configuration sent by the Master Unit Station not ready The slave device is not yet ready for data transfer the parameters data and the configuration data have been accepted Station not existent The slave does not respond to any of the request messages sent by the master If set the diagnostic bits contains the state of the last diagnostic message or the initial value Slave deactivated When set to ON it indicate
338. ta sent to the slaves will remain the same as before the occurrence of the Fatal PLC error Setting errors are indicated in CIO n 2 Additionally t he ERR LED will be flashing to indicate a non fatal error If the specified number of words would make the area exceed the boundaries of the available buffer DM LR CIO or HR areas the actual number of transferred words will be limited as to remain within all of these boundaries The Unit does not check the validity of the contents of any PLC data area from which output data is to be transferred Any data present in the area will be transferred to the output buffer of the Unit If multiple fieldbus masters e g PROFIBUS DP Devicenet SYSMAC BUS are mounted on the same PLC system only one of them can be used in default mapping mode The Unit does not check if the mapped PLC input area is in use by other Units If so this Units data may overwrite another Unit s data or vice versa If the settings cause two destination areas to overlap the data of the higher number area will over write the lower This practice must be avoided by the user 235 C200HW PRM21 Notes Appendix G Control Words The control words for the C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master Unit to allow the PLC CPU program to initiate actions with respect to the PROFIBUS network In general the following features are provided e Change the state of the Unit with respect to transfer of I O data e Clear the mailbox e
339. te 1 144 Select the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM in the network view and right click the mouse to display the context menu Select Download Parameters from the menu to initiate a download A communication channel through CX Server will be opened automatically When communication is achieved with the PLC a warning window will be displayed notifying the user that the PLC will be switched to PROGRAM mode If the user confirms this the download will continue The downloading process is handled by the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM will switch the Master Unit to OFFLINE commence the download and after successful download issue a command to the Master Unit to store the parameter sets in the Unit A window is displayed to show the progress of the download After storage has been completed the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM will issue a command to restart the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The new parameter sets will then become effective After restarting the Unit a warning window will be displayed allowing the user to switch the PLC CPU back to its original mode When switching the PLC CPU back to its original mode after download the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will behave according to the setting made in the Master Setup Tab see section 6 4 1 Setting the Master Parameters If the Action to PLC mode change has been set to go to OPERATE mode when the PLC switches to RUN MONITOR mode the last action of the
340. tement shown below to which the user must agree Next press the Install button to continue i Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Setup al x E ij License Agreement Microsoft 4 copy of this license is available for printing at http go microsoft comvfwlink LinkId 12233 e SUPPLEMENTAL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR E MICROSOFT SOFTWARE H have read understood and agree to the terms of the End User License Agreement and so signify by clicking agree and proceeding to use this product C do not agree Cancel 5 After starting the Microsoft NET framework installation process a window will be displayed showing the progress of this installation i Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Setup 4 5 x E i Installing Components The following items are being installed on your computer Microsoft NET Framework Files e le t PTTL Copying new files File InstallUtilLib dll Directory C WINDO 40960 Time remaining 18 seconds 41 Installation Section 3 1 6 Completion of the Microsoft NET framework installation is indicated by displaying the message window below i Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Setup loj xi Installation of Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 is complete 7 After installing the Microsoft NET framework CX Profibus and its compo nents will be installed The installation welcome window as shown below will be displayed Click the Next button t
341. ter DTM 00 cece eee eee 61 3 4 C200HW PRM21 PROFIBUS Master DTM 0 0 0 c eee eee ee 79 3 5 Generic Slave Device DTM resoni cei et eee bakes pees beter EN ea bans 89 SECTION 4 Allocated CIO and DM Words 101 4 1 Overview of Word Allocations 0 0 0 ccc ccc cece cece e eens 102 4 2 Allocated CIO Area Words 0 0 e a E E EKA eee eee eee eee eee ennes 104 Vii viii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 5 FINS Commands and Responses sesssscssess 117 5 1 FINS Commands and Responses 0 000 cece errero 5 2 Command Response Reference 0 0 0 0 nee eens SECTION 6 Operations ci iad bcedevevente bataceeieseebaseedeeae 127 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 Introduction Setting up a network Configuring the Slave Devices 0 0 0 0 cee cece eee Configuring the Master I O Communication Characteristics 0 ccc eee eee eee eens Operating the Network Monitoring the Network SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 175 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 Overview Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators sunnaru arenaer Troubleshooting Using Error Status 2 0 0 0 ee eee Troubleshooting the Network 0 0 00 cece ent nee ene nen eee Troubleshooting Using the Error Log 0 0 ee eee Troubleshooting FINS Commands 0 00 c c
342. that are below stan dard Environmental conditions Ambient temperature Standard 0 C to 55 C Equipment Thermometer Ambient humidity 10 to 90 Hygrometer Dust dirt accumulation None Installation Are the units installed securely No looseness Are the communications connec tors fully inserted No looseness Are the external wiring screws tight No looseness Are the connecting cables undam aged No damage 199 Replacing the Unit Section 7 8 7 8 Replacing the Unit 7 8 1 Replacement Precautions Replacement Precautions Note The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is a Network device If the Unit is damaged it will effect the entire Network so always ensure repairs are undertaken imme diately It is recommended to have a spare PROFIBUS DP Master Unit on hand so that repairs may be conducted quickly Observe the following precautions when replacing the Unit e Always turn OFF the power before replacing the Unit e Ensure that the new Unit is not faulty e If a poor connection is suspected of causing the malfunction clean the connectors using a clean soft cloth and industrial grade alcohol Remove any lint or threads left from the cloth and remount the Unit e When returning a faulty Unit for repair always attach a detailed fault report to the Unit and return it to the nearest OMRON dealer 1 In order to prevent faulty operation be sure to turn off t
343. the Unit Number Control bits allow the PLC program to switch the Unit between OFF LINE STOP CLEAR and OPERATE mode which represent the main PROFIBUS DP modes of operation The control words also allow for user initiated transmission of a Global Control message over the PROFIBUS network to any group of slave devices The remaining ClO words provide status and diagnostics information on the Unit itself the PROFIBUS network and the slave devices allocated to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit PROFIBUS DP Master Unit ssi CS ection 1 3 O Data The total size of I O data however must not exceed the maximum I O size of up to 7168 words which it can exchange with the PLC memory The I O data can be distributed over up to two input areas and two output areas Each of the input and output areas can be mapped to any location in the DM Area CIO Area WR Area HR Area or the EM banks FINS Messages The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit supports FINS message exchange with the PLC CPU to allow the transfer of Slave diagnostics data or the Error log Also the user can enable or disable communication with specific allocated slave devices so that they can temporarily be taken out of the network for maintenance without the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit reporting an error PROFIBUS DP Functions The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit supports all mandatory services defined in the PROFIBUS DP standard EN50170 Volume 2 for Master Slave Commu nication These functions include
344. the communication has been setup correctly press the Test button in the Device Setup tab of the DTM Configuration User Inter face This will initiate a FINS command to read the Unit s profile i e the name of the Unit and the firmware version If the communication has been setup correctly the response of the FINS command will yield the required information which will be displayed in the Device Information box in the Description and Firmware Version fields If the communication is not setup correctly the two fields will contain three dashes i e and an Error message will be displayed in the Error Log win dow of CX Profibus The communication settings must be changed to the cor rect value first Refer to Appendix D Configurator Error and Warning Messages for more information on communication and download errors Since CX Server is the common driver software for connection between PC based CX programs e g CX Programmer CX Supervisor etc and the CS1 CJ1 series PLC all these programs can communicate simultaneously with the PLC However the settings for CX Server made through each of these programs have to be exactly the same to allow simultaneous communi cation 143 Configuring the Master Section 6 4 6 4 5 Downloading the Configuration Downloading Parameters In order to download the parameter sets to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFI BUS DP Master Unit the following sequence must be performed 1 2 3 1 No
345. the project is downloaded to the Master Unit Device Catalogue functions The Device Catalogue maintains the installed device DTMs After installation of anew DTM the user must refresh the database The Device Catalogue provides the following functions e Update Device Catalogue e Add device DTMs to the network directly e Install a GSD file This function allows copying of GSD files to a specific directory after which they are available for the Generic Slave DTM Support functions CX Profibus 18 CX Profibus provides the following additional support functions e Context sensitive help functions e Error logging e Monitoring of FDT communication between DTMs e Multi language support CX Profibus Configurator Section 1 4 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 DTM Item Device setup Specification Device setup allows the user to e Select the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit s unit number e Configure the communication link between the PC and the Unit This function invokes the user interface of CX Server e Test the Units communication link and to read out the Unit s infor mation Master setup It allows enabling of Auto Addressing to facilitate I O data mapping as well as defining the Unit s behaviour in case of e a network malfunction e a PLC mode change between PROGRAM and RUN MONITOR mode Bus parameter setup The bus parameter setup allows the selection of baud rate and cal culation and ed
346. thout having to make any special interface adaptations The PROFIBUS family comprises three mutually compatible versions PROFIBUS FMS PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS PA FMS means Fieldbus Message Specification This version is the general pur pose solution for high level extensive and complex communication tasks Powerful services open up a wide range of applications and provide great flexibility DP means Decentralized Periphery PROFIBUS DP is optimized for high speed and low cost interfacing It is specially designed for communication between automation control systems and distributed I O at the device level PA means Process Automation It permits sensors and actuators to be con nected to one common bus even in areas where intrinsically safe products are required It also permits data and power to be supplied over the bus using 2 wire technology according the international standard IEC 1158 2 PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS FMS use the same transmission technology and uniform bus access protocol Consequently both versions can be oper ated simultaneously on the same bus FMS field devices however cannot be controlled by DP masters and vice versa It is not possible to exchange one of these family members by another family member This will cause faulty operation The rest of this section describes the PROFIBUS DP Protocol architecture 1 1 2 PROFIBUS Communication Protocol OSI reference model ISO 7498 In general the PROFIBUS comm
347. tion Troubleshooting the device and the connection is discussed in section 7 4 2 Troubleshooting the Network using CX Profibus e Determine the status of the slave device e Determine if the slave device has reported extended diagnostics If extended diagnostics have been reported to the Master Unit the Extended diagnostics received LED indicator will be on Refer to section 7 4 2 Troubleshooting the Network using CX Profibus for a discussion on the errors reported by the slave and how to correct them Since all slave devices will have to return their status in the diagnostics mes sage after parameterization all the LED indicators associated with the slave devices allocated to the Master Unit will indicate received diagnostics right after network startup If all slave devices have established I O data exchange with the Master Unit this information may be less relevant To detect new diagnostics received during I O data exchange the user can clear all current new diagnostics flags by pressing the Clear Diagnostics button in the window thus making it easy to spot newly received more relevant diagnostics afterwards Pressing Clear Diagnostics button will cause all yellow LED indicators to turn green Monitoring the Network y Section 6 7 6 7 2 Monitoring Slave Status The Generic Slave DTM provides a Diagnosis User Interface with two tabs e Standard diagnostics tab displaying the same information for the associ ated slave d
348. tion and transfer updated output information to the Master Unit with each subsequent I O data exchange message 163 Operating the Network sss Section 6 6 Note If a Global Control command contains both a Sync and an Unsync command the Unsync will prevail The figure shown below illustrates the Sync Unsync feature as implemented by the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Global Control Sync command Global Control Unsync command PLC Cycle Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction y Execution Execution Execution Execution L Sync Sync Unsync transmitted transmitted transmitted PROFIBUS Cycle IX XXX BEER Slave Output N Z Refresh Cycle T A Sync command causes Sync command causes Unsync command immediate refresh of immediate refresh of cancels Sync command slave outputs and slave outputs with last and causes immediate freezes slave output received PROFIBUS refresh of slave outputs refresh process output data and with last received PROFIBUS output data Note The Global Control command as set in the CIO words is transferred to the Unit together with the I O data but the Global Control command is sent over the PROFIBUS network following the I O data This means that the outputs of the targeted slave device will be updated with the values sent to the slave prior to the Global Control command Transmitting Global In order to transmit a Global Control command the user has to define the Control Command
349. tion 2 4 Setting up a Network Switch on the power supply for the PLC and create a PLC I O table in CX Programmer See CX Programmer User Manual Reference No W361 Configure the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit using CX Profibus on the PC See sections 3 3 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM and 6 4 Configuring the Master Download configuration data to PROFIBUS DP Master Unit See sections 3 3 3 Connecting to the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 and 6 4 5 Downloading the Configuration v PROFIBUS DP starts communicating confirmed by the COMM LED continuously lit Check status of other LED Indicators See sections 6 5 O Communication Characteristics 6 6 Operating the Network and 6 7 Monitoring the Network 20 Basic Operating Procedure S Sectioni5 1 5 2 Preparations for Communications 1 2 3 1 Mount the Master Unit on the PLC system refer to 2 2 Installing the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Units e Treat the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit e It can be mounted to a CPU Rack or Expansion Rack e Number of Units 16 Max 2 Set the Unit No UNIT No for the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit refer to 2 3 1 Selecting a unit number 3 Connect aPC ora Programming Device to the PLC and turn ON the power supply to the PLC 4 Generate the I O tables and restart the PLC refer to 2 3 2 Creating an I O table 5 Install CX Profibus and the DTMs on to the PC 1 5 3 Procedures Prior to Starting Communications U
350. tion during the writing process e A faulty parameter setting which makes initialization of the PROFIBUS interface not possible To correct this Check the parameter settings for incorrect values Restart the Unit Re download the configuration If the problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 183 Troubleshooting Using Error Status Section 7 3 09 File read error An error has occurred when loading the configuration from the non volatile mem ory to the volatile memory at start up Most likely cause is a failure or interruption during the writing process Most likely causes e A failure or interruption during the writing process e A failure during the reading process e A faulty Memory Card To correct this e Check the Memory Card for faults e Restart the PLC Unit to re download the configuration e lf the problem persists use CX Profibus to re download the configuration e Ifthe problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 13 Error Log storage error An error has occurred when writing the error log to the non volatile memory or when reading the error log from non volatile memory during start up Most likely causes A failure or interruption during the writing process To correct this e Send an ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS command to the Unit e Restart the Unit e Ifthe problem persists replace the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 7 3 2 Master Status 2 Word 184
351. total Target Rotation Time in tgm Baud rate is the selected baud rate value The Watchdog Time value is in turn used to calculate the total Data Control Time Data Control Time 7 Twp 4 Based on measurements the following values have been determined for the 6 factors in equation 1 Baud rate A1 B1 Ci Minimum Min Slave Interval kBits s tgrt tgrt tgi tgrt ms 9 6 414 280 11 1250 130 19 2 418 280 11 1250 65 1 45 45 1942 361 11 1250 27 5 93 75 450 280 11 1250 13 3 187 5 1390 310 10 1250 6 67 500 2183 310 10 1850 3 7 1500 4339 310 11 4800 3 2 3000 11578 410 5 9600 3 2 206 Bus Parameters Appendix A Baud rate A1 B1 Ci Minimum Min Slave Interval kBits s tgrt tpit tert tgrt ms 6000 23556 800 10 19200 3 2 12000 47112 1600 20 38400 3 2 A2 65 1 us B2 2 us C2 0 5 us 207 Bus Parameters Appendix A 208 Appendix B Slave Diagnostics Message B 1 Slave Diagnostics Data Message Every PROFIBUS DP slave device has to support the transfer of a cyclic diagnostics message The contents of these messages allow a PROFIBUS DP Master Unit to assess the status of the slave device in every state of the communication The diagnostics message format is defined in the PROFIBUS standard The slave diagnostics message consists of at least 6 mandatory bytes If supported the slave can send addi tional extended diagnostics bytes in the
352. ts error codes for various error events Serious errors are stored in non volatile memory and can be retrieved even after a Unit power down e FINS command provide defined response codes which can indicate spe cific errors n CIO 1500 25 x unit number This section provides a number of procedures for troubleshooting based on the error indicators listed above The Configuration software i e CX Profibus the PROFIBUS DP Master DTM and the Generic Slave DTM provide several mechanisms for error detection and correction e Errors occurring in CX Profibus are displayed in pop up message win dows and or the error log window The contents of the error log window can be copied to the clipboard to allow analysis afterwards e CX Profibus provides a FDT communication log window which can be copied to the clipboard Analysis of this communication may provide addi tional information in case errors occur The PROFIBUS DP Master DTM and the Generic Slave DTM diagnostics information windows which can display e Indications of errors in the PROFIBUS interface of the Unit e Indications of errors in the communication between the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and remote slave devices e Indications of errors in the remote slave devices allocated to the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit The CX Profibus and DTM capabilities for troubleshooting are extensively dis cussed in SECTION 6 Operation Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators Section 7 2 7 2 Tr
353. turned flag also indicates that the slave device is still processing the last received parameter message and has as yet not approved nor rejected that message During the Diagnostics Update Delay period the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit will continue requesting its diagnostics data Also during this period the diag nostics data received from this slave will not be updated in the PLC CPU PROFIBUS DPV1 defines extended communication functions between a PROFIBUS DPV1 master and a PROFIBUS DPV1 slave device These extensions include e Acyclic communications between master and slave to allow re parame terization during I O data exchange e Extended alarm reporting and acknowledgement Settings related to these extensions are sent to the slave device through the Set_Prm message The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units do not support PROFI BUS DPV1 communication functions nor do they support PROFIBUS DPV1 Alarm functions Although the DPV1 tab described below allows the user to make slave specific settings the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units will automatically disable the DPV1 settings to avoid the slave devices to use PROFIBUS DPV1 functions The DPV1 settings window is shown below o x Device BK3120 GSD File BK3120 GSE Vendor BECKHOFF INDUSTRIE ELEKTRONIK Ident Number OxBECE Configuration Parameter Group Extensions DPV1 Max channel data length 52 Max alarm PDU length 58 m Alarms Alarm mode fi a
354. ual CPU CS Cu series PLCs CS CJ series SYSMAC CS Cu series Describes the ladder diagram pro W340 E1 Programmable Controllers CS1G H CPULILI E CJ1G gramming instructions supported by Instructions Reference Manual CPU CS series and CJ series PLCs CS CJ Series Communication SYSMAC CS1G H CPULILI E Describes the C series Host Link and W342 E1 Commands Reference Manual CPU Units FINS communications commands used with CS CJ series PLCs CX Programmer SYSMAC WS02 CXP Provides information on how to use the W414 E1 Operation Manual CX Programmer CX Programmer programming soft ware which supports CS1 CJ1 series PLCs 1x Manual CX Server Run Time User Manual Products CX Server Contents Provides information on how to use the CX Server communication driver soft ware which supports CS1 CJ1 series PLCs Cat No W391 E2 C200H series PROFIBUS DP Master Units Operation Manual SYSMAC C200H series C200HW PRM21 Describes the Installation and Opera tion of the C200HW PRM21 PROFI BUS DP Master Units W349 E2 CJ series PROFIBUS DP Slave unit Operation Manual SYSMAC Cu1 series CJ1W PRT21 Describes the Installation and Opera tion of the CJ1W PRT21 PROFIBUS DP Slave Units W408 E2 GT
355. ubleshooting the Network Section 7 4 7 4 3 Troubleshooting I O Communication This section deals with troubleshooting the I O communication on the network from a behaviour point of view The column on the left describes the general perceived problem to the user The columns on the right list the possible causes and their remedies Communication Problems Problem PROFIBUS DP Master Unit is configured but none of the slaves are exchanging data 192 Probable cause No power is supplied to the system e All LED indicators on the system are OFF Correction Verify that power is supplied to the sys tem A PLC CPU startup error occurred e The ERH indicator is ON the other LED indicators are OFF e The ERR ALM LED indicator on the PLC CPU is ON Determine error in the PLC CPU Refer to the CS1 Series CPU Unit Operation Man ual W339 or the CU Series CPU Unit Operation Manual W393 The stored configuration contains a check sum error storing configuration was inter rupted or failed e After restarting the Unit the ERC LED indicator is ON and the PRM LED indica tor is OFF Unit Status error flag may provide more information CIO Word n 4 bit 06 bit 07 bit 09 see Note Re download the configuration If the problem persists replace the Unit The configuration contains timing errors e After restarting the Unit the ERC LED indicator is ON and the PRM LED indica tor is OFF Ve
356. umber I O type 765 43 2 1 0 Error Identifier byte Error type number Channel size type Module Identifier byte Description Module number These bits contain the number of the configuration module to which the channel reporting diagnostics belongs The module number ranges from 0 to 63 Reserved Fixed to 10 The combination of bit 6 and 7 indicate the type of diagnostics i e 10 indicates Channel related diagnostics data Channel Identifier byte Description Channel number These bits contain the number of the channel which reports the diagnostics The channel number ranges from 0 to 63 I O type Bit 6 and 7 indicate the type of I O channel from which the diagnostics data is sent e 00 Reserved e 01 Input e 10 Output e 11 Input Output 215 Appendix Error Identifier byte Error number Description These bits contain the number of the error which occurred at the channel The error number ranges from 0 to 31 and can have the following meaning e 0 Reserved e 1 Short circuit e 2 Under voltage e 3 Over voltage e 4 Overload e 5 Over temperature e 6 Line break e 7 Upper limit value exceeded e 8 Lower limit value exceeded e 9 Error e 10 15 Reserved e 16 31 Manufacturer specific 216 Channel size type Bit 5 6 and 7 indicate the si
357. unication protocol is based on the Open System Interconnection OSI reference model in accordance with the inter national standard ISO 7498 see the following illustration The model defines 7 layers of communication functions three of which layers 1 2 and 7 are used in PROFIBUS e Layer 1 the Physical Layer of this model defines the physical transmis sion characteristics e Layer 2 the Data Link Layer of this model defines the bus access proto col This protocol also includes data security and the handling of trans mission protocols and telegrams e Layer 7 the Application Layer of this model defines the application func tions This Layer is only applicable to PROFIBUS FMS Overview of PROFIBUS Section 1 1 PROFIBUS DP OSI Layer 1 2 and User Interface OSI Layer 1 Transmission Medium RS 485 Technology RS 485 Transmission Speed Cable length DP Profiles DP Extensions User Interface Layer DP Basic Functions 7 Application Layer 6 Presentation Layer 5 Session Layer NOT DEFINED 4 Transport Layer 3 Network Layer 2 Data Link Layer Fieldbus Data Link FDL 1 Physical Layer RS485 Fibre Optics In the rest of this manual only PROFIBUS DP is considered PROFIBUS DP uses layers 1 and 2 and the user interface Layers 3 to 7 are not defined for PROFIBUS DP The user interface Layer defines the interface functions for specific application areas i e the PROFIBUS DP basi
358. unications cables from the power lines or high ten sion lines Do not bend the communications cables Do not pull on the communications cables e Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables e Be sure to wire communications cable inside ducts e Use appropriate communications cables e Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied in places where the power supply is unstable An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction e Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short cir cuits in external wiring Insufficient safety measures against short circuits may result in burning e Double check all the wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply e Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in an unexpected opera tion e Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Changing the operating mode of the PC e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory e After replacing Units resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit and or Special I O Units the contents of the DM Area HR Area and other data required for resuming operation Not doing so
359. unt of timeout events is dis played in the Bus Monitoring field The indicator will be set to ON upon the first occurrence of the timeout It will not be reset until power down Not Ready The Not Ready notification indicates that the application program has not started or it has stopped the PROFIBUS DP Master If this bit is set the applica tion is not ready to receive data Auto Clear Set to ON indicates that an Auto Clear event has occurred i e data exchange with at least one of the slave devices has stopped The Master Unit has been switched to CLEAR mode Slave Error When set to ON it indicates that at least one of the slaves has encountered an error and is not exchanging I O data with the Master unit Refer to the LED indi cators in the Station status field to determine which slave devices encountered the error Fatal Error A Fatal Error has occurred in the PROFIBUS DP master unit due to the large amount of network errors No further bus communication is possible Control Error Station Status The Control Error indicates that an error has been encountered in the down loaded parameter set No communication is possible Error Event When set to ON The Error Event indicates that the device has detected network short circuits The number of detected events is displayed in the Short Circuit Counter The bit will be set up on the first detected event and will not be reset until power down or re
360. updating the Device Catalogue it will open in the CX Profibus applica tion window 49 CX Profibus Section 3 2 3 2 2 CX Profibus Main Window The main application window of CX Profibus will open with a New Project After the first start up the Device Catalogue will be opened automatically If not the Device Catalogue may be opened from the menu The figure below shows the opened CX Profibus application window with a Project already containing a network and the Device Catalogue window opened Tool Bar Network Window st Unnamedi CX Profibus Device Catalogue Device Tools Window Help Dol j Elf MyNetwork le Device Catalogue i 1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS T 2 C 1W PRT21 Device Types 3 CPMIAPRT21 Vendors CQM1 PRT21 Groups C200HW PRT21 Protocols F150 PRT PRT1 COM Device y Vers Date Vendor BK3120 2 C200HW P CJIW PR E CO1WPRT E CEMIAPR COM1 PR le BE CS1W PR E ETSOPRT PRT1 COM BECKHOFF INDUSTRIE E OMRON Corporation OMRON Corporation OMRON Corporation OMRON Corporation OMRON Corporation OMRON Corporation OMRON Corporation OMRON Corporation Update Install GSD Files Add Device Error Log and FDT Monitoring Windows The main components in this window are e The Network Window e The DTM Catalogue Window e The Error Log Window e The FDT Monitoring Window not shown in the figure above e The Main menu
361. user program e Through CX Profibus The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface provides the user with buttons to set the operational mode of the Unit send Global Control commands read Master and slave status information and access the Unit s Error Log e Through any other CX Server based program capable of accessing PLC memory areas and communicating through FINS messages e g CX Pro grammer CX Supervisor etc This section will explore both means to control the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM Diagnosis User Interface provides the means to control the Master Unit directly from CX Profibus running on a PC For access to the Unit s controls an online connection with the Unit has to be established first To achieve this perform the following sequence 1 Togo online select the DTM in the Network View and perform one of the following actions e Select the Device Go Online option from the main menu or the DTM context menu or e Select the Al button from the Tool Bar 2 A communication channel will be opened through CX Server The name of the DTM in the Network View window will turn to Italic font to indicate that the Unit is on line 3 From the context menu select the Diagnosis option The DTM s Diagnos tics User Interface will be displayed 4 Select the Online Operations tab for the Units controls Controlling the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Unit from th
362. ution Instruction Execution Slave I O data refresh PROFIBUS Cycle Slave I O data refresh oe 1 PB Cyc i PB Cyc PLC Cyc PLC Cyc PB Cyc PB Cyc i IN i T T e T gt lt T T I M Proc PLC Rf 155 I O Communication Characteristics Section 6 5 Tin Slave device Input ON OFF delay Tpp cye PROFIBUS I O data exchange cycle time See Appendix A Bus Parameters TM Proc l O Processing time in the Master Unit Minimum value is 430 us but may increase with increasing I O data size TMReA Master request cyclic refresh until actual start of cyclic refresh Toc PLC cycle time See section 6 5 5 PLC Cycle Time Performance TpLc at PLC cyclic refresh time See section 6 5 5 TouT Slave device Output ON OFF delay The total I O response time is the sum of all components Tio Tin 4 T pp cyc 2 TM Proc Tarr 2 TpPLC Cyc Tpic rt Tout Note The calculation assumes the presence of only one Master Unit on the PROFI BUS network PROFIBUS DP Cycle lt The figure below shows the timing in case the PROFIBUS DP cycle lt PLC PLC Cyclic Refresh cyclic refresh PLC Cycle Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction y Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Slave I O data refresh Slave I O data refresh pB cye MT pB cyc at an Toe cyc ae Texe cyc reet TpB cyo i Tps oye i TMProc
363. ve Con 32 0 2000 07 24 Asea Brown Boveri 2 um CPM14 PRT21 V1 0 2002 03 12 OMRON Corporation T Comt PRT21 1 0 2000 04 20 OMRON Corporation Last CS1W PRM21 PRO 3 62 2003 10 31 OMRON Corporation v Pi Help Update Install GSD Files 4a Update Device Catalogue Install a new GSD file Add selected device to the network The Device Catalogue window is opened by either selecting the jue icon in the CX Profibus toolbar or by selecting the View Device Catalogue menu option Both options have toggle function selecting one of them again will close the Device Catalogue The left window pane allows selection of specific groups of DTMs to be dis played The right window pane lists the DTMs which are installed on the PC and which are available for setting up a network A selection of DTMs is made by selecting a specific group in the left window pane The list makes no distinction between normal DTMs and GSD files which have been loaded through the Generic Slave Device DTM The list items in the right window pane are described in the following table 53 CX Profibus ction 3 2 Column Description The Device column contains the names of the DTMs as provided by the DTM or the GSD file If the device is defined by a GSD file the Generic Slave Device DTM reads out the GSD file entry Model Name The string provided by this variable is the name displayed in the list Version The version number defines the revision numb
364. ved by the system and will ignored by the Unit tem Unfreeze If the Unfreeze bit is set the Unfreeze command will be send to the tar geted slave devices The Unfreeze command releases the targeted slave devices from the Freeze mode see below The bit set to OFF indicates that the Unfreeze command will not be transferred to the slave devices Freeze The Freeze command forces the slave devices into the Freeze mode In this mode a slave device will not update its inputs to the Master and continue to transmit the input data acquired before the Freeze com mand If the slave device is already in the Freeze mode a new Freeze com mand will force the slave to update its inputs only once and continue to transmit the new input data to the Master The bit set to OFF indicates that the Freeze command will not be trans ferred to the slave devices 107 Allocated CIO Area Wors o Sectiong2 Bit Name Status Controlled Unit operation by If the Unsync bit is set the Unsync command will be send to the tar geted slave devices The Unsync command releases the targeted slave devices from the Sync mode see below The bit set to OFF indicates that the Unsync command will not be trans ferred to the slave devices The Sync command forces the slave devices into the Sync mode In this mode the slave device will not update its outputs and continues to use the output data received before the Sync command
365. ver it is not recommended to use more than three repeaters in series in a PROFIBUS network Overview of PROFIBUS Section 1 1 1 1 3 Device Types PROFIBUS distinguishes between master devices and slave devices Master Devices Master devices determine the data communication on the bus A Master can send messages without an external request as long as it holds the bus access right the token Masters are also referred to as active devices in the PROFIBUS standard There are two types of master devices Class 1 Master DPM1 A PROFIBUS DP Class 1 Master DPM1 device is a central controller which exchanges information with the decentralized devices i e DP slaves within a specified message cycle Class 2 Master DPM2 PROFIBUS DP class 2 Master DPM2 devices are programmers configura tion devices or operator panels They are used during commissioning for con figuration of the DP system or for operation and monitoring purposes The CS1W PRM21 and the CJU1W PRM21 are both PROFIBUS DP Class 1 Master devices Slave Devices Slave devices are peripheral devices Typical slave devices include input out put devices valves drives and measuring transmitters They do not have bus access rights and they can only acknowledge received messages or send messages to the master when requested to do so Slave devices are also called passive devices Device Profile To enable the exchange of devices from different vendors the user data has to
366. vice differ from the parameter sent by the Master Unit Diag Master_Lock This bit indicates that the slave device has been parameterized by another mas ter The bit is set by the Master Unit if the address in byte 4 differs from 255 and from the Master Unit s own address The slave device sets this bit to zero Slave Diagnostics Byte 2 A layout of Byte 2 is shown below This byte is mapped to the low byte of Word D 765 43 2 10 Byte 2 Diag Prm_Req Diag Stat_Diag Reserved Diag WD_On Diag Freeze_Mode Diag Sync_Mode Diag Deactivated Description Diag Prm_Req This bit is set by the slave device and indicates that it needs to be re aparame terized The slave device is not in Data_Exchange with the Master Unit The bit remains on as long as it has not been parameterized successfully Diag Stat_Diag This bit indicates static diagnostics at the slave device The Master Unit will repeatedly request diagnostics data As long as this bit is set Data_Exchange with the Master Unit is not being performed Reserved This bit is reserved and always set to 1 by the slave device Diag WD_On If the watchdog has been enabled at the slave device through the appropriate setting in the parameterization message this bit will be set Diag Freeze_Mode If the slave device has been set to the Freeze mode using the global command this bit will be set t
367. vice Access Point the PROFIBUS definition for a message ID is defined by the PROFI BUS DP Extension standard By default SAP 51 is used for acyclic data exchange with the PROFIBUS DPV1 Master Unit Class 1 For efficiency reasons however acknowledgement of alarms can be per formed using a different dedicated SAP or message ID SAP50 This will allow other acyclic communication e g re parameterization of the slave device to continue without interference Control Description Alarm acknowledge via When selected the PROFIBUS DPV1 Master Unit will SAP 51 acknowledge each received alarm using SAP 51 mes sage ID default Alarm acknowledge via When selected the PROFIBUS DPV1 Master Unit will SAP 50 acknowledge each received alarm using SAP 50 mes sage ID 3 5 2 Diagnostics User Interface The Generic Slave Device DTM provides a Diagnostics User Interface to dis play diagnostics data sent by the slave device to the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit In general a slave device can send two type of diagnostics Basic Diagnostics e Basic Diagnostics The first six bytes of each diagnostic message sent by a slave device contain mandatory status and error flags The flags are defined by the PROFIBUS standard refer to Appendix B Slave Diagnostics Message for a detailed overview of diagnostics The basic diagnostics information is displayed in the Diagnostic tab of the Diagnostics User Interface Extended Diagnostics e Extended Diag
368. will be mapped The Input Output area will occupy the PLC memory area from this start address to ascending memory locations The total size per Input Output area can be found for each area next to the PLC memory area selection box see for example the figure above in which Output area 1 occupies 6 words The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 Master DTM will check whether two or more se lected mappings on to the PLC memory will be overlapping In that case the start address set will be shown in red Upon downloading the configuration to the CS1W CJ1W PRM21 PROFI BUS DP Master Unit the Master DTM will also check if the PLC memory areas selected do exist in the PLC CPU model connected to the Master Unit e g are any selected EM banks present If any mapping error is discovered by the Master DTM an error message is displayed and download is terminated 151 I O Communication Characteristics 6 5 3 Supported Data Types The CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units perform an interface function between a PROFIBUS network and the CS1 CJ1 PLC CPU On both sides of the interface different formats for data and data storages are used To ensure that I O data transferred through the interface can be used on both sides of the interface without additional formatting the CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master Units perform the necessary data formatting This ensures that I O data in the PLC CPU memory can be processed by standard PLC Instructions and that the
369. will revert back to its default contents i e Device Information Box The Device Information Box contains information obtained from the PROFI BUS DP Master Unit through the communication Item Description OMRON Corporation This is fixed text indicating the Manufacturer of the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Description This string will contain the name of the Unit i e CJ1W PRM21 or CS1W PRM21 Firmware Version This string displays the firmware version currently in the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit 63 CS1 CJ1W PRM21 PROFIBUS DP Master DTM Section 3 3 Master Setup Tab Action to PLC Mode Transition Box Change PLC to RUN MONITOR Mode Change PLC to PROGRAM Mode Auto CLEAR Box 64 The Master Setup tab contains settings regarding the behaviour of the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit itself The Master Setup tab is shown below Fe Device Setup Master Setup Bus Parameters Slave Area OK Action to PLC Mode Transition Cancel To RUN MONITOR Mode p To PROGRAM Mode ma elp Keep Current Mode Keep Current Mode Goto CLEAR Mode Auto Cleap_ Support Auto Clear Mode OFF IV Auto Addressing Auto Clear Mode ON The Action to PLC Mode Transition Box defines the behaviour of the Unit on the PROFIBUS network in case a PLC mode change occurs The check boxes define how the Unit should behave in case the PLC mode is changed from RUN MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode or v
370. y set to 0 3 Turn ON the power again UNITY Always turn OFF the power to the PLC CPU before changing the Unit number setting The Unit only reads the Unit number setting during the initialization following a power up but not following a software reset If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then an I O table must be created for the PLC With CS CJ series PLCs words are automatically allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area The PROFIBUS DP Master Unit uses these words for receiving control data from the CPU Unit and for notifying the CPU Unit of PROFIBUS DP Master Unit and communications status The word addresses in the allocated areas for the CPU Bus Unit are important when creating the user program for using the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit This must be consid ered when setting the unit number The ClO and DM Word allocations are discussed in detail in 4 2 Allocated CIO Area Words The tables below show the relation between the unit num ber and the allocated CIO Area and DM Area words Unit No Allocated words Unit No Allocated words decimal decimal ClO1500 to ClO1524 C1lO1700 to ClO1724 C101525 to ClO1549 C101725 to ClO1749 C101550 to ClO1574 ClO1750 to ClO1774 C1l01575 to ClO1599 C101775 to ClO1799 ClO1600 to ClO1624 C1lO1800 to ClO1824 C101625 to ClO1649 C101825 to ClO1849 ClO1650 to ClO1674 C101850 to ClO1874 C101675 to ClO1699 C101875 to ClO1899 0 1 2 3 4
371. ys turn OFF the power supply to the personal computer Slaves and Communications Units before attempting any of the following e Mounting or dismounting the PROFIBUS DP Master Unit Power Sup ply Units I O Units CPU Units or any other Units e Assembling a Unit e Setting DIP switches or rotary switches e Connecting or wiring the cables e Connecting or disconnecting connectors Be sure that the terminal blocks connectors Memory Units expansion cables and other items with locking devices are properly locked into place Improper locking may result in malfunction Be sure that all the mounting screws terminal screws Unit mounting screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunc tion Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis sipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction Always use the power supply voltage specified in this manual Double check all the wiring and connection of terminal blocks and con nectors before mounting the Units e Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Application Precautions 5 e Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications cable e Separate the comm
372. ze of the channel from which the diagnostics data is sent e 000 Reserved e 001 Bit e 010 2 Bit 011 4 Bit 100 Byte 101 Word 110 2 Words 111 Reserved Appendix Example of Extended Diagnostics Below an example of Extended diagnostics data is given using the definitions above The 6 mandatory bytes preceding them are not shown 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Header byte Device specific Device related diagnostics lt D diagnostics field Device specific contents of length 3 0 1 0 010 110 1 Header byte Module 1 has diagnostics Module related diagnostics lt 1 Module 14 has diagnostics Module 1 Channel 4 Input Overload bit oriented Module 14 Channel 8 High Limit exceeded byte oriented Channel related diagnostics lt Channel related diagnostics lt o lo lo olololelalo o o o lo o o ol lolo o ololo lo oOoj oloj ojo ojo oj o The figure above shows the extended diagnostics of a slave device which contains e Device related diagnostics One header byte and three device specific diagnostics bytes are shown in this example The contents of the diagnostics is device specific e Module related diagnostics One header byte and three module diagnostics bytes The first of three bytes indicates pend

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"